Keysight Nemo Analyze

User Guide
Notices
Copyright Notice
© Keysight Technologies, Inc. 2020
No part of this manual may be
reproduced in any form or by any means
(including electronic storage and retrieval
or translation into a foreign language)
without prior agreement and written
consent from Keysight Technologies, as
governed by United States and
international copyright laws.
Manual Part Number
NTN00000A-90011
Edition
Edition 1,November 10, 2020
Documents Software Version 8.50
Published by:
Keysight Technologies Finland, Ltd.
Elektroniikkatie 10
90590 Oulu
Technology Licenses
The hardware and/or software described
in this document are furnished under a
license and may be used or copied only
in accordance with the terms of such
license.
Declaration of Conformity
Declarations of Conformity for this product
and for other Keysight products may be
downloaded from the Web. Go to
http://www.keysight.com/go/confor
mity
and click on “Declarations of Conformity.”
You can then search by product number to
find the latest Declaration of Conformity.
U.S.Government Rights
The Software is “commercial computer
software,” as defined by Federal
Acquisition Regulation (“FAR”) 2.101.
Pursuant to FAR 12.212 and 27.405-3
and Department of Defense FAR
Supplement (“DFARS”) 227.7202, the
U.S. government acquires commercial
computer software under the same
terms by which the software is
customarily provided to the public.
Accordingly, Keysight provides the
Software to U.S. government
customers under its standard
commercial license, which is embodied
in its End User License Agreement
(EULA), a copy of which can be found
at
http://www.keysight.com/find/s
weula. The license set forth in the
EULA represents the exclusive
authority by which the U.S.
government may use, modify,
distribute, or disclose the Software.
The EULA and the license set forth
therein, does not require or permit,
among other things, that Keysight: (1)
Furnish technical information related to
commercial computer software or
commercial computer software
documentation that is not customarily
provided to the public; or (2)
Relinquish to, or otherwise provide,
the government rights in excess of
these rights customarily provided to
the public to use, modify, reproduce,
release, perform, display, or disclose
commercial computer software or
commercial computer software
documentation. No additional
government requirements beyond
those set forth in the EULA shall apply,
except to the extent that those terms,
rights, or licenses are explicitly
required from all providers of
commercial computer software
pursuant to the FAR and the DFARS
and are set forth specifically in writing
elsewhere in the EULA. Keysight shall
be under no obligation to update,
revise or otherwise modify the
Software. With respect to any
technical data as defined by FAR
2.101,
pursuant to FAR 12.211 and 27.404.2
and DFARS 227.7102, the U.S.
government acquires no greater than
Limited Rights as defined in FAR
27.401 or DFAR 227.7103-5 (c), as
applicable in any technical data.
2
Warranty
THE MATERIAL CONTAINED IN THIS
DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED “AS IS,”
AND IS SUBJECT TO BEING
CHANGED, WITHOUT NOTICE, IN
FUTURE EDITIONS. FURTHER, TO
THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED
BY APPLICABLE LAW, KEYSIGHT
DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES,
EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WITH
REGARD TO THIS MANUAL AND ANY
INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
KEYSIGHT SHALL NOT BE LIABLE
FOR ERRORS OR FOR INCIDENTAL
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE
FURNISHING, USE, OR
PERFORMANCE OF THIS DOCUMENT
OR ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED
HEREIN. SHOULD KEYSIGHT AND
THE USER HAVE A SEPARATE
WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH
WARRANTY TERMS COVERING THE
MATERIAL IN THIS DOCUMENT THAT
CONFLICT WITH THESE TERMS, THE
WARRANTY TERMS IN THE
SEPARATE AGREEMENT WILL
CONTROL.
A CAUTION notice denotes a hazard. It
calls attention to an operating procedure,
practice, or the like that, if not correctly
performed or adhered to, could result in
damage to the product or loss of
important data. Do not proceed beyond a
CAUTION notice until the indicated
conditions are fully understood and met.
A WARNING notice denotes a hazard. It
calls attention to an operating procedure,
practice, or the like that, if not correctly
performed or adhered to, could result in
personal injury or death. Do not proceed
beyond a WARNING notice until the
indicated conditions are fully understood
and met.
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Do not operate Nemo Analyze (or any test device) and drive at the same time. Note
that in some countries it is illegal to drive a car and operate a device at the same time.

Nemo Analyze users must be appropriately trained and should be familiar with the
signaling behind wireless technologies depending on their usage needs.

The user is expected to have basic knowledge on mobile networks and their
terminology.

A working knowledge of computers and Microsoft Windows is required for using the
Nemo Analyze software. The user should know how to use the mouse as well as
standard Windows menus and commands. To review these techniques, see your
Microsoft Windows documentation.

Where to Find the Latest Information

Keysight will periodically update product documentation. For the latest information about this
product, including software upgrades, operating and application information, and product and
accessory information, see the following URL:
www.keysight.com/find/nemo
Is your product software up-to-date?
Keysight will periodically release software updates to fix known defects and incorporate product
enhancements. To search for software updates for your product, go to the Keysight Software
Manager website at:
www.keysight.com/find/softwaremanager

3
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Table of Contents

1 Quick Guide................................................................................................................................................12
Setting up the system ................................................................................................12
2 Introduction ...............................................................................................................................................13
Before you begin ........................................................................................................13
End-User License Agreement .....................................................................................13
Important...................................................................................................................13
3 Installing Nemo Analyze ........................................................................................................................14
Hardware and software requirements ........................................................................14
Nemo Analyze installation ..........................................................................................14
Licensing ...................................................................................................................14
Global License Server................................................................................................. 15
HASP USB key ............................................................................................................ 15
Technical support expiration ..................................................................................... 17
4 Starting Nemo Analyze ..........................................................................................................................18
5 Using Nemo Analyze...............................................................................................................................19
6 Workspace .................................................................................................................................................20
Exporting/importing favorite parameters....................................................................22
Workspace filters .......................................................................................................24
7 Creating the database ............................................................................................................................25
Adding files to the database.......................................................................................25
Migrating Nemo Analyze database to a new laptop ................................................ 25
Importing image files as maps................................................................................... 26
Organize measurements ............................................................................................27
Drag & drop folders .................................................................................................... 28
Search folders............................................................................................................. 29
Hiding measurements ................................................................................................ 37
Query folders .............................................................................................................. 37
Voice Quality folders .................................................................................................. 38
Refresh All Folders ..................................................................................................... 38
Server Folders ............................................................................................................. 39
Joined measurements................................................................................................39
Adding descriptions to measurement files and folders ...............................................39
Delete Folder Contents ..............................................................................................40
Retrieving original files from the database .................................................................40
Database CleanUp .....................................................................................................40
8 Viewing measurement data .................................................................................................................41
Parameters ................................................................................................................41
Statistics/Statistics with filters over parameter ....................................................... 43
Statistics by/Statistics with Filters By: No Grouping ............................................... 44
Statistics by: Fixed Geographical Bin Area ............................................................... 44
Lee’s criteria sampling for scanner measurements.................................................. 47

4
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Parameter launchpad ................................................................................................. 49

Distance Binning......................................................................................................... 51
Change Defaults ......................................................................................................... 51
Viewing measurement data in graphs ........................................................................52
Viewing measurement data on map ...........................................................................54
Changing default map ................................................................................................ 54
Opening measurement files on map ......................................................................... 54
Opening BTS files on map.......................................................................................... 55
Viewing notification icons on map ............................................................................ 57
Use Case 1: Viewing cell footprints, RSCP footprints, and LTE footprints.............. 58
Use Case 2: Viewing uplink voice quality server data .............................................. 60
Use Case 3: Viewing IP/UDP packet trace data ....................................................... 61
Use Case 4: Viewing Binary Log Data ....................................................................... 64
Parameter filtering .....................................................................................................66
Filtering based on polygon area ................................................................................ 67
Use Case 5: Global parameter filtering based on a secondary parameter ............. 68
Filtering data and creating custom KPIs .....................................................................73
Drill-down..................................................................................................................77
Drilling Down from Map Data view............................................................................ 80
Drilling down from event type parameters in Map Data view ................................. 81
Exclude events...........................................................................................................82
Data views .................................................................................................................82
Graphs .......................................................................................................................83
Graph Tools menu ...................................................................................................... 83
Graph popup menu..................................................................................................... 83
Change Graph Type .................................................................................................... 83
Reset ........................................................................................................................... 84
Query ........................................................................................................................... 84
Pick Parameter ........................................................................................................... 84
Add Function............................................................................................................... 85
Add Reference Line .................................................................................................... 85
Tool .............................................................................................................................. 85
Mode ........................................................................................................................... 86
Side Panel ................................................................................................................... 87
3D Mode ...................................................................................................................... 89
Line Graph Filled......................................................................................................... 89
Group Values .............................................................................................................. 89
Graph Properties......................................................................................................... 90
Layer Properties.......................................................................................................... 92
Layer properties for line graphs................................................................................. 94
Layer properties for bar graphs ................................................................................. 95
Layer properties for scatter graphs ........................................................................... 95
Use Case 6: Multiple graph layers ............................................................................. 96
Use Case 7: Notification icons in graphs................................................................... 97

5
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Use Case 8: Correlating parameters using color grids and surface graphs............ 98
Use Case 9: Viewing 5G measurement results in 3D Visualizer (optional) ............. 99
Grids ........................................................................................................................100
Side Panel ................................................................................................................. 100
Row Details ............................................................................................................... 102
Export Data to ........................................................................................................... 103
Grid Properties.......................................................................................................... 103
Use Case 10: Color sets in grids .............................................................................. 105
Use Case 11: Play audio sample.............................................................................. 108
Use Case 12: Using L3 and RRC message search parameters .............................. 109
Maps .......................................................................................................................109
Viewing in live maps................................................................................................. 110
Google Street View................................................................................................... 111
Map/Live Map Tools menu....................................................................................... 112
Map popup menu ..................................................................................................... 113
Add ............................................................................................................................ 113
Find............................................................................................................................ 113
Generate color set .................................................................................................... 114
Export to KML file ..................................................................................................... 114
Zoom to Layers ......................................................................................................... 115
Create New Folder From This Area ...................................................................... 115
Set As Default Location ........................................................................................ 115
Show Street View on Location ............................................................................. 115
Hide Street View ................................................................................................... 115
Side Panel - Map .................................................................................................. 116
Drawing options.................................................................................................... 118
Tool ........................................................................................................................ 118
MapX ..................................................................................................................... 118
Map Properties...................................................................................................... 119
Route Properties ................................................................................................... 119
Draw route as symbols ......................................................................................... 123
BTS files................................................................................................................. 125
BTS properties ...................................................................................................... 129
Use Case 13: Adding map layers and saving layer combinations as geosets... 132
Use Case 14: Coloring routes based on BTS coverage ...................................... 133
Use Case 15: Performing area binning ................................................................ 134
Use Case 16: Comparing two groups of measurements from the same route on map 142
Use Case 17: Displaying base station cell beam range on map ........................ 146
Use Case 18: Synchronizing base station map overlay with grid rows ............. 152
Use Case 19: Using BTS reference parameters .................................................. 154
Use Case 20: Displaying base station connections on map based on pilot pollution 155
Use Case 21: Cell locator analysis ....................................................................... 157
Use Case 22: 5G beam visualization.................................................................... 159

6
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Use Case 23: Exporting KML beam lines to Google Earth.................................. 160
Spreadsheet Grid .....................................................................................................160
Editing cell format .................................................................................................... 163
Filtering data............................................................................................................. 166
Creating formulas ..................................................................................................... 168
Adding functions....................................................................................................... 168
Use Case 24: Retrieving data from minimized data sets ....................................... 170
Processing uplink voice quality data ........................................................................171
Indoor measurements ..............................................................................................172
In-building measurements with IBWC maps .......................................................... 174
Numerical data views...............................................................................................178
Info views ................................................................................................................180
Timeline view ...........................................................................................................181
Highlight Parameter in Timeline view ..................................................................... 182
Notifications in Timeline view .................................................................................. 184
Range selection in Timeline view ............................................................................ 184
Other views..............................................................................................................186
Network Parameters................................................................................................. 186
Measurement Settings ............................................................................................. 187
Properties .................................................................................................................. 187
Query Clipboard........................................................................................................ 188
Activity ...................................................................................................................... 189
Log window ............................................................................................................... 189
9 Workbooks .............................................................................................................................................. 191
Adding data views....................................................................................................192
Adding pages ...........................................................................................................196
Saving a workbook...................................................................................................197
Exporting workbooks ...............................................................................................197
Exporting workbooks as PDF/MS Word/MS PowerPoint files............................... 198
Exporting workbooks as image files ........................................................................ 198
Copying a workbook ................................................................................................199
Workbook Properties ...............................................................................................200
Page Properties .......................................................................................................201
Example workbook...................................................................................................202
Sharing workbooks ..................................................................................................204
10 Reports ..................................................................................................................................................... 205
Spreadsheet report templates (.srt) .........................................................................205
Workbooks ..............................................................................................................205
Generating reports ...................................................................................................206
Creating custom reports with Spreadsheet Report Designer .................................... 209
Creating and opening a report template................................................................. 209
Saving a report template ......................................................................................... 213
Column group ........................................................................................................... 213
Insert columns .......................................................................................................... 214
Cumulation and density for specific parameters .................................................... 215

7
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Modifying a spreadsheet report template............................................................... 215

Handling of deleted or renamed worksheets.......................................................... 219
Using VBA macros in Analyze Spreadsheet reports ............................................... 220
Showing PDF/CDF charts in reports ....................................................................... 223
Showing map plots in report templates .............................................................. 230
Reporting with Microsoft Excel.................................................................................231
Reporting with Crystal Reports ................................................................................239
Exporting reports ...................................................................................................... 240
Configuring reports .................................................................................................. 241
Reporting with MS PowerPoint/Word ......................................................................242
PowerPoint 2007 setup ............................................................................................ 246
Report Automation...................................................................................................251
Scheduling events with Nemo Analyze client......................................................... 251
Reporting automation with Nemo Analyze server .................................................. 266
11 Customization ........................................................................................................................................ 271
Creating Custom Queries .........................................................................................271
SQL queries .............................................................................................................271
Getting started.......................................................................................................... 271
Nemo Analyze database schema............................................................................. 272
Relations between tables......................................................................................... 272
Mapping of Nemo log file events to database tables ............................................. 272
Views – Automatically joined tables........................................................................ 274
Database timestamps............................................................................................... 276
Filtering log files ....................................................................................................... 277
Value enumeration ................................................................................................... 278
Connections .............................................................................................................. 279
Correlating tables based on time ........................................................................ 281
Time range correlation ......................................................................................... 281
Guidelines for creating SQL queries .................................................................... 282
Unique features of Nemo Analyze SQL interface................................................ 282
SQL vs. KPI workbench ........................................................................................ 283
Query Manager ........................................................................................................283
Pick Measurement Parameter ................................................................................. 284
Generic Query Wizard .............................................................................................. 287
Manual Query............................................................................................................ 291
Correlate parameters ............................................................................................... 293
Database Browser ....................................................................................................293
Custom KPI Workbench ...........................................................................................294
Designing custom KPIs and adding input data sets ............................................... 295
Parameter ................................................................................................................. 296
Combining input data sets ....................................................................................... 298
Correlation: Previous/Current/Next Value .............................................................. 299
Correlation: Previous Or Current Value/Next Or Current Value ............................ 301
Correlation: All Values Within Time Range ............................................................. 303

8
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Join: Inner Join ......................................................................................................... 304

Join: Left Outer Join ................................................................................................. 306
Join: Union ................................................................................................................ 308
Join: Cartesian Product ........................................................................................ 310
Adding operations................................................................................................. 311
Operation: Case .................................................................................................... 311
Operation: Moving Average.................................................................................. 313
Operation: Conversion .......................................................................................... 313
Operation: State Machine .................................................................................... 314
Operation: Group By/Binning............................................................................... 319
Aggregate Functions ............................................................................................ 323
Sort elements........................................................................................................ 325
Filters ..................................................................................................................... 326
Filters: Top-N, Bottom-N, Nth Best, Nth Worst, and Discard Worst................. 330
Mathematical functions........................................................................................ 332
Time functions: Resample .................................................................................... 334
Time functions: Time Shift ................................................................................... 335
Running and testing KPIs ..................................................................................... 337
Saving KPIs as components ................................................................................. 337
Saving Custom KPIs ............................................................................................. 338
Reopening custom KPIs for editing ..................................................................... 339
Defining KPI execution method and value constants ......................................... 340
Defining value constants ...................................................................................... 341
Use Case 26: Creating complex filters using multiple conditions ..................... 341
Use Case 27: Creating a KPI for dropped calls resulting from a missing handover347
12 Other tasks .............................................................................................................................................. 369
Editing color sets .....................................................................................................369
Importing color sets .................................................................................................370
Automatic generation of color sets ......................................................................... 370
Use Case 28: Automatic generation of color set for a value range ....................... 373
Use Case 29: Creating a color set ........................................................................... 375
Use Case 30: Creating and applying a color set on map ....................................... 377
Use Case 31: Creating and applying a color set in grid ......................................... 380
Managing Workspace with Projects .........................................................................384
Managing users and user groups .............................................................................386
User groups............................................................................................................... 387
Viewing Server statistics ..........................................................................................388
Editing Operator Settings.........................................................................................389
Editing CDMA operator settings ...............................................................................390
Configuring notification icons...................................................................................391
Configuring notifications using the Parameters view............................................. 391
Notification configuration ........................................................................................ 393
Configuring system settings.....................................................................................393
Options – Environment............................................................................................. 393

9
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Options – Database .................................................................................................. 395

Options – Nemo Cloud ............................................................................................. 395
Options – Color ......................................................................................................... 395
Options – Scheduler ................................................................................................. 396
Options – Statistics .................................................................................................. 396
Options – IP Trace .................................................................................................... 396
Options – Graph........................................................................................................ 396
Options – Map .......................................................................................................... 396
Options – BTS ....................................................................................................... 397
Importing custom settings ................................................................................... 398
Exporting custom settings ....................................................................................398
Importing MapInfo polygons ................................................................................ 399
Viewing log on system performance and SQL functions ........................................ 401
Loading Nemo CEM logfiles ..................................................................................401
13 User Interface ......................................................................................................................................... 404
Menus......................................................................................................................404
File menu................................................................................................................... 404
View menu ................................................................................................................ 405
Tools menu................................................................................................................ 405
Utilities menu ............................................................................................................ 406
Map Menu/Live Map Menu ...................................................................................... 406
Layout menu ............................................................................................................. 407
Help menu................................................................................................................. 408
14 Shortcut Keys ......................................................................................................................................... 409
15 Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................................... 410
16 FAQ ............................................................................................................................................................ 411
17 Technical support ................................................................................................................................. 412
Nemo Support Portal ...............................................................................................412
Phone and email support .........................................................................................412
Locations for Keysight Technologies ........................................................................412
18 Appendix 1 – Making MapInfo Maps ............................................................................................. 413
Making MapInfo maps..............................................................................................413
Registering a raster map.......................................................................................... 413
19 Appendix 2 – CVS Files ....................................................................................................................... 415
Adding CSV files to the database .............................................................................415
Opening CSV files from the database ..................................................................... 419
Opening CSV files without database import ........................................................... 421
Creating custom queries for CSV files .................................................................... 423
20 Appendix 3 – Event-based Data Recording Principle of Nemo Tools ................................ 426
21 Appendix 4 – Difference Between Nemo Call Events and ETSI Call Events .................... 427
22 Appendix 5 – Nemo Analyze Scalar Functions........................................................................... 428
Freeze Frame Scalar Function ..................................................................................428
Time Functions ........................................................................................................429
Binary Time functions............................................................................................... 429

10
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Binary Time Interval Functions ................................................................................ 433

SQL Time Functions.................................................................................................. 434
Translator Functions ................................................................................................435
Datatype Functions ..................................................................................................436
Decoder Functions ...................................................................................................438
Connection Functions ..............................................................................................440
OID Functions ..........................................................................................................441
23 Appendix 6 – Nemo Analyze Stored Procedures ....................................................................... 443
Stored procedures ...................................................................................................443
Fixed procedures .....................................................................................................443
QSR Procedures........................................................................................................ 443
GPS procedures .......................................................................................................445
BTS Procedures .......................................................................................................447
Decoder Procedures ................................................................................................447
Dynamic Procedures ................................................................................................449

11
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

1 Quick Guide
The instructions given in this quick guide have been designed to get you started in a few easy steps.
Please, note that these instructions do not give a full picture of the software. Consequently, every step has
a cross-reference to the place in the manual where the topic in question will be explained in more detail.

Setting up the system

Installing the software. Check the manual for hardware requirements if necessary (see Chapter “Hardware
and software requirements”). Run the Nemo Analyze installation program Nemo Analyze.x.xx.xx.exe from
the Nemo Analyze USB flash drive.
Loading files to database. Start by loading your measurement and BTS files in the Nemo Analyze
database (see Chapter “Creating the database”). This may take a few minutes, but once files have been
added, they will remain in the database until you remove them.
You are now ready to start analyzing. You can, for example, generate a report from the data (see Chapter
“Reports”) and view measurements in graphs and maps (see Chapter “Viewing measurement data”).

12
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

2 Introduction
Welcome to the User Guide for Nemo Analyze. The purpose of this user guide is to provide you with the
basic steps for getting started with Nemo Analyze and where you can go to get additional help
information.

Before you begin

Nemo Analyze is a powerful post-processing and reporting tool for planning, optimizing, and maintaining
cellular networks. Nemo Analyze serves many purposes from network overview to problem solving and
report generation. Some of its features include:
• Post-processing of Nemo Outdoor, Nemo Cloud, Nemo Invex, and Nemo Handy measurement
files
• Full support for the latest Nemo measurement file format in real time
• SQL interface to the database engine
• User-defined key performance indicators (KPIs) with custom queries
• Open ODBC interface for third-party software
• Fully customizable user interface
• Statistical analysis and reporting
• Predefined, customizable report templates

End-User License Agreement

The software described in this manual is furnished under a license agreement and may be used only in
accordance with the terms of that agreement.

Important
The test devices (smartphones etc.) tested and sold by Keysight Nemo Wireless Network Solutions are
intended for testing purposes only. Software changes in devices may limit their normal use. Keysight
Nemo Wireless Network Solutions does its best to provide test devices without any limitations but it is not
always possible. Keysight Nemo Wireless Network Solutions assumes no liability if any commercial
application or feature is blocked or limited due to software or other device-related modifications.

If the test device is moved to another country or used in the network of another operator than initially
ordered, it is possible that the device does not support all network features. Keysight Nemo Wireless
Network Solutions assumes no liability in any cases.

The Nemo Analyze user must be appropriately trained and should be familiar with the signaling behind
wireless technologies.

13
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

3 Installing Nemo Analyze

Hardware and software requirements

• Intel i7, 4 core or similar
• 16 GB RAM minimum
• 256GB SSD hard drive (or high-performance HDD)
• Nemo Analyze HASP USB key
• One USB port for HASP USB key
• 24-inch monitor, resolution 1920 x 1080
• Windows 10, 64-bit
• Crystal Reports Professional edition for creating custom-made report templates (optional)

Nemo Analyze installation

Installing Nemo Analyze:
Microsoft Network Monitor 3.4 must be installed BEFORE Nemo Analyze to enable complete IP/UDP
trace details to be displayed in Nemo Analyze. For installing the Microsoft Network Monitor 3.4, see
Installing Microsoft Network Monitor 3.4 on page 62. If Microsoft Network Monitor 3.4 is nevertheless
installed after Nemo Analyze, Nemo Analyze’s Microsoft Network Monitor 3.4 functionality can be
activated by copying the file NMAPI.dll from the folder C:\Program Files\Microsoft Network Monitor 3\ to
the folder C:\Program Files\Anite\Nemo Analyze. If Microsoft Network Monitor 3.4 is not found on the PC
or Nemo Analyze has been installed before Microsoft Network Monitor 3.4, Nemo Analyze will display only
a limited set of IP/UDP trace details.

Note: With PCAP log file decoding, the Microsoft Network Monitor that is installed
must be 32-bit, even if the Windows is 64-bit.

To begin Nemo Analyze installation, insert the setup USB flash drive into the USB port.

Note: The user performing the installation must have administration rights.
Installation without administration rights could result in a database error. Start
installation by right-clicking the setup executable and select "Run as administrator"
from the menu.

Note: Before installation, uninstall the previous version of Nemo Analyze using
Add/Remove Programs from the Windows Control Panel.

Select Run from the Windows Start menu. Type D:\Nemo Analyze\ x.xx.xx.exe and press the return key.
This command starts the Nemo Analyze installation software. Follow the instructions given by the
installation program.
Once the installation of Nemo Analyze Setup Prerequisites has been completed, the Welcome to the
Nemo Analyze Setup Wizard dialog box opens. Click Next.
The End-User License Agreement dialog box opens. Select I accept the terms of the license
agreement, and click Next.
The Custom Setup view opens. Click Browse and select the location where you want to install Nemo
Analyze. After this, click Next.
The Ready to Install the Program dialog box opens. Select Install.
The Completed the Nemo Analyze Setup Wizard dialog box opens. Click Finish and restart the computer.
When starting, Nemo Analyze checks if the database is correct, that is has the same version as Nemo
Analyze. If the database does not match, a warning is displayed. The warning does not prevent you from
using Nemo Analyze but may cause it not to function properly.

Licensing
For Nemo Analyze you can select between two licensing options: Global License Server or HASP USB
key.

14
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Global License Server

See Nemo Global License Server - End-User Guide document for instructions on how to use the Nemo
Global License Server.

HASP USB key

Nemo Analyze software license is tied to a HASP USB key and it is not possible to install Nemo Analyze
without it. Software-based license is not available. A HASP USB key will be delivered in the Nemo
Analyze package.

If you have problems starting Nemo Analyze, and if the following error messages appear, please contact
Nemo Technical Support at nemo.support@keysight.com.

Note: HASP USB keys are not needed when using floating license.

Connecting the HASP USB key in the USB port:

Plug the HASP USB key into your computer's USB port.
Do not plug the HASP USB key into any other port. It may damage your computer.

If the following error message appears, please contact Nemo Technical Support at
nemo.support@keysight.com. The USB key battery has run out and needs to be
changed.

3.3.2.1 No valid license detected

If the error message “Error: No valid license detected….” appears when the application is started, either
the USB key is not plugged in or the key is an unsupported model.
Please follow the instructions for how to read the license information from the existing key. No valid
technical support agreement
If an error message stating that the version of Nemo Analyze is not supported by the technical support
appears, it means that the HASP USB key type is correct, but that the key is missing valid technical
support and maintenance agreement information.
Please follow the instructions for how to read the license information from the existing key with the
Remote Update Utility. After uninstallation, reboot the computer and re-install the previous version.

The HASP USB keys are updated using the Remote Update Utility software. Before updating Nemo
Analyze application please make sure that new key is available. Note that you must use the latest version
of the software, or it can alternatively be downloaded from KSM. See the instructions below for updating
your Nemo Analyze USB key.

Updating the HASP USB key through Nemo Support

It is recommended to update the existing HASP USB key through Nemo Support.
Connect your HASP USB key and start the SecureUpdate by selecting Start | All Programs | Nemo
Tools | Remote Update Utility.

15
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The Collect Key Status Information tab opens.

Select Update of existing protection key.

Click Collect Information. If the Select HASP Key dialog box appears, select the HASP HL item and click
OK.
Define the location where the C2V file is saved and send the C2V file to Nemo Technical Support at
nemo.support@keysight.com.
Please add the following information to the email using the following subject “Nemo Analyze HASP USB
key update”:
• Company name
• First name
• Surname
• Street address
• Zip/ Postal Code
• Country
• Telephone number
• Mobile number
After you have received the V2C file containing the update, select Update File in the Apply License
Update tab and click Apply Update.
The HASP USB key is now updated. Nemo Analyze can be installed and is ready for use.

16
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Technical support expiration

The dongle keys used with Nemo Analyze include a compulsory technical support and maintenance
agreement option. The technical support expiration date defines the date the agreement ends. After this
date it is not possible to start the new version of the Nemo Analyze application. For example: A customer
has purchased Nemo Analyze version 8.40 with a 1-year technical support maintenance agreement in
February 2020. The customer is entitled for free updates until February 2021. Nemo Analyze versions
released after February 2021 cannot be used with the dongle key without renewing the technical support
& maintenance agreement. After the technical support & maintenance agreement is renewed, the dongle
key can be updated remotely and the customer can update the application to the latest version.

17
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

4 Starting Nemo Analyze

After running Setup, you will see a new Nemo Tools program group under the Programs selection in the
Windows Start menu.

To start Nemo Analyze:

Double-click the Nemo Analyze.exe icon in My Computer or select it from the Start menu
(StartProgramsNemo ToolsNemo Analyze).
When Nemo Analyze is starting, hold down the Shift key to prevent Nemo Analyze from loading a
previously used workspace.
When the program starts, the window below will open. In the Welcome to Nemo Analyze workbook you
will find useful information about Nemo Analyze, links to related documents, and shortcuts to loading
measurement and BTS files.

Ribbonbar

Workspace
Workboo
k area

Parameters
view

18
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

5 Using Nemo Analyze

In Nemo Analyze you can view measurement data in multiple ways. The most convenient way, however,
is to focus on the Workspace user interface since it is quick and easy. For example, in the workspace you
can double-click a parameter, and Nemo Analyze opens the parameter automatically in the default data
view. Furthermore, you can go to View | Workbook | Add Data View, choose a particular data view,
select a measurement, and drag a parameter from the Parameters view in the data view. You can also
view several parameters in the same data view by dragging them in it. If you drag a parameter in an
empty workbook, a dialog box appears and asks you to select a data view type.
If you drag a measurement file to a workbook with a data view, a dialog box emerges asking you to select
the parameter you wish to view. The filter field above the Parameters view is useful when looking for a
specific parameter in a long list.
All data views are synchronized with each other based on time. Consequently, if you open two or more
data views on the same measurement file but on different parameters simultaneously, and switch from
one point of time in one data view to another point in time, the data in the other data views change
accordingly.

19
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

6 Workspace
The Workspace forms the basis of the user interface in Nemo Analyze. All measurements and parameters
can be found in the workspace, and from there it is convenient to drag them in various data views. See
also Chapter “Using Nemo Analyze”. The Workspace view is by default attached to the left-hand side of
the Analyze main window. You can also drag it elsewhere in the window, and if you want to dock it back to
the side of the main window, double-click on the Workspace.
The Workspace view consists of the following pages: Measurements, IP Traces, Base Stations, Maps,
Polygons, Data Source Files, Macros, and Reports pages, respectively. You can switch between these
pages via the icon tabs at the bottom of the Workspace view.
The Measurements page in the Workspace is divided into three sections: Folders, Measurements, and
Parameters. The folders include the All Measurements folder, which shows all the files that are currently in
the database, and other user-defined folders. The current database connection is also identified next to
the All Measurements folder, for example Analyze Local Database. Measurements displays a list of all
measurements in the folder selected in the Folders section. The name of the measurement device is also
displayed when the mouse is hovered over a measurement file. Parameters shows all available
parameters and KPIs for the selected file, measurement, or folder, depending on the selections in the
other two sections. The KPIs can be displayed in graphs, maps, and other data views, and statistics can
also be calculated from the Parameters view.

You can add parameters to Favorites by right-clicking on a parameter and selecting Add to Favorites
from the popup menu. To toggle between the Favorites view and the Parameters view, click the Favorites
button in the upper right corner of the Parameters view.
The search fields marked with enable you to search for, for example, measurements, parameters,
units, files, and sites. The search fields support the common keyboard shortcut commands (ctrl-a/x/c/v/z).
Note that you can do a search with several separate words with AND (default with searches with more
than one words), OR, and brackets as search operators.

20
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

21
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

For more information on macros, go to Help | Macro reference in the ribbon bar.

Exporting/importing favorite parameters

It is possible to export and import favorite (starred) parameters by exporting/importing identifiers of all
favorite parameters.
To Export favorite parameters, select File | Settings (Export).
The Save As dialog box opens. Name the file and click Save.
The Export Settings dialog box opens.

22
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Select the parameter favorites you want to export and click OK.
To import parameter favorites, select File | Settings (Import).
The Open dialog box opens. Open the export file (*aex) where you have saved the exported favorite
parameters by selecting Open.

Select the parameter favorites you want to import and click OK.
A Settings Import dialog box appears asking if you want to replace existing parameter favorites.
If you select Yes, all favorites are cleared and new ones are imported. If you select No, existing favorites
are remembered and imported ones are added.

23
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Workspace filters
Workspace filters enable the user to locate measurement files, parameters, maps, base stations, etc.
more quickly. Below you can find some usage examples for the filters.
Above the measurement files you can find the filter for measurement files. Type the name of the
measurement file in the filter field to find the desired measurement file. Above the Parameters view you
can see the filter field for parameters. Type in the name of the parameter, and only parameters matching
the name will be viewed in the Parameters view.

In the Base Stations view of the Workspace, the filter can find base stations based on any content in the
BTS file, allowing base stations to be filtered based on, for example, channel number.

24
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

7 Creating the database

When you start Nemo Analyze for the first time, the database is empty. Adding files – measurements, BTS
files, and maps – to the database may take a while, but once files have been added, they will remain in
the database until you remove them.
For instruction on how to add CSV files to the database, see “Appendix 2”.

Adding files to the database

Select File | Measurement | Open [Measurement /Map/BTS/Report/Data Source File].
The Open dialog box opens. Select the file(s) you want to add to the database and click Open. You can
select several files by holding down the Shift key. You can also drag and drop measurement files directly
to the workspace.
From the Files of type drop-down menu you can define the type of file that you want to open.

In addition to the Nemo measurement tools (Nemo Outdoor, Nemo Handy, Nemo Walker Air, Nemo Invex
II, Nemo Autonomous Probe), Nemo Analyze supports the file formats of the following third-party tools:
InfoVista TEMS product family and EADS REMS TETRAPOL. CSV format is also supported. Marker file
and map are loaded automatically from Nemo Handy embedded indoor file when downloading the file to
Nemo Analyze.

Note that when adding 5G and IoT measurement files to Nemo Analyze, you need
the corresponding license options in your Nemo Analyze license.

Note that adding files to the database may take several minutes depending on the
number and the size of the files.

Note that all the files need to have unique file names. In addition, certain SQL-
reserved words such as “BTS” and “DATE” (written in all capitals) and some special
characters cannot appear in the file name as it might cause errors when used with
parameters and reports.

Note that the file names of Nemo measurement files must follow the format
filename.devicenumber.nmf (for example, t5gsm.1.nmf). Device number signifies the
number of the device in case of simultaneous measurements with multiple devices.
Device number must always be separated with an extra dot in the file name. With
one device, the value is 1.

Note that the marker file and map are loaded automatically from Handy embedded
indoor file when downloading the file to Analyze.

The Activity (see Chapter “Activity”) displays the progress of file upload, file conversion, and file upload
queue.
The added measurement files will appear in the All Measurements folder in the Workspace |
Measurements view in the left-hand side of the Nemo Analyze main window.

Migrating Nemo Analyze database to a new laptop

When changing your laptop, it is possible to migrate existing Nemo Analyze database to the new laptop
once you have Analyze already installed on it. To achieve this, copy the following two subfolders from
Nemo Tools folder on the C:Nemo Analyze, with the exception of the Logs folder under Nemo Analyze
(DO NOT copy the Logs folder or the database might get corrupted), and Nemo Analyze Datastore.

25
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Importing image files as maps

In addition to adding map files in the database through File | Measurement | Open Map, you can import
image files to be used as maps. Select File | | Import | Image as map. In the Open dialog box, select the
image that you want to use as a map. It can be, for example, a floorplan from a test site.
After selecting the image file you need to define either the width and the length of the map area in meters,
or the GPS coordinates for two map corners. After you click OK in the Map Import Parameters dialog box,
the map is added in the database and it will appear in the Maps folder in the workspace.

26
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

You can also create black and white copies of raster maps by right-clicking on a map in the workspace
and selecting Create Black & White Copy. The map is saved with the same name with ‘BW’ added at the
end of the file name.

Organize measurements
By default, all added measurement files go into the All Measurements folder.

If you have a lot of files, it may be convenient to categorize measurement files into custom-made
subfolders. In the Organize Measurements dialog box you can conveniently handle and organize large
sets of measurement files. Go to File in the ribbon bar and select Organize, or right-click on the All
Measurements folder in the Workspace and select Organize.

In the Organize Measurements dialog box you can create new folders and subfolders, make joined
measurements, and remove files from drag & drop folders. Right-click on a folder in the left-hand panel to
create new folders. See the following chapters for information on the different folder types.

27
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Select measurements, right-click on them, and click Join measurements on the Tools toolbar to
create joined measurements. See Chapter “Joined measurements” for more information on joined
measurements.
You can also organize measurements in the Workspace. Right-click on the All Measurements item and
select Add Folder.

There are four types of folders you can add: Drag & Drop, Search, Query, and Voice Quality.

Drag & drop folders

Drag & Drop folders are folders where you can drag files from the All Measurements folder. You can
organize files, for example, by technology, time or place. When you drag and drop files from the All

28
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Measurements folder to the custom-made sub-folders, the files are only copied, that is, the files will
appear in two folders. The drag & drop folders are identified with a symbol.
Note that if you export any type of folders (search, query, drag and drop) and import them to another PC
with Nemo Analyze version 7.80, all folders are imported as drag and drop files.

The example shows a Workspace with two custom-made drag & drop folders named Dropped calls and
May 2016. The Dropped calls folder has five files, and the May 2016 folder has two files. The same files
are also in the All Measurements folder.

Search folders
Search folders are folders where files are copied based on user-defined search criteria. The search
folders are identified with a symbol. Note that you can type in several words in the Search field, and
Nemo Analyze will search for both words even if written together. To create a new search folder, right-
click on the All Measurements folder, and select Add Folder | Search… from the popup menu.
If you have an existing search folder and you have loaded new files to the database, you must refresh the
folder to display also the newly added files. To refresh a folder, right-click on the folder, and select
Refresh from the popup menu.

The Search Folder Properties dialog box opens by selecting Properties from the previous menu. The
dialog box allows you to define search criteria for the folder using the Measurement, Date, Notifications,
Network, System, Applications, Packet technologies, LTE and System lock tabs. You can combine
multiple search criteria and create search folders for, for example, WiMAX™ scanners from specific dates
and from specific polygon-defined geographical area.

29
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Name defines the search folder name.

Title, extension and description options allow you to search for specific measurement files based on the
filename, file extension, and file description.
Device type enables you to search for mobile or scanner measurements.
Area enables you to search for measurements made on a defined area. To define the area, click Define
Area. This opens the Select Polygon Area dialog box below.
Clicking the Define Area button on the Properties dialog box’s Measurement tab (see above) opens the
Select Polygon Area dialog box.

30
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

With Area | Name you can select a polygon area you have previously saved.
By clicking Area you are able to select a polygon on the map. After selection, the Add polygon dialog box
opens, in which you can give the polygon a name.
You can zoom in and zoom out to change the map view.
By clicking Pan you can move the map by dragging it.
By clicking Reset you can erase the area selection made.
Size of measured area defines the size of measured area in square kms.
Has BTS loaded finds only measurement files with BTS files designated to them.

Start date and End date allow you to define a time range from which all measurement files will be
searched.
Search last allows you to search a defined number of the most recent measurement files based on the
following parameters:
Days, Weeks, and Months finds measurement files from an N number of previous days, weeks, and
months.
Measurements finds measurement files from an N number of the most recent measurement sessions.
Duration allows you to search for specific measurement files based on their duration.

31
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Hour from N to N allows you to filter files based on the hour of day when they were recorded
In the Notifications page you can select the events you want to include in the search.

With the Parameters option you can search for parameters.

Parameter and value allow searching for specific parameters and their values.

32
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

With the Mobile country code option you can search for measurements made in a certain country.
With the Mobile network code option you can search for measurements made in a certain network.

Selecting System filter enables you to search for measurement made in a certain system and a certain
band. First, select a system, then select a band and click Add.
With the Applications option you can perform searches based on tests performed in the log file.

33
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

With the Packet Technologies option you can perform searches based on packet technologies.

With the LTE option you can perform searches based on LTE-related events.

34
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

With the System lock option you can perform searches based on system locks.

35
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

With the Inbuilding option you can perform searches based on existing floorplans.

Inbuilding enables you to select floorplans.

You can select a venue, building, and a floor for the floorplan.

36
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Finally, click OK and the measurements that match the search criteria are copied to the search folder.

Hiding measurements
When there are 20000+ log files in the database, it is recommended to hide measurements to improve the
responsiveness of the Nemo Analyze user interface.
To hide measurements, right-click on the All Measurements folder and select Hide Measurements from
the popup menu.

Query folders
Query folders are folders where files are added based on user-defined criteria, that is, queries. Once the
query is defined, Nemo Analyze will go through the measurement files in the database and automatically
add all relevant files to the query folder.
To create a new query folder, right-click on the All Measurements folder and select Add Folder | Query
from the popup menu.

If you have an existing query folder and you have loaded new files to the database, you must refresh the
folder to display also the newly added files. To refresh a folder, right-click on the folder, and select
Refresh from the popup menu.

37
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The Properties dialog box opens. In the Query field, select the criteria according to which the files will be
copied to the folder, for example, Last Year. The folder will be named automatically, but if you wish to
name the folder manually, clear the option and type a name. Click OK.
Nemo Analyze creates the new folder, and the files that match the query criteria are copied to the folder.
The query folders are identified with a symbol.

The example shows a Workspace with one query folder named Edge.

Voice Quality folders

Voice quality folders can be used to automatically find the server side log files of selected mobile log files.
Note that displaying the UL MOS of a selected mobile log file is done automatically; this feature is not
needed for that purpose. See “Use Case 2: Viewing uplink voice quality server data”.
To create a new voice quality folder, right-click on the All Measurements folder and select Add Folder |
Voice Quality from the popup menu.

The Properties dialog box opens. The folder will be named automatically, but if you wish to name the
folder manually, clear the option and type a name. Select mobile measurements for which to find
corresponding voice quality server files through the Browse button and click OK.

Refresh All Folders

To refresh all folders, right-click on the All Measurements folder and select Refresh All Folders from the
popup menu.

38
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Server Folders
You can create in Nemo Analyze Client your own server folders that are available for all users connected
to the Nemo Analyze Server. For example, measurements downloaded from Nemo Cloud are
automatically organized into folders based on the measurement file name.

To create server folders, right-click on the Server Folders folder and select Add Server Folder. Name the
folder and click OK. Next, add measurement files to the folder by dragging and dropping.

♦ Note that you must add a measurement to the server folder you have created before
refreshing server folders, otherwise the folder will be erased.

To refresh Server folders, right-click on the Server Folders folder and select Refresh Server Folders.

To delete Server folders, right-click on the Server Folders folder and select Delete Server Folders.

Joined measurements
With Nemo Analyze it is possible to join separate measurement files into a single joined measurement.
Joined measurements will be handled as one measurement file.
Right-click on All Measurements and select Add Joined Measurement.
In the Add Joined Measurement dialog box, type a name for the joined measurement, for example, May 3
2016.

To allow joining of overlapping measurements, select to View | Options | Database | Queries | Allow
overlapping when joining measurements.
The joined measurements appear in the Workspace | Measurements. You can now drag & drop
measurement files into the folder in the Measurements section. Joined measurements are identified with a
symbol.

It is also possible to remove all measurements from the joined measurement file by right-clicking on the
joined measurement file and selecting Remove All Joined Measurements.

Adding descriptions to measurement files and folders

Custom descriptions can be added to measurement files and folders. These descriptions can be used, for
instance, to further individualize particular files or folders for the purposes of later searches.
To add a description, right-click on the file or folder, and select Set Description from the popup menu.
The Measurement Description dialog box opens. Enter the description to the Measurement file description
field and click OK. The description is displayed as a tooltip when hovering over the measurement file or

39
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

folder. Measurement files and folders can also be searched based on the description using Search
Folders (see page 29).
To add a description to several measurement files or folders, right-click on the measurement files or
folders while holding down the shift key, and select Set Description from the popup menu.
To edit an existing description, right-click on the measurement file or folder and select Set Description
from the popup menu.
By hovering a mouse over a measurement in the workspace, also the device labels are shown in a tooltip
window. Labels are shown if a #DL header with the label text is found from the measurement file.

Delete Folder Contents

To permanently delete the contents of a particular folder from the database, right-click on the folder and
select Delete Folder Contents from the popup menu.
The following prompt appears.

Select Yes to permanently delete the measurement files from the database.

Retrieving original files from the database

Note: This feature is supported by Nemo Analyze Enterprise Edition only.

To retrieve original measurement files from the database, right-click on a measurement folder or file in the
Workspace, and select Retrieve Original Files from the popup menu.
The Retrieve Files dialog box opens.

Retrieve to folder defines the folder to which the retrieved files will be saved.
Retrieving file displays the file that is currently being processed.
File N/NNN displays the progress of the retrieval process.
Retrieve begins the retrieval process.
Define a target location for the retrieved files with the Retrieve to folder control and click Retrieve.

Database CleanUp
To clean up old files from the database, right-click on All Measurements in the Workspace and select
Clean Up from the popup menu.
The Clean Up dialog box opens. Define the time range from which the measurements are to be deleted
and click Delete.

40
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

8 Viewing measurement data

Measurement data can be viewed in different kinds of data views, such as graphs, grids, numerical views,
and maps. A workbook is a collection of data views and Nemo Analyze offers some ready-made
workbooks for analyzing measurement data. You can also easily make your own workbooks and save
them for later use.

Parameters
The fastest way to view measurement data is through the Parameters view. To open a parameter in its
default view, select the relevant measurement files in the Workspace and then double-click a parameter in
the Parameters view.

The selected parameter is opened in the default view. If you want to open the parameter in some other
type of view, right-click on a parameter in the Parameters view and select the view type from the popup
menu.

41
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

You can also drag and drop parameters in data views from the Parameters view. Nemo Analyze will
display a green icon if the data view is suitable for the parameter, and a red icon if the data view
is unsuitable.
In the Parameters view you can search and filter parameters by typing the parameter name in the field at
the top of the Parameters view. The Parameters view will display only the defined parameters.
Some parameters require further definition before they can be viewed in any given data view. When
opening these parameters in a data view, a dialog box appears asking for specifications applicable to the
selected parameter. For example, if you want to view RX level full selected BSIC in a graph, in the Fill
Parameters dialog box you can select a BSIC value from the drop-down menu in the Value field. Click
Finish, select the graph type, and the parameter is displayed in a graph according to the BSIC
specifications.

42
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The RX level full parameter values are shown according to BSIC value 18.

Statistics/Statistics with filters over parameter

In addition to running reports on measurement files, it is also possible to run statistics on a single
parameter straight from the Parameters view. The statistics and statistics with filters can be run over a
single measurement file, or over a folder containing several measurement files (for example., the All
Measurements folder).
You can run parameter statistics over a single measurement file by accessing the Parameter Launchpad.
To do this, right-click on a selected parameter in the Workspace, and click Parameter Launchpad on the
menu. For more information on the Parameter Launchpad, see page 49.

43
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Alternatively, you can run statistics over a single measurement file by selecting a measurement file in the
Workspace, then right-clicking on a parameter in the Parameters view, and selecting Statistics By or
Statistics With Filters By.

Statistics by/Statistics with Filters By: No Grouping

To run statistics over a single measurement file without grouping the data in any way, select a
measurement file in the Workspace, right-click on a parameter in the Parameters view, and select
Statistics by | No Grouping.
To run statistics with filters over a single measurement file without grouping the data in any way, select a
measurement file in the Workspace, right-click on a parameter in the Parameters view, and select
Statistics With Filters By | No Grouping.
Below is a workbook with statistics on RSCP best active set when run on a single file, based on No
Grouping.

Benchmarking can be done by dragging parameter statistics on different files or folders in the same graph.

You can change the scale of the axes: right-click on the workbook and select Properties | Statistics.
With certain parameters you are able to view statistics values on the graph. Right-click on the workbbook
and select Show | Values.
You can also view values on top of the graph. Right-click on the workbook and select Show | Values.
You are able to view distribution plot values on Density & Cumulation and Histogram if Show values is
selected in Options | Statistics | Distribution plots.

Statistics by: Fixed Geographical Bin Area

Statistics by Fixed Geographical Bin Area and Bounding Geographical Bin Area make it possible to view
statistics on map in area bins. With Fixed Geographical Bin Area, the user can select an area (for
example, a portion of the measurement route) and perform area binning on it. With Bounding
Geographical Bin Area, area binning will be automatically performed on the entire measurement route.

44
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

To produce statistics by fixed geographical area, select a measurement, right-click on a parameter, and
select Statistics by | Fixed Geographical Bin Area.
The Select Rectangular Area dialog box appears.

With Area | Name you can select a rectangular area you have previously saved.
By clicking Area you are able to select a rectangle on the map. After selection, the Add rectangle dialog
box opens, in which you can give the polygon a name.
You can zoom in and zoom out to change the map view.
By clicking Pan you can move the map by dragging it.
The bins show the average value according to the color set in each bin.

It is also possible to view statistics based on Minimum, Maximum, Sample count, Std. deviation and
Variance. The statistics are by default calculated based on Average. Go to the side panel, right-click on
the parameter in the Layers view, and select Properties from the popup menu.

45
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The Properties dialog box opens.

Move to Color tab and select a statistics type from the Statistics drop-down menu and click OK.
The area binning layer is drawn based on the selected statistics type.
8.1.3.1 Statistics by: Bounding Geographical Bin Area
Statistics by Fixed Geographical Bin Area and Bounding Geographical Bin Area make it possible to view
statistics on map in area bins. With Fixed Geographical Bin Area (see page 44), you can select an area
(for example, a portion of the measurement route) and perform area binning on it. With Bounding
Geographical Bin Area, area binning will be automatically performed on the entire measurement route.
To produce statistics by bounding geographical bin area, select a measurement, right-click on a
parameter, and select Statistics by | Bounding Geographical Bin Area.
It is also possible to view statistics based on Minimum, Maximum, Sample count, Std. deviation and
Variance. The statistics are by default calculated based on Average. Go to the side panel, right-click on
the parameter in the Layers view, and select Properties from the popup menu.

The Properties dialog box opens.

46
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Move to Color tab, select a statistics type from the Statistics drop-down menu, and click OK.
The area binning layer is drawn based on the selected statistics type.

Lee’s criteria sampling for scanner measurements

The Lee’s criteria sampling for scanner measurements feature enables distance-based aggregation for
scanner data.

Note that Lee’s criteria sampling is available only if your license supports this option.

Double-click on a parameter in the Parameters view.

The Analyze Wizard – Filters dialog box opens. Define the distance in meters and select the carrier(s)
included. Click Finish.

Note that distance 40λ should be used when running a query for the band. The formula for wave length =
𝑣𝑣
𝑓𝑓
where v = the speed of light (about 3x108m/s) and f = frequency.
The average of the selected parameter is calculated for each aggregated distance bin. Each bin receives
a time stamp and location based on the first event’s time stamp and latitude/longitude of the bin.
The distance-based aggregation is available for Ec/N0, RSCP, RX-level (RSSI), RSRP, and RSRQ
metrics of a scanner.

47
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Two mobile-related parameters give a distance-based value from the scanner measurements to the same
cell the mobile device is using at a certain point.

48
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Parameter launchpad
To produce parameter statistics, such as Cumulation & density, Count, Average, Minimum, Maximum,
Standard deviation, Variance, Mode, Median, Midrange, and Histogram, based on measurement data,
right-click on a selected parameter and select Parameter Launchpad from the menu.

49
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The Parameter Launchpad view opens.

Open in data view opens the parameter
with the settings defined in the sections
Presentation, Statistics and Details.

Apply filters, if selected, opens a dialog

box for defining filters for the parameter
after you have defined all the parameter
settings and selected Open in data
view.

Open in defines the data view type used

in displaying the parameter data.

Statistics (see below)

Details displays the parameter

description if it exists.

Change defaults enables you to change

parameter default settings by using the
Change Defaults dialog box.

From the Statistics submenu, you can

open various parameter statistics in
spreadsheet format. To include more
than one parameter statistics type on
the same spreadsheet, drag and drop
each statistics type on the spreadsheet.
Available statistics types include
Cumulation & density, Count, Average,
Minimum, Maximum, Standard
deviation, Variance, Mode, Median,
Midrange, Histogram, and Percentile.

Percentile value can be defined by

entering a number.

Apply filters, if selected, opens a dialog

box for defining parameter filters once
the parameter is dragged and dropped
onto a data view.

Weight by defines whether the statistics

are to be weighted by distance, by
time, or by sample (no weight).

Group by defines how the statistics are

to be grouped.

50
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Distance Binning
In Nemo Analyze workspace, right-click on a parameter from the Parameters view and select Open
Distance Bin In or Open Distance Bin Filtered In from a pop-up menu and select how you wish to filter
the statistics.
You are able to open parameters as maps, graphs, grids or with text editor.

Change Defaults
Through the Parameters view you can change the default color set and default graph scales for each
parameter. Right-click on a parameter and select Change Defaults. Alternatively, you can also change
defaults using the Parameter Launchpad (see Chapter “Parameter launchpad”).
The General tab of the Change Defaults dialog box enables you to select a default color set for the
parameter, select the image, and set the graph scale top and bottom values.

The View tab of the Change Defaults dialog box enables you to set the default data view for the
parameter.
The Statistics tab of the Change Defaults dialog box enables you to set the default statistics for the
parameter. The settings displayed on the Statistics view depend on the selected parameter. The image
below is an example of the Statistics view with Velocity as the selected parameter. In this example,
Threshold and Condition are tied together, and Minimum, Maximum, Interval, and Direction dictate how
the CDF/PDF is calculated. With the Up/Down setting you define which end of each interval is included,
e.g. >0 and <= 25, or alternatively >= 0 and < 25. The end that is included is printed in the X axis of the
graph.

The Drill down tab of the Change Defaults dialog box enables you to select the drill down workbook that is
being used by default when double-clicking on a parameter in the Parameters view.
Some parameters’ Change Defaults dialog box also includes the Parameters tab. In the Parameters tab
you can enter a default value which will be shown in filters.

51
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The CSV tab of the Change Defaults dialog box enables you to choose if selecting map output preference
is available for a CSV file parameter.

If this option is selected, when right-clicking on a CSV file parameter in the Parameters view and selecting
Open In Map, the Select Columns dialog box opens, allowing you to select Route or Route Coloring to
be shown on the map. If the option is not selected, the Select Column dialog box will not appear.

Viewing measurement data in graphs

This use case describes the steps for viewing measurement data in various graphs. It is assumed that
there are measurement files in the database.
Select a measurement in the workspace. You can locate a measurement file quickly by typing the name of
the measurement file in the Filter field, which is marked by the red frame below. This filtering functionality
for measurement files in the Workspace is especially useful with a large number of measurement files in
the database, or in a specific folder.

52
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Select a measurement in the Workspace, right-click on a parameter and select Open | In, for example,
Graph.

In the Choose Graph Type dialog box, select the graph type in which you want to show the parameter, in
this case a line graph.
The BLER parameter is opened in a line graph.

53
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Viewing measurement data on map

This use case describes the steps for viewing measurement data on map. For the purposes of this use
case, it is assumed that there are measurement files with coordinates, BTS files, and corresponding maps
in the database. For loading files to the database, see Chapter “Adding files to the database” on page 25.

Changing default map

To change default map (displayed in bold), right-click on the tooltip name on Workspace view and select
Default Map from the menu.
Default map can also be changed from View | Options | Map | Default map type. Default maps include
MapX and Live Map.

Opening measurement files on map

All normal MapX Maps files (.tab files) which are properly geocoded can be dragged onto the map and
new image layers are created on top of a live map.
In the Maps Folder of the Workspace window, double-click a map to open it. The map file is loaded
to the Analyze database.
The map view opens.

For adding more map layers to map view, see “Use Case 13: Adding map layers and saving layer
combinations as geosets”.
Go to the Measurement file page in the Workspace view, and select a measurement file. Then select a
parameter from the Parameters view, and drag it on the map.

54
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The measurement is shown on the map.

The route is opened on the map and colored using the default color set for the selected parameter. You
can zoom in and out on the map with the mouse wheel. The side panel displays the selected color set.

Opening BTS files on map

Click the base station icon at the bottom of Workspace to switch from the Measurements view to the
Base Stations view.
Drag a BTS file from the Workspace to the map.

Click OK when Nemo Analyze asks if the added BTS should be associated with the route. The base
station icons are drawn.
BTS sites search (highlighted with a red box in the screenshot above) allows entering several different
search criteria. For example, if you are looking for a site with certain scrambling code and get many
results, you can fine down the search by leaving a space and entering another value in the search, such
as the cell name. The search could look like this: 61 RY2.

55
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Note that BTS icons show differently depending on zoom level. When zooming outwards, base stations
are no longer shown as BTS icons but as red dots:

The BTS zooming can be disabled in View | Options | BTS | General.

To change the parameter color set used for coloring the BTS icons, right-click on the BTS layer in the side
panel under Layers, and select Properties.

The Properties dialog box opens. Select the Color tab, change the setting of both Parameter and Color
set drop-down menus, and click OK.

56
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The BTS icons are colored based on the selected color set.

Viewing notification icons on map

Notification icons enable specific measurement events to be viewed on map. Right-click on the route layer
in the side panel (or directly on the measurement route on map) and select Properties from the popup
menu.
The Properties dialog box opens. Go to the Notifications tab, and select all notifications that you are
interested in. For example, we might want to view Cell reselections.

57
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Select the notifications you want to be displayed and click OK.

If the selected notifications occur in the measurement file, they are drawn on the map as small icons.

You can now zoom in on the map and move the current location marker on the notifications. If all the
different views (line graphs, grids, maps, etc.) are synchronized, all data views will jump to the same point
in the measurement, allowing you to analyze all relevant parameter data before, during and after the
notification was logged.

Use Case 1: Viewing cell footprints, RSCP footprints, and LTE footprints
Nemo Analyze can automatically create a cell footprint, an RSCP footprint, or an LTE footprint map plot
for every cell measured. Cell/RSCP/LTE footprint is displayed for every cell whose signal has been among
the three strongest at some point during the measurement session. The footprint of each cell is displayed
on map on a separate page, allowing you to browse from footprint to another and immediately see both
the footprint and the cell. Cell footprint/RSCP/LTE analysis can be performed on both UMTS scanner and
mobile data.
Analysis will not work properly if there will be hundreds of pages in the results. Therefore, it is advisable to
use filters to limit the amount of results. To view cell/RSCP/LTE footprints, right-click a measurement file
in Workspace | Measurements | Measurements, and select Analyses | Ec/NO Cell Footprints
(mobile) / Ec/NO Footprints (scanner) / RSCP Cell Footprints (mobile) / RSCP Cell Footprints
(scanner) / RSRP Cell Footprints (mobile) / RSRP Cell Footprints (scanner) / RSRQ Cell Footprints
(mobile) / RSRQ Cell Footprints (scanner) from the popup menu.

58
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The Analyses submenu also lists all workbooks listed in workbooks folder.

A dialog box allowing you to choose between Scrambling code filter and Channel number filter appears.
You are also able to select if the color legend and the entire route is shown.

Select the filter of your choice and click OK.

59
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The footprints view opens, displaying the footprint of each cell as a separate page.

You can browse from cell to cell by selecting pages from the tabs below the map view.

Use Case 2: Viewing uplink voice quality server data

This use case describes the steps for viewing uplink voice quality server data together with mobile
terminal (downlink) data from the same measurement session.
Step 1: Loading Voice Quality Measurement Data into the Database
Nemo Analyze correlates the UL MOS scores automatically from the server log file to the mobile log file. A
prerequisite for this functionality is that both files are loaded into the Nemo Analyze database, and that the
time in server and mobile log files is synchronized in the log files. This can be accomplished by using GPS
time in the measurement tool and in the server using time synchronization services available online. See
Nemo Server and Nemo Outdoor or Nemo Handy User Manuals for more information. Time
synchronization can also be done manually. In time synchronization, an accuracy of around three seconds
in the time sync is sufficient.
To load an uplink voice quality measurement session into the database, select File | Measurement |
Open Measurement from the ribbon bar.
The Open dialog box opens. Select both the server measurement file and the mobile terminal
measurement file. You can do this by holding down the Shift key while selecting the files. Once both files
have been selected, click Open.

Note: In order for the uplink server data to be displayed correctly, the database must
contain both the server (UL) measurement file and the mobile terminal (DL)
measurement file. Nemo Analyze will correlate these files automatically.

The files are loaded into the database. You can monitor loading progress by using “Activity”.
Step 2: Running Queries on Uplink Voice Quality Server Data
Once both files have been loaded into the database, select the downlink mobile terminal file (that is, do
not select the uplink server file) in the Workspace, right-click on a relevant audio quality parameter, and
right-click on a relevant audio quality parameter and select Open In | [Data view]

60
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

A workbook is opened based on the measurement file.

Use Case 3: Viewing IP/UDP packet trace data

Note: Microsoft Network Monitor 3.4 must be installed BEFORE Nemo Analyze to
enable complete IP/UDP trace details to be displayed in Nemo Analyze. For
installing the Microsoft Network Monitor 3.4, see Installing Microsoft Network Monitor
3.4 below.

Note: If Microsoft Network Monitor 3.4 is nevertheless installed after Nemo Analyze,
Nemo Analyze’s Microsoft Network Monitor 3.4 functionality can be activated by
copying the file NMAPI.dll from the folder C:\Program Files\Microsoft Network
Monitor 3\ to the folder C:\Program Files\Anite\Nemo Analyze.

Note: If Microsoft Network Monitor 3.4 is not found on the PC or Nemo Analyze has
been installed before Microsoft Network Monitor 3.4, Nemo Analyze will display only
a limited set of IP/UDP trace details.

With IP packet capturing, network packets sent between IP addresses are stored in log files and can be
post-processed with a third-party application such as Ethereal. The IP packet data is stored in a separate
file (.pcap) for each measurement terminal for which IP capturing is enabled.
This use case describes the steps for viewing IP trace data based on a measurement file and the
corresponding IP trace (.pcap) file. Both files must be from the same measurement session with identical
time stamps. First, a relevant workbook (for example HSDPA full details) is opened on the measurement
file. Next, a separate workbook on the IP trace file corresponding with the measurement file. The two
workbooks are automatically synchronized, enabling the correlation of events on the parameter level with
events on the IP trace level.

Note: In order for the synchronization of the two files to work, the time stamps of the
measurement file and the IP trace (.pcap) file must be identical, that is, both files
have to be from the same exact measurement session.

61
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Step 1: Installing Microsoft Network Monitor 3.4

Go to Microsoft website at <https://www.microsoft.com/en-US/download/confirmation.aspx?id=4865> to
download the free Network Monitor installation package. Click Download and select the NM34_x64.exe
installation file.
Once the installation file has been successfully downloaded, double-click the file.
The Open File – Security Warning dialog box opens.

Select Run.
The Microsoft Network Monitor dialog box opens. Click Yes to continue installation.
The Microsoft Network Monitor 3.4 Setup – Welcome… dialog box opens. Click Next.
The Microsoft Network Monitor 3.4 Setup – End-User License Agreement dialog box opens. Select I
accept the terms in the License Agreement and click Next.
The Microsoft Network Monitor 3.4 Setup – Choose Setup Type dialog box opens.Select Typical.
The Microsoft Network Monitor 3.4 Setup – Ready to Install dialog box opens. Select Install.
Once the installation procedure has finished, the Microsoft Network Monitor 3.4 Setup – Completing the
Setup Wizard dialog box opens. Select Finish.
Step 2: Open a Workbook Based on a Measurement File
Open a workbook based on a measurement file by right-clicking on the measurement file in the Device
Menu and selecting a relevant workbook (e.g. HSDPA full details) from the popup menu.
A workbook is opened based on the measurement file.
Step 3: Load IP Trace Files (.pcap) into the Database
Next, select the IP Traces icon from the panel below the Parameters view. The IP Traces page of the
Workspace opens. If there are no IP trace files on the IP Traces page, right-click on the page background
and select Open from the popup menu.
The Open dialog box opens.
Browse for .pcap files, select the files you want to load to the database, and click Open.
Step 4: Open an IP Trace Information Workbook Based on the Corresponding IP Trace File (.pcap)
The IP Traces page displays all .pcap files stored in the database. Double-click on the IP trace file that
corresponds with the measurement you opened the measurement file workbook based on in Step 1.

62
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The IP trace file is opened in a separate IP trace information workbook that is automatically synchronized
with the measurement file workbook.
Step 5: View Synchronized Measurement and IP Trace Data
Go to the measurement file workbook and select an event that is of interest to you (for example a point in
time where Throughput suddenly drops).

Switch back to the IP trace workbook and observe the IP trace messages surrounding the selected event
(that is, the possible problem causes on the IP level).

63
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Use Case 4: Viewing Binary Log Data

Normally the field test measurement file contains all the information needed to analyze the network
behavior and quality. In some very specific cases, binary diagnostic logs can enhance the details in
optimization or troubleshooting, where, e.g., the normal field test measurement file does not provide high
enough resolution to specific measurement parameter. In Nemo Analyze, binary logs can be viewed and
synchronized to the field test measurements making problem locating and correlating to field test data
easier.

This use case describes the steps for viewing binary log file data based on a measurement file and the
corresponding binary log (.nmfb or .dfl) file. Both files must be from the same measurement session with
identical time stamps.
First, a relevant workbook is opened on the measurement file. Next, a separate workbook on the binary
log file corresponding with the measurement file. The two workbooks are automatically synchronized,
enabling the correlation of events on the parameter level with events on the binary log level.

Note: In order for the synchronization of the two files to work, the time stamps of the
measurement file and the binary log file must be identical, that is, both files have to
be from the same exact measurement session.

Step 1: Open a Workbook Based on a Measurement File

Open a workbook based on a measurement file by right-clicking on the measurement file in the Device
Menu and selecting a relevant workbook from the popup menu. A workbook is opened based on the
measurement file.
Step 2: Load Binary Log Files into the Database.

Next, select the Binary Logs icon ( ) from the panel below the Parameters view. The Binary Logs page
of the Workspace opens. If the matching binary log file is not on the Binary Logs page, right-click on the
page background and select Open from the popup menu. The Open dialog box opens. Browse for binary
log files, select the file you want to load to the database, and click Open. If there are no Binary Log files
on the Binary Logs page, right-click on the page background and select Open from the popup menu.
The Open dialog box opens.

64
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Browse for binary log files, select the files you want to load to the database, and click Open.
Step 3: Open a Binary Log Information Workbook based on the corresponding binary log file.
The Binary Logs page displays all binary log files stored in the database. Double-click on the binary log
file that corresponds with the measurement you opened the measurement file workbook based on in Step
1.

The binary log file is opened in a separate binary log information workbook that is automatically
synchronized with the measurement file workbook.

65
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Step 4: View Synchronized Measurement and binary log data.

Go to the measurement file workbook and select an event that is of interest to you. Switch back to the
binary log workbook and observe the binary log messages surrounding the selected event.

Parameter filtering
It is also possible to filter all parameters based on, for example, time and region. Select a measurement
file, right-click a parameter in the Parameters view, and select Open Filtered in | [dataview].
An empty workbook, and the Filters dialog box to define the filtering criteria appear.

In the Filters dialog box you can further limit the query results by adding different filters. Filters can be
applied to parameters that are part of the query.

66
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

After selection, click Finish.

A grid with the parameter according to the specifications appears.

Filtering based on polygon area

With parameter filtering it is also possible to limit a query based on a user-defined area, that is, by
Polygon area selection. As a consequence, the results of a query will be limited to a user-defined part of a
measurement route in the chosen data view. This is useful, for example, when you want the values of a
parameter to be viewed with a value-based color set only on a part of the route on a map. In this case, the
rest of the measurement route will be colored with a default color. In this example we will select Ec/N0
best active set as the parameter.
Select a measurement file in the Workspace and type Ec/N0 best active set in the Parameters view filter
field. Right-click on the parameter and select Open Filtered In | Map
An empty workbook and the Analyze Wizard - Filters dialog box appears. In the dialog box, select Add
and then Area under Name. Finally, press the … tab.
The Select Area dialog box appears.
With Area | Name you can select a polygon area you have previously saved.
By clicking Area you are able to select a polygon on the map. Select the area by clicking on the map, and
close the polygon with a double-click. After selection, the Add polygon dialog box opens, in which you can
give the polygon a name.
You can zoom in and zoom out to change the map view.
By clicking Pan you can move the map by dragging it.

67
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

By clicking Reset you can erase the area selection made.

The Analyze Wizard – Filters dialog box appears. Click Finish.

A new workbook opens. The measurement route on the map is colored with the Ec/N0 color set over the
section of the route specified with the polygon area. The rest of the route is colored with the default color,
here blue.

Use Case 5: Global parameter filtering based on a secondary parameter

Service providers often define the extent of coverage area using a specific parameter as a threshold
value. In Nemo Analyze, it is possible to use this threshold value for filtering out the irrelevant data coming
from outside coverage area. By setting a threshold condition for a parameter value, you can define a
global filter that will be applied to all subsequent Nemo Analyze operations (apart from Crystal Reports
report templates).

For the purposes of this use case, all data with Received Signal Code Power (RSCP) of -100 or higher will
be considered measurement data from coverage area. The global filter created based on this condition
will exclude all data with RSCP values lower than -100 from all subsequent Nemo Analyze operations. In
other words, all Nemo Analyze operations will be filtered based on a secondary parameter, RSCP best
active set. Filtering by secondary parameter enables the filtering of a primary parameter data set based on

68
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

a selected secondary one. The resulting data set will contain only those values from the primary data set
that coincide with the values in the secondary one. All parts of the primary data set that do not contain
RSCP value of -100 or higher will not be considered measurement data from coverage area and thus will
be excluded from the processed data set.
To define a global filter, select Utilities | Global Filters from the ribbon bar.

The Global Filters dialog box opens.

To add a new filter, click Edit.

The Analyze Wizard – Filters dialog box opens.

To add a filter, click Add.

An empty filter line is added.

69
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Select <Secondary parameter> from the Name drop-down menu. Click the … button in the Value column
to browse for a secondary parameter.
The Analyze Wizard – Secondary Measurement Parameters dialog box opens. Select the parameter
RSCP best active set and click Next.

70
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Another Analyze Wizard – Filters dialog box opens.

To add a filter, click Add. An empty filter line is added. Select the parameter RSCP from the Name drop-
down menu. Next, select the operator >= (that is, greater or equal) from the operator drop-down menu.
Finally, enter the value -100 in the Value field.

Click Finish.
This returns you to the first Analyze Wizard – Filters dialog box. Click Finish.

71
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The Active global filters field of the Global Filters dialog box now displays the defined filter.

All subsequent operations performed with Nemo Analyze during this session will be filtered based on the
set threshold condition. To save the filter for use also during subsequent Nemo Analyze sessions, click
Save.
The Save Filter dialog box opens.

Click OK.
The Saved global filter sets field now displays the saved filter.

To activate a saved filter set, select a saved filter set in the Saved global filter sets and click Set Active.

72
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

To remove a global filter, select the filter in the Saved global filter sets field and click Delete.

It is also possible to set a particular cell as filter by right-clicking the map on top of base station sector and
selecting Create Global Filter From Cell ID. From then on, all workbooks and queries will be limited in
the way that results are returned only from those points where the cell in question has been serving.

Filtering data and creating custom KPIs

Custom KPIs can be created either by correlating parameters using the Query Manager or, to create more
complex KPIs, by using the KPI Workbench (see p. 294).
With the correlate parameters functionality, it is possible to create events based on complex search
criteria, create events showing problems and reasons for problems, and create a CSV table from the
measurement data for export purposes.
You can create new Correlate parameters KPIs in the Query manager. In the ribbon bar, select Tools |
Query manager | Add… | Correlate parameters. The created KPI will be added to the User-branch in
the Parameters view in the Workspace. The correlate parameters functionality can also be used for

73
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

creating a custom KPI by right-clicking on a device in the Workspace, and selecting Correlate
Parameters, and Next. In this case the new KPI will not be saved.
Right-click on a device in the Workspace, and select Correlate Parameters.

In the Correlate Parameters dialog box, select the parameters that you want to correlate. You can add two
or more parameters in the Selected view.
There are three different Modes available: Show values when first parameter changes (left outer join),
Show values when any of the parameters changes (outer join), and Show values when all parameters are
valid (inner join).
The Show values when first parameter changes (left outer join) mode creates an output row for every
value of the first selected parameter. For other selected parameters, it gives the current, previous, or next
value from the time stamp of the first parameter. This mode can be used to find all events of a certain type
in the measurement data, and the values of other parameters at the time the event occurred. For
example, it can be used to find all dropped calls (the first parameter), the last TX power, Best active
Ec/N0, and Best active RSCP values prior to each drop.

74
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

After selecting the parameters to be correlated, click Next. In this example you can find six different
parameters in the Selected view, Call dropped, Percentage of “DL power up” commands, Percentage of
“UL power up” commands, Ec/N0 best active set, and RSCP best active set.
Select the data view in which the data will be displayed, for example, a grid, and click Finish. The
correlation data is opened in the selected data view.

The Show values when any of the parameters changes (outer join) mode creates an output row when any
of the selected parameters changes. This mode can also be used when exporting data to Excel. In the
example below, there are three parameters in the Selected view, RX level full, Ec/N0 best active set, and
BLER DL. Click Next.

75
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The correlation data is opened in the selected data view.

As you can see, there are no values for RX level full and RAC in rows 4600-4616, and no values for
Ec/N0 and BLER DL in rows 4614-4620.

The Show values when all parameters are valid (inner join) mode creates an output row when any of the
selected parameters changes, and all the parameters are valid. This mode can be used when generating
input for scatter graph, or when creating events based on custom search criteria.

76
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

In the example below you can see a custom KPI: all rows where Ec/N0 < -7, BLER DL, and RSCP < -79
are shown.

Drill-down
The Troubleshooting toolkit with drill-down is an optional component of Nemo Analyze. When a query has
been performed with one of the Troubleshooting parameters from the Parameters view, it is possible to
drill down into further event detail from the data view created by the query.
With pie charts, you can do this by double-clicking a sector of the pie chart or a sector color in the pie
chart legend. As each sector represents a problem cause, double-clicking a sector will open a grid with a
list of all problem events caused by that particular problem cause. Each drill-down from the same chart will
open a new tab in the same window.

77
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

These tabs are displayed on the left side of the window with the colors of the corresponding sectors.

Open tabs representing results of drill-downs from

different sectors of this pie chart. The colors
correspond with the pie chart sector colors.

For example, green color represents RACH Failure, unknown reason on the pie chart above. To drill down
to the details of events where a RACH failure has occurred because of an unknown reason, double-click
either the green sector on the chart or the text Failure, unknown reason on the chart legend.
This opens a grid where all failure events in the measurement data resulting from an unknown reason are
gathered (see below). This grid will be represented by a green tab on the left of the window in the pie
chart view.

Click blue arrow to return to

the pie chart.

Click green tab to return to

this grid from the pie chart.

Before drilling down into a single row of a grid, you can set a time range for log entries before and after
the selected event that are to be included in the drill-down. To set a time range, select View | Options |
Environment | Drill Down and enter the time range in seconds in the Before and After fields.

78
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

To drill down into a single row of a grid, either double-click or right-click on the selected row. A double-
click will perform the drill-down if there are default drill-down parameters that are compatible with the
measurement data on that particular row. If, however, there are not, you can either right-click on the
selected row and select Drill-Down | Pick Parameter to drill down into the data on that row with other
parameters, or open the row in a separate workbook by right-clicking on the row and selecting Drill-Down
| [workbook] (for example UMTS | UMTS Troubleshooting.)

Each drill-down opens the selected time range of measurement data with the selected new parameters in
new tabs on the second tab row.

79
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Drill-down tab

The selected
time range

Drilling Down from Map Data view

The Troubleshooting toolkit with drill-down is an optional component of Nemo Analyze. When a parameter
is on opened on map, it is possible to drill down into further event detail by opening a workbook on a
selected point of the measurement route.
To drill-down from map data view, select a point of a route you want to see details on by left-clicking the
position icon. Right-clicking enables you to pick a parameter you wish to drill down further. This way you
can also drill down multiple parameters for comparison.

To further define the extent or the time range of the target portion of the route (that is, a time range
surrounding the time stamp of the current location of the position icon), select View | Options |
Environment | Drill-down from the ribbon bar, and enter the time range in seconds in the Before and
After fields.
Right-click on the position icon, and select Drill-Down | System | [select system] | [select workbook]
from the popup menu.

80
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The drill-down workbook is added as a tab to the original map data view.

To return to the map view, click the tab in the upper left corner of the workbook.

Drilling down from event type parameters in Map Data view

When an event type parameter is opened on map, it is possible to drill down into further event detail on a
failure event displayed on map.
To open an event query on map, select a measurement file in the Measurements section and a relevant
failure-related parameter from the Parameters view.
To search for failure-related event parameters from the Parameters view, type the word drop or failure in
the filter field above the Parameters view.
Right-click on the relevant failure parameter and select Open In | Map from the popup menu.
The results of the event query are opened on map.

81
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

To drill down to a failure event, double-click on the event symbol.

The drill-down workbook is added as a tab to the original map data view.

To return to the map view, click the tab in the upper left corner of the workbook.

Exclude events
With Nemo Analyze it is possible to exclude events from the results that do not want to be included.
Right-click on the top of a measurement and a pop-up will open. Select Exclude Events.
The Exclude Events dialog box opens. Next, go to Utilities | Edit. The Global Filters dialog box opens.
Click Edit….
Analyze Wizard filters dialog box opens. Select Add. Then select Exclude Event from the drop down
menu, <>, and 1 for value. Exclude event <> 1 is added to Global Filters.
When you run results for parameters, those events that you are not interested in will not be included in the
results.
For example, it is possible to remove calls that have failed due to a measuring system error, from a file.

Data views
In this chapter are explained the various types of data views available in Nemo Analyze. In Nemo Analyze
synchronization is used to keep the different data views in sync. When you click any view containing data,

82
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

all the other views jump to the same point of time. Nemo Analyze also offers the convenience of the so-
called drag & drop function. You can easily drag measurements or measurement parameters from the
Workspace in the various data views. Thus, one data view can contain many different parameters from
one or more measurement files.
When you right-click on any of the data views, a popup menu will open up. The menu offers access to all
functions and tools related to that data view. The contents of the menu vary depending on the data view
type (for example, graph, grid, map) but some of the items are common to all data views.

Graphs

Graph Tools menu

Note: The Graph menu is displayed as part of the ribbon bar only when a graph is
open and in current use in Nemo Analyze. When you select another workbook or
window, the Graph menu is closed automatically.

Reset empties the data view. All the data and layout settings are removed.
Properties enables you to edit the graph layout.
Side panel enables you to hide and display the side panel on the right-hand side of the grid. For more
information, see Chapter “Side Panel” on page 87.
Graph type enables you to change the type of a graph.
Scroll enables you to change the mouse cursor to an arrow and scroll the view. The same function is
available in the graph side panel.
Zoom enables you to zoom the view. Hold down the left mouse button and drag to the right to zoom
in. Hold down the left mouse button and drag to the left to zoom out. The same function is available in the
graph side panel.
Zoom In and Zoom Out enable you to zoom in and out one step at a time. The same functions are
available in the graph side panel. You can also zoom in and out on the view with the mouse wheel.
Optimization reduces the time needed for the drawing of the graph. This function is enabled in Options |
Graph by default.
Mode defines how the different layers in the graph are displayed (single/stacked/automatic).
3D mode enables you to switch the 3D mode on/off. The same function is available in the graph
toolbar. Note that this function is available for bar graphs only.
Filled enables you to fill the graph with color.
Pick parameter enables you to add more data in data views.
Add function enables you to add an averaging function.
Bin data enables you to define data bins for scatter graphs and color grids. In the Bin Data dialog
box, select the Enabled option to activate data binning. When data binning is activated, the scatter graph
or color grid is divided into four data bins (defined by bin limits). For each data bin, the percentage of the
samples out of all samples, or the number of samples in that bin is displayed.
Reference Lines | Horizontal and Reference Lines | Vertical enable you to add a vertical or
horizontal reference line in the graph. You can move the line by dragging with your mouse. The same
functions are available in the graph side panel.

Graph popup menu

From the graph popup menu you will find all graph-related tools and functions. Right-click on a graph to
access the menu

Change Graph Type

With the Change Graph Type function, you can change the type of a graph.
In the Choose Graph Type dialog box, select the graph type, line, bar, scatter, pie, color grid, or surface
graph, from the selection and the graph is opened.

83
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Reset
With the Reset function you can empty the data view. All the data and layout settings are removed.

Query
With the Query tool you can change the data displayed in the data view. With the Cut, Copy, and Paste
functions you can copy or cut an existing query from one data view and paste it to another. This is
especially useful if you want to open another view with the same data but with a different graph type or
copy data from a graph to a grid. The copied queries are available in the Query Clipboard.

Pick Parameter
With the Pick Parameter tool you can add more data in data views. In graphs a new layer is added, in
grids the new parameter is added in the same grid, and in maps a new route is added. Right-click on the
graph and select Pick Parameter.
In the Pick Parameter dialog box, select the measurement file that you are currently viewing and then
select the new parameter that will be displayed in the data view. Click OK to add the new parameter.

In the Filter field you can type the name of a specific parameter so that only that parameter will be shown.
For example, in the picture below, you can see all the parameters starting with Missing Neighbor. This is
useful for locating a parameter when the list is long.

84
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Add Function
With the Add Function feature you can add some averaging functions in graphs.

Color defines the color of the function line.

Source defines the parameter for which the averaging function is performed.
Function defines what kind of averaging function is added.
Average calculates the average value for the selected parameter.
Exponential moving average calculates the average value using the following formula:
2 / Period value + 1. Period refers to the number of samples included in the calculation.
High calculates the highest value for the selected parameter.
Low calculates the lowest value for the selected parameter.
Median calculates the median value for the selected parameter.
Mode calculates the mode value, i.e., the most common value for the selected parameter.
Moving average calculates the moving average value for the defined period (number of samples).
Trend calculates the trend line for the selected parameter.
Period refers to the number of samples included in the calculation.
Line width defines the line width of the function layer.

Add Reference Line

With the Add Reference Line tools you can add a vertical or horizontal reference line in the graph.
You can move the line by dragging with your mouse. The same functions are available in the graph side
panel.

Tool
Under the Tool item you will find two graph viewing tools: scroll and zoom. With the Scroll tool you can
change the mouse cursor to an arrow and scroll the view. The same function is available in the graph side
panel .
With the Zoom tool you can zoom the view. Hold down the left mouse button and drag to the right to zoom
in. Hold down the left mouse button and drag to the left to zoom out. The same function is available in the
graph side panel .
With the Zoom In and Zoom Out toolbar buttons you can zoom in and out one step at a time. The
same functions are available in the graph side panel. You can also zoom in and out on the view with the
mouse wheel.

85
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Mode
When you have several layers open in a graph, you can change the layout of the page. Mode defines how
the different layers in the graph are displayed.
In Single mode, the layers are displayed overlapping each other as in the example below. The scale is
displayed only for the active layer (highlighted with light-blue color in the Layers panel on the right).

In Stacked mode, the layers are displayed one layer after another and the scale is displayed for each
parameter. You can change the order of layers in graph by right-clicking a layer in the Layers panel on the
right and selecting Move Up or Move Down.

In Automatic mode, all layers that have the same Y-axis are automatically stacked into one graph (similar
to Single mode).

86
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Layers that have different scale are shown in Stacked mode.

Side Panel
With the Side Panel option, you can hide and display the side panel on the right-hand side of the graph.

87
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The Tools panel contains tools for viewing graphs. See page 85 for more information on the zooming tools
and page 85 on the reference line tools.

With the Bin data tool you can define data bins for scatter graphs and color grids. In the Bin Data
dialog box, select the Enabled option to activate data binning. When data binning is activated, the scatter
graph or color grid is divided into four data bins (defined by bin limits). For each data bin, the percentage
of the samples out of all samples, or the number of samples in that bin is displayed.

Bin limits defines the horizontal and vertical limits for the data bins.
Output format defines if the data binning values are shown in percentages or the number of samples.

88
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

In the example below, the horizontal bin limit is 50, vertical limit -12, and the output format is percentage.
The percentage values are displayed in the corners.

The Layers panel displays the layers that are currently open in the view. When you add more parameters
in the view, a new layer is created for each parameter. You can remove layers from the view by clicking
the Close button (X) and hide layers by clearing the respective option.
The Numerical Data panel displays selected information from the measurement.
If you have only one layer in your graph, you can set the color mode for the layer by right-clicking on the
layer name on the side panel and selecting Properties | Color and set the color mode. With multiple
layers you need to set the color mode through the graph properties (right-click on the graph and select
Properties | Color).

3D Mode
With the 3D Mode function you can switch the 3D mode on/off. The same function is available in the graph
toolbar . Note that this function is available for bar graphs only.

Line Graph Filled

In line graphs, select the Filled option in the graph popup menu to show the graph as "filled".

Group Values
Group Values enables you to group bars in bar graphs by parameter rather than by x axis values.
To enable/disable Group Values, right-click on the bar graph and select Group Values from the popup
menu.
If Group Values is disabled, bars are sorted based on their x axis values. In the screenshot below, the
bars are sorted based on their x axis values, that is, Scrambling Code/Channel Number.

89
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

If Group Values is enabled, bars are sorted by parameter. In the screenshot below, the bars are sorted
based on parameter, that is, Ec/N0 Active Set and Ec/N0 Monitored Set.

Graph Properties
In the Graph Properties dialog box you can edit the graph layout. These settings are the same for all
graph types.

90
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Mode defines if the layers are

stacked, in single, or in automatic
mode.

Show side panel hides/displays the

data panel on the right-hand side
of the data view.

Group values defines the grouping

of values belonging to the same
layer when multiple layers are
displayed in the same chart.
Applicable for bar graph only.

Axes defines the scales for the left

and right x axis.

3D defines the 3D view of the

chart.Orthogonal and Angle define
the angle of the 3D chart.

Coloring mode defines the coloring

mode for the graph.

Filled mode transparency defines

the transparency of the graph.

Chart color defines the color for

the chart.

Margin color defines the color for

the margin.

Gradient enables gradient coloring

of the chart background and
margin areas.

91
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The Layers tab displays a list of all

layers open in the graph. You can
add and remove layers.

Double-click a layer name or select

the layer from the list and click
Modify to access the Layer
Properties dialog.

Layer Properties
Right-click on a graph and select Properties. In the Graph Properties dialog box, go to the Layers tab and
double-click the layer name.
The Layer tab in the Layer Properties dialog box is common for all graph types but some of the options
might be missing for some graph types. If there are graph type specific settings, they are found in the
second tab. Note that all graph types do not have any special settings so there might be only one tab in
the Layer Properties dialog box. The graph type specific settings are explained in the following chapters.

Name defines the layer name. The

name is displayed at the bottom of
the data view.

Show marks displays the parameter

values in small labels on the graph.

Title (on x-tab) defines a name for

the axis.

When the Scale automatically to

values option is selected, the
software checks what values exist
for the parameter in the file and
scales the axes accordingly.

Alternatively, you can define the Top

and Bottom scales manually.

92
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Parameter tab allows you to add filters,

and modify existing filters and user-
definable attributes. For instance, with
N parameters (for example, Ec/N0 Nth
best), an N-based filter such as N = 1
is automatically set. To display the 2nd
best cell instead of the default 1st best,
change the filter value from N = 1 to N
= 2.

Default color defines the default color

for the line or bar.

Coloring mode defines the coloring

mode for the layer if you have only one
layer in the graph.

Color set colors the line/bar according

to the selected color set.

93
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Layer properties for line graphs

Line width defines the line thickness
in pixels.

When the Hold value constant until

next option is selected, the line is
drawn at the same level until the
value changes. See examples
below.

When the Show value points option

is selected, value points are shown
in the line graph.

In the example below, the Hold value constant until next option is not selected.

In the example below, the Hold value constant until next option is selected.

94
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Layer properties for bar graphs

Style defines the shape (rectangle,

ellipse, diamond, etc.) in which bars
are displayed in the graph.

Sorting defines the order in which

the bars are displayed in the graph.
The bars can be sorted in ascending
or descending order based on the
values on the X or Y axis.

Layer properties for scatter graphs

Mode defines which results are

displayed in the scatter graph.

Style defines the scatter shape.

95
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Use Case 6: Multiple graph layers

You can have as many layers as you like open in a graph. The example graph below has three layers
open in stacked mode.

If you have many layers open, it may come in handy to resize the page to fit even more layers in the
graph. Right-click on the graph and select Page | Properties.
In the Page Properties dialog box, go to the Page tab. With the Fixed Size setting you can define the size
of the page.

If the Fit to window option is selected, all the layers are displayed in the visible area of the page. This
means that when a new layer is added, the space for each layer gets smaller.
With the Fixed size option, you can define an exact size in pixels for the page. This will give more space
for each layer. With the scroll bar you can scroll up and down the page to view all layers.

96
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

When you have two layers in single mode you can select to view the scale for both of them. Right-click on
the graph and select Properties.
In the Graph Properties dialog box, go to the Graph tab. In the left and right Axes setting select the two
layers.

In this graph the left

axis displays scales
for RSCP 1. best,
and the right axis for
MIMO RSCP.

Use Case 7: Notification icons in graphs

You can view notification icons in graphs to notify you of special measurement events. Right-click on a
graph and select Pick Parameter.
From the Pick Parameter dialog box, select Notifications and markers and click OK.

97
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

From the Notifications Properties dialog box, select the notifications that you want to view in the graph and
click OK. It is also possible to define the pixel offset.
The notification icons are displayed in the graph.

Use Case 8: Correlating parameters using color grids and surface graphs
Color grid and surface graphs are graph types designed for correlating two parameters. For the purposes
of this use case, we will describe correlating parameters in a color grid. However, all of this information is
also applicable with surface graphs. In addition to the default parameter pairs (such as Rx quality sub vs.
Rx level sub) that are suggested when you right-click on an empty color grid and select Pick parameter,
you can also define your own parameter pairs.
To do this, create a new color grid by selecting View | Add Workbook | Graph from the ribbon bar and
once the empty data view opens, right-click on it, select Change Graph Type from the popup menu and
select Color grid from the available graphs. Alternatively, if you already have a graph open, you can right-
click on it, select Change Graph Type from the popup menu and select Color grid.

98
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Next, right-click on the empty color grid, select Correlate Parameters from the popup menu and a
Correlate Parameters dialog box opens.
Scope defines the measurement data included in the color grid.
Color set defines the color set for the color grid.
X Parameter page defines the properties of X parameter.
Parameter defines the X parameter.
With Filters, you can define additional filters for the parameter.
Minimum defines the minimum value for the parameter (see using filters).
Maximum defines the maximum value for the parameter.
Steps defines the number of steps on the color grid scales.
Y Parameter page (see X parameter)
After defining all the relevant values in the Correlate Parameters dialog box, click OK, and a color grid is
created.

Use Case 9: Viewing 5G measurement results in 3D Visualizer (optional)

This use case describes how to view 5G measurement results in 3D Visualizer.

99
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Begin by adding a measurement file containing 5G measurements to Nemo Analyze by dragging and
dropping the file directly to the workspace window.
In the workspace you will find a page for Base Stations by clicking on the icon on the bottom of the
workspace panel. Drag and drop a BTS file to the Base Stations workspace page. Next, select the base
station file and right-click on the measurement file. Select Active from the popup menu that opens.

Select the added 5G measurement file from the All Measurements folder in the Workspace |
Measurements view in the left-hand side of the Nemo Analyze main window. Select a 5 G measurement
parameter from the Parameters view and select Open In | 3D Visualizer. The 3D Visualizer opens in a
new window. Note that all parameters do not support the BTS functionality, i.e. some parameters can be
opened in 3D Visualizer but drawing beams from the cell to the route is not supported.

For instructions on how to use the 3D Visualizer, refer to 3D Visualizer User Guide provided by Keysight.

Grids
Grids can be used to display all sorts of data. The data is displayed in numerical format in user-defined
columns. You can export grid data to MS Excel or to a text file. You can also use color sets to highlight
certain data in the grid.
The first three items in the grid popup menu, Reset, Query, and Pick Parameter, are the same as in the
graph popup menu. See page 84 for more information on them. Play Audio Sample is displayed only with
grids containing an audio quality sample file column.

Side Panel
With the Side Panel option you can hide and display the side panel on the right-hand side of the grid.

With the Search function, you can perform searches in grid views for text and values. Boolean operators
are supported. You can highlight, filter in, or filter out matches.

100
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Type in the search string in the Find field, select the columns that will be included in the search, and
define if the search results should have matching case. Select the Highlight matches option if you want
the matching cells highlighted. When the Filter in option is selected, only the search matches will be
visible. When the Filter out option is selected, the search matches will be hidden.
With the Search decoded messages option, you can search for grid entries based on a value in the
decoded entry data (displayed in the Information panel). In the example below, both Search decoded
messages and Filter in are selected. Thus, only the two grid rows containing the searched decoded
information are displayed.

101
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The Layers panel displays the layers that are currently open in the view. When you add more parameters
in the view, a new layer is created for each parameter. You can remove layers from the view by clicking
the Close button (X).

The Information panel displays the selected message in decoded format. If you want to view the decoded
data in a separate view, double-click the message or right-click on the message and select Row Details.

Row Details
With the Row Details function you can decode grid data. The decoded data is opened in an Info View. You
can also use double-click to decode grid data.

102
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Export Data to
With the Export Data to function you can export grid data to MS Excel, text file, MapInfo Tab file, and
Google KML-File. When you export data to a MapInfo Tab or Google KML-file, you can then open the file
as a route on a map.
Select the appropriate option, and the exported data is saved on a file. Below is an example of exported
data in an Excel sheet.

If you want to export multiple parameters so that each parameter is in its own column in an Excel sheet,
first correlate the parameters and view the results in a grid. Then export the data. Note that only visible
data is exported. In the Grid Properties dialog box, you can select the visible parameters, for example
latitude and longitude.
Additionally, you can copy and paste any query from any control into a grid control where it can be
exported. Right-click on a control and select Query | Copy. Then go to the grid, right-click on the grid and
select Query | Paste.

Grid Properties
In the Grid Properties dialog box you can make various settings to the grid layout and select a color set.

From the Visible columns list, you can select the columns to be displayed.
To change the order of columns, select the column you want to move and use the arrow buttons on the
right to move it.
When Use coordinate projection is selected it is possible to choose which coordinate projection is used
from the dropdown menu. The default coordinate projection is EPSG: 4326 WGS84. Nemo Analyze
supports more than 4000 coordinate projections, such as Lambert 2, EPSG: 27572 (see the screenshot
above).

103
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Add adds a parameter to the grid.

Delete removes a parameter from the grid.

To define a color set for a grid column, select the column name, click the button that appears, and
select a color set for the grid column from the drop-down menu. For more information, see “Use Case 10:
Color sets in grids”.

104
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Show heading hides/displays the column titles at the top of the grid view.
Vertical text in heading option turns the column headings vertically.
Show row numbers hides/displays the row numbers at the beginning of each row.
Show time intervals hides/displays also the time interval in the Time column on each row.
Font defines the font, font style, and font size used in the grid.

Use Case 10: Color sets in grids

In addition to maps, you can use different color sets for different columns in grids to make the data
presentation more visual. In grids the color sets work as bar graphs. This use case describes how to use a
color set in a grid.
Right-click on the grid and select Properties.

In the Properties dialog box, select the Color Sets tab. Next, select the column you want to apply a color
set to and click the button.

105
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Select the appropriate color sets for the columns from the drop-down menu and click OK.

In the example below, Scr. Code and Ec/N0 columns are colored with the appropriate color sets.

106
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The selected columns display the selected color sets. The size and color of the bar in each cell correlates
with the parameter value.

Alternatively, you can select the Color whole cell option in the Color Sets tab of the Grid Properties dialog
box. Using this setting, the whole cell will be colored and only the color of the cell will indicate the value.

107
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Use Case 11: Play audio sample

Nemo audio quality measurement files include a sample of received audio quality. This makes it possible
to compare the audio quality of the received sample with that of the original sent sample.
To play the audio sample, select an audio quality measurement from the measurements and the
parameter Audio Quality Sample File Name UL from the Parameters view. Right-click on the parameter
and select Open In | Grid from the popup menu.
The measurement opens on a grid. Right-click on the row with the audio sample you want to hear and
select Play Audio Sample from the popup menu.

108
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Use Case 12: Using L3 and RRC message search parameters

To search values of particular type from decoded L3 and RRC signaling messages, first select a
measurement file in Workspace | Measurements | Measurements. Then, select a search parameter
depending on your need, for example L3 signaling parameter search.
Double-click on the selected search parameter.
The Analyze Wizard – Filters dialog box opens.

Enter search text (for example Short MAC value) and search message (for example
SERVICE_REQUEST) and select Finish.
Parameter name allows the user to define a name for the column that displays the searched values in the
result data set (see below).

Maps
Nemo Analyze incorporates the following mapping methods; MapInfo-format (.tab) maps based on the
MapX engine, KML format-based live maps, Nokia Maps with Street, Satellite and Terrain maps (part of
the Nemo Analyze Professional package), and additional WMS map sources, WMTS map sources, and
ArcGIS MapServer sources. Maps can be used to display the measurement route, base station icons, and
notification icons. The route can be colored based on parameter values.

109
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Viewing in live maps

Nemo Analyze allows you to view measurements on KML format-based live maps, Google Maps, Nokia
maps, and OpenStreetMaps. An internet connection is required for viewing measurements on live maps.
The map tiles are retrieved as needed when map is opened, zoomed, or panned.
In Live maps it is possible to set a default “home” location. This can be done by zooming into particular
place, then right-clicking and selecting Set As Default Location.
Live maps can be used the same way as regular MapInfo maps. Data and base stations can be plotted on
the map and data can be dragged to the map as in MapInfo maps. When playing back measurement data,
the cursor is seen on the map and lines are drawn to the connected base stations. Live maps can be
found from the Maps tab of the Workspace.
Maps can be used to display the measurement route, base station icons, and notification icons. The route
can be colored based on parameter values.
OpenStreetMap is included in the Nemo Analyze Professional feature package. OpenStreetMap is a free
map resource available globally. The maps are updated with the same open source principle as, for
example, Wikipedia. At the moment, the level of details in OpenStreetMap is similar to Google Maps with
Street View for the most part. The following figure illustrates OpenStreetmap data overlay:

Google Maps incorporate a street view, a satellite view, a hybrid map of satellite and streets, and a
physical map with terrain elevation illustrated.
Google Hybrid map with route overlay:

110
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

In case you have several routes that overlap each other on the map, it is possible to move routes on the
map for easier viewing. Click Offset route on the Map menu or in the side panel, then click the route you
wish to move. After clicking the route the cursor changes to indicate the offset route state.

Once you clicked the route, click the map on the place where you want to move the route. Please note
that the point you clicked on the route will be placed on the spot you click on the map.

The route is moved to the selected location. Note that this is the same functionality as Pixel offset in layer
Properties | Route | Pixel offset.

Google Street View

If a problem has occurred during data gathering, it is possible to check measurement route spots with the
help of Google Street View. Google Street View enables exploring the route spots through 360-degree
street-level imagery.
Select Maps from the Workspace and double-click Google Streets to open the Google Street View. After
this, drag and drop a measurement file from Workspace | Measurements onto the map. Right-click the
route and select Show Street View On Route Point from the popup menu.

111
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The view is split into two parts as illustrated below:

Hide Google Street View by right-clicking on the route and selecting Hide Street View from the pop up
menu.
With Google maps you are also able to view elevation on visible part of the active route. Right-click on
active route, and select Show Route Elevation from the pop up menu.

Map/Live Map Tools menu

See Chapter “Map Menu/Live Map Menu”.

112
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Map popup menu

Note: Depending on which map is used the popup menu contains different options.

The first items in the map popup menu, Refresh, Reset, Query, and Pick Parameter are the same as in
the graph popup menu.

Add
Under the Add item you will find options you can add on a map view. With the Add Map Layer function you
can add a map layer in the same map view.
With the Add Measurement function you can add another measurement file on the same map. Select the
file from the Add Measurement dialog box and click OK.

You can also filter the measurements. The new route will be displayed in addition to the existing one(s).
With the Add Frame and Add Comment functions you can add frames and comments on the map view. A
frame is a resizable window that can contain any of the available data view types. For example, you can
open the color legend in a frame.
A comment is a fixed-size window that is attached to certain coordinates on a map. If you scroll the map,
the comment window will move as well.
You can remove frames and comments by right-clicking on them and selecting Frame | Remove or
Comment | Remove.

Find
If you require a more detailed map from the same location, right-click on the route and select Find | Map
at Route or right-click anywhere on the map and select Find Map at Position.
Note that the Find feature only works with raster maps.
The Map Search dialog box will be opened with the matching maps. You can choose whether the new
map is displayed in a new workbook (Open) or as a layer (Add Layer) on the same map. Nemo Analyze
will search for the maps from the location you specified for maps in the Options dialog box (View | Tools |
Options | Environment | Default Paths).

113
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

In the example below, the new map is pasted on top of the existing map as a new layer.

Generate color set

See Chapter “Automatic generation of color sets”.

Export to KML file

To export a measurement route from Nemo Analyze map to for example Google Earth in KML format, in
map data view, right-click on the map and select Export To KML -File from the popup menu.
Alternatively, you can right-click on the route and select Export Data To | Google KML File from the
popup menu.
The Save As dialog box opens.
To save the route as a Google KML file, type in a file name in the File name field and click Save.
To open a KML file with Google Earth, go to Google Earth and select File | Open from the Google Earth
main menu. In the Open dialog box, select a KML file and click Open.
Google Earth displays the route complete with color sets, notification icons, and so forth.

114
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

In some cases, Google Earth may not be able to display the exported data in OpenGL mode. To switch to
Direct X mode, select Tools | Options from the Google Earth main menu bar.
The Google Earth Options dialog box opens. Select Direct X in the Graphics Mode section and click OK.
To apply the changes, restart Google Earth.

Zoom to Layers
Zooms the map to show all layers on the map.

Create New Folder From This Area

This function enables you to create a new folder from the area.

Set As Default Location

This function enables you to set the area as the default location.

Show Street View on Location

This option shows you street view on location.

Hide Street View

Hides the street view from the map.

115
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Side Panel - Map

With the Side Panel option, you can hide and display the side panel on the right-hand side of the map.

The Tools panel provides you with controls for manipulating the map view. The function of each tool is
described below.

With the Arrow tool you can select items on the map view.
With the Pan tool you can scroll the map.
With the Zoom In and Zoom Out tools you can zoom the view. You can also zoom in and out on
the views with the mouse wheel.
With the Area Binning tool you can define an area on a map which you can run statistics on in the
form of bins. The results are displayed on the map as a new semi-transparent layer.
Distance binning enables you to define a map area in which the measured route is divided into
segments set by you. You can run statistics based on these segments in the form of bins. The results are
displayed on the map as a new semi-transparent layer.
With the Statistics From Polygon Area tool you can specify an area of any shape, and run statistics
over that area. The results are displayed in the statistics data view.
With the Delta Plotting tool you can and compare the parameter values of two measurement groups
from a same route by defining an area on a map (e.g. a portion of the measurement route). For more
information on Delta Plotting, see the topic “Use Case 16: Comparing two groups of measurements from
the same route on map”.
With the Distance tool you can measure the distance between two points.
With the Highlight tool you can highlight selected values on the map route. First select a scheme in
the Route Properties, Color dialog). Then click on the route and the Highlight Value dialog will be opened.
The dialog displays all the values of the selected event type. From the list, pick the value that you would

116
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

like to be highlighted and select a color for that value. Click OK and the value is colored in the selected
value
With the Draw Polygon tool you can create a polygon area by clicking on the map. The polygon is
closed by clicking on the start point of the polygon.
Show Elevation enables you to draw a line on a map, according to which elevation is shown in the
bottom of the screen.
With the Center tool you can center the map on the point where you click.
With the Offset tool you can move the measurement route to another location. Click on the route you
want to move, and then on the new location.
With the View Entire Map tool you can zoom out quickly.
With the Organize Layers tool you can change the order of layers on the map. See page 118 for
more information on the tool.
The BTS Filter drop-down menu allows you to select which BTS cells are displayed on the map.
The Layers panel displays the layers that are currently open in the view. When you add more routes on
the map, a new layer is created. You can remove layers from the view by clicking the Close button (X)
and hide layers by clearing the respective option.
Right-click on the layer titles in the layer browser to access a set of map-related tools.

With Drill Down you can run a report, workbook, or parameter for the same measurement data that is
shown on the map.
With the Zoom To tool you can zoom to the selected route. This is useful if you have several
measurements open on the same map.
With the Move To Top tool you can move a selected layer to top.
With the Find tool you can search another map that matches the measurement route. Note that the Find
feature only works with raster maps. See page 113 for more information on the Find tool.
With the Export Data To tool enables you to export data to MapInfo Tab-file/Google KML-File.
With the Show BTS Connections tool you can enable base station connections to be displayed on the
map.
Show BTS Connections enables showing individual base stations that are in use at a selected
measurement/route point.
Serving Cell Lines enables you to export KML beam lines to Google Earth. For more information, see Use
Case 23: Exporting KML beam lines to Google Earth.
With the Show Street View On Route Point you can see the street view of a chosen point of route.
Hide Street View hides the street view
With the Show Route Elevation you can view elevation on visible part of the active route.
With the Remove tool you can remove the selected layer.
With the Properties option you can open the Route Properties dialog (see page 119 for more information).
The Active Layer panel displays the name of the active layer and information on BTS sites to which the
test device is currently connected.
The Color Legends panel displays the color sets in use.

117
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Drawing options
Under the drawing options you can find some of the same drawing options that are given in the ribbon bar.

Tool
Under the Tool item you will find a selection of tools for viewing the map.
These same functions are available in the map side panel.

MapX
Under the MapX item you will find tools related to MapX maps.
With the View Entire Map tool you can zoom out quickly.
You can customize the map view using the MapX properties. With the Save Geoset function the
customized settings can be saved in a MapInfo Geoset file (.gst) and loaded later on.
With the Organize Layers tool you change the order of map layers. In the Layer Control dialog box,
change the order with the Up and Down buttons. Clear the Visible option if you want to hide a layer from
the map.

Properties will open the MapX Properties dialog box.

In the Layers tab the table a list of the current layers is shown. The order on the list defines the order in
which the layers are displayed on a map; for example, in this case the Route layer is on the top, BTS sites
under that, and World map at the bottom. This utility is useful if you want to have a bigger map on the
bottom (for example, a map of Europe) and a more detailed map of a smaller area (for example of
Helsinki) on top of that. To add layers on the map click Add. An Open dialog box is opened, where you

118
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

can choose the map you want to add as a layer. The map is added on the list and with Up and Down you
can change the map’s position on the list. By selecting and clearing the Visible option you can decide
whether or not to display the layer on the map. To remove layers from the map, select the layer from the
list and click Remove.

Map Properties
The Properties item will open the Map Properties dialog box.
In the Map Properties dialog box you can define how the BTS icons are displayed. You can also select
and clear the Auto centering tool.

Auto centering keeps the map focus always on the measurement vehicle.
Show route names displays route names on the map.
Show current position displays the current position and direction on the map.
Highlight active route displays the currently selected route highlighted so it is easy to see on the map.
Show scale bar displays a distance scale bar on the map.
Select the Draw line to active base station to draw line from the serving BTS to the test vehicle.
Display BTS overlay on top of other layers keeps BTS layers always on top of the route layers.

Route Properties
In the Route Properties dialog box you can modify the appearance and settings of the measurement route
on the map. Right-click on the route and select Properties. On the last five pages you have the option to
apply the new settings to all routes visible on the map.

119
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Name defines the title of the route

layer.

Draw Mode defines how the route is

drawn (line or symbol). See page
123 for more information.

Hide long distance lines hides

unusually long lines which probably
mean that there is a problem with the
GPS connection.

Pixel Offset values enable you to

move the route on the map
horizontally and vertically.

Thickness defines the route

thickness in pixels. You can define,
for example, a thicker line to be
drawn when the test device is in high
band.

Select measurement events that will

be displayed on the map as icons.

Select the Print description option to

view event descriptions (for example
marker numbers) on the map.

Select the Hide overlapping

descriptions option to hide the
description text if the texts overlap
each other.

Pixel offset values enable you to

change the position of notification
icons on map horizontally and
vertically.

120
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Mode defines if the route is colored

using the default color or using value-
based coloring. If you select color
rotation, the color of the route changes
whenever the value of the selected
parameter changes.

Parameter defines the parameter used

in the coloring.

Color set defines the colors for

parameter values.

Filters displays the parameters used in

the query.

Tooltip defines a set of "Tooltip

parameters" that are shown in a tooltip
when mouse is hovered over it. The
parameters should be defined per
system so that different set of
parameter would be shown depending
on the serving system
(LTE/GSM/UMTS/and others) at the
location on the route. After you select
the parameter(s) Nemo Analyze asks
you to define the system(s) in a
separate dialog box which opens
automatically.

121
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The Systems dialog box opens when

you select a parameter on the Tooltip
tab. The system options are
parameter-specific. Select the
system(s) and click OK.

Parameter defines the parameter

which will be displayed as numerical
values along the measurement route.

Font and Color define the text

settings.

Select the Hide overlapping values

option to hide the values if the texts
overlap each other.

122
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

BTS defines which lines are drawn

to form a measurement route.

Draw route as symbols

You can draw the route on a map as symbols. In the Route Properties dialog box, select Symbol in the
Draw Mode field and click the … button. In the Symbol Style dialog box, define the appearance of the
symbol and click OK.

123
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Font defines the symbol font.

Symbol defines the symbol used to draw the route.
Color defines the symbol color.
Effects defines what effects are applied to the symbol.
Below is an example of a map route drawn with symbols.

124
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

BTS files

In the workspace you will find a page for Base Stations by clicking on the icon on the bottom of the
workspace panel.

Files displays all BTS files stored in the database.

Sites displays site information and details of the base stations/antennas
If there are multiple versions of the same BTS file, that is, from different dates, the correct file is
automatically selected based on the time of the measurement session if the file has been named
according the naming convention filename_YYYY-MM-DD.nbf where filename must be identical with all
versions of the same BTS file. The date suffix changes with the date (YYYY stands for year, MM for
month, and DD for day) of the BTS file.

Note: Change the filename format to filename_YYYY-MM-DD.nbf before you load

the file to the database.

125
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

A BTS file needs to be activated in order for it to be used in saved workbooks and BTS ref queries. When
opening a BTS file, a Set Active BTS File dialog box opens. The user can activate a file by selecting the
box next to the file.

Note: You can add custom site information columns to the BTS file. These columns will be displayed as
part of site information in the Nemo Analyze UI.
If there are multiple versions and the file has not been named according to the naming convention above,
the relevant BTS file version must be activated. If none of the files are activated (that is, designated as
relevant files), reliable results cannot be guaranteed.
To modify active BTS settings of a file that has already been added to the database, open the BTS page
of the Workspace by clicking the button, right-click on the relevant BTS file, and select Active from
the popup menu.
To display base stations as BTS icons on map, drag and drop a BTS file from Workspace | Base
Stations | Files to a map. The green sectors represent the antenna directions.

126
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Note that BTS icons show differently depending on zoom level. When zooming outwards, base stations
are no longer shown as green icons, but as red dots:

Double-click on a BTS icon to view more information on that base station.

To connect the measurement route to the BTS, right-click on the route and select Properties. Go to the
BTS tab, select Draw line to active base station, and click OK. If the route is not associated with a BTS
file, the line to the active base station is not drawn.

127
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

If you have several BTS files open on the map, you can define which base stations are displayed. Right-
click on the map and select Properties. Select the Draw line to active base stations to draw only the
BTS icons from the system, for example, GSM that the mobile is currently using.
To connect the measurement route to the BTS, right-click on the route and select Properties. Go to the
BTS tab, click Modify and select the BTS file to connect to, and click OK. If the route is not associated
with a BTS file, the line to the active base station is not drawn.

128
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

BTS properties
Right-click on the BTS file layer in the side panel and select Properties.

In the BTS Properties dialog box you can edit the appearance of the BTS icons.

Draw line to active base station enables the drawing of a line from the serving BTS to the test vehicle.

129
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Icon size defines the size of the BTS icon in pixels. Fixed defines the fixed size of BTS icons in pixels.
Dynamic, max size defines a maximum size for dynamic BTS icons (that is, icons which change size
based on zoom level).
Show site names hides and displays the site names.
Draw frame hides and displays the outlines of BTS icons.
Site transparency defines the transparency of the BTS icons.

Show cell information, when selected, allows you to choose what information is shown for BTS cells.
Select Add to define which parameters are shown.
Hide cell texts on low zoom levels (performance optimization) hides cell text when the map is zoomed out
so that the map can be drawn faster and with less visual distractions.
Use cell beam range from BTS file allows you to enable/disable the display of cell beam range based on
cell beam range data in the BTS file.
Additionally, use estimation from antenna height and tilt estimates the base station coverage area based
on antenna height and tilt.
Beam transparency defines the transparency of the beam range layer.

130
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Default color defines the color of the BTS icon.

Mode (parameter/custom) enables you to choose whether to use BTS Parameter or custom query option
in the base station coloring.
Technology allows the user to define the parameter coloring depending on the technology that has been
used.
BTS parameter defines the parameter used in the coloring.
Mode (parameter/custom) enables you to choose whether to use BTS Parameter or custom query option
in the base station coloring.
Custom query enables you to select a custom query which defines how the coloring is done.
Color set defines the colors for parameter values.
Beam color defines the color that is used to draw a beam of a base station.

The Highlights page displays options that can be used to select colors used to display highlighted cells on
the map. To apply the highlight colors, right-click on a cell on the map and select Highlight neighboring
cells or Highlight sectors…

131
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Use Case 13: Adding map layers and saving layer combinations as geosets
To add more map layers to the map view, drag and drop a .TAB file from the Workspace | Maps |
Loaded MapX Maps to an open map view.

For organizing map layers, see “MapX” on page 118.

Once you have added the layers you need to the map, you can save the entire layer combination as a
Geoset to enable direct access to the map in the future. To save the combination as a single Geoset,
right-click on map view and select MapX | Save Geoset from the popup menu.

Note that to have these options, a MapX must be used.

The Save As dialog box opens. Enter a name for the Geoset file and click Save.
The Geoset Name dialog box opens. Enter a name for the Geoset and click OK. The entire combination of
map layers can now be loaded into the database and opened as a single map.

132
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Use Case 14: Coloring routes based on BTS coverage

This use case describes a situation where the user needs to view the coverage of a single base station on
a map. It is assumed that there are measurement files with coordinates, BTS files, and corresponding
maps in the database.
Step 1: Open a measurement and a BTS file on a map
Open a map file and drag and drop measurements on it. Do not open any parameters. Next, drag and
drop BTS files on the map and associate them with the route(s).
Step 2: Color routes based on BTS coverage
To color route(s) based on base station coverage, right-click a base station and select Color Layers
Based On Scrambling Code [number] from the popup menu.

The route will be colored based on the Ec/N0 or RSCP value of the selected base station.

133
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

To perform area binning on a selected part of the route, proceed to “Use Case 15: Performing area
binning”.

Use Case 15: Performing area binning

Step 1: Select Bin Area
Click the Area Binning icon on the Tools panel and select an area from the map.

Step 2: Select Measurement File(s)

Selecting an area opens the Analyze Wizard – Select Measurement dialog box below. In this dialog box,
you can add measurements you want to perform the area binning on. The measurement route on the map
is included in the selected measurements by default.

134
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Folder defines the

measurement folder whose
contents are displayed in the
field below.

Using the Filter field, you can

search for measurements.

The Selected measurements

field displays all the
measurements that have been
selected for area binning.

With the button, you can

select measurements

With the button, you can

clear measurements

After you have selected the measurements you want to perform the area binning on, click Next.
This opens the Analyze Wizard – Measurement parameters dialog box.
If you are performing an area binning for a single base station see “Use Case 13: Adding map layers and
saving layer combinations as geosets”.

This opens the Analyze Wizard – Filters dialog box.

If you are performing an area binning for a single base station (see page 129 ), clicking Finish opens
another Analyze Wizard – Filters dialog box. Again, select the scrambling code or channel number value
from the Value drop-down menu and click Finish.

135
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The area binning statistics are by default weighted by time. Although area binning as an operation is
location-based, each sample has its unique time and distance weights that can be used in calculating time
and distance averages per bin.
If you want to weight the results by distance, you must have Calculate statistics based on set to <Ask
every time> in View | Options | Environment | Statistics (see page 393). In this case, the Choose
Statistics Type dialog box will open after clicking Finish in the Analyze Wizard - Filters dialog box above,
allowing you to select Distance as statistics type. After selecting the statistics type, click OK.
The area binning results are displayed on the map as a new layer.

Step 3: Adjusting Bin Size

To adjust bin size, right-click the area binning layer on the Layers panel and select Properties from the
popup menu.

136
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

In the Properties dialog box, adjust bin size by changing the X steps and Y steps values. The higher the
value is, the smaller the bin size. When the bin size has been adjusted, click OK, and the area binning
layer is displayed with the new bin size.
Name refers to the name of the base parameter.
X steps and Y steps define the bin size.
Scrambling code refers to the scrambling code of the base station.
Draw method defines whether the bins are displayed in Fixed size irrespective of the zoom level, or in
Actual size.
Print value, when selected, displays numeric values of the measurement points in the map.
With the Statistic drop-down menu, you can select the aggregate displayed on the map: Minimum,
Maximum, Sample count, Std. deviation and Variance. By default, average per bin is displayed.
Color set defines the color set that is used.
Transparency defines the transparency of the area binning layer.
Step 4: Exporting Area Binning Data
To export area binning data to Excel, or to .txt or MapInfo .tab format, right-click the area binning layer on
the Layers panel and select Export Data To | Excel or Export Data To | File from the popup menu. For
more information on the Export Data To function, see p. 103. For exporting area binning data to for
example Google Earth in KML format, see Chapter “Export to KML file”.
8.11.25.1 Distance-based binning
The workflow for performing distance-based binning is similar to area binning. The difference between the
two is that area binning uses coordinates to perform the bin, whereas distance-based binning uses
distance values from the measurement files to perform the bin.

To perform distance binning

137
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

1. Select the binning area. Click the Distance Binning icon on the Tools panel and select an
area from the map.

2. The Analyze Wizard – Select Measurement dialog box opens. Select a measurement and click
Next.

138
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

3. The Analyze Wizard – Measurement Parameters dialog box opens. Select a parameter and click
Next.

4. The Analyze Wizard – Filters dialog box opens. Select filters if applicable and click Finish.

139
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The map view opens displaying your bin results as a new layer.

5. Click Zoom in to zoom in on the measurement points. To modify the bin or to see measurement
values, right-click the distance binning layer on the Layers panel and select Properties from the
popup menu.

The
Properties dialog box displays two views, Statistics and Color.

140
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Name refers to the name of the base parameter.

Info displays the measurement information.
Draw frame, when selected, draws a frame for the bin area.
Print value, when selected, displays numeric values of the measurement points in the map.

Draw method defines whether the bins are displayed in Fixed size irrespective of the zoom level, or
in Actual size.
Size defines the size of the fixed size circle.
Filters enables you to add filters.

141
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Statistics defines the statistics for the bin. The options are:

Color set enables you to define the color set used for the parameters.
Transparency defines the transparency of the area binning layer.

Use Case 16: Comparing two groups of measurements from the same
route on map
This use case describes a situation where the user needs to compare the parameter values of two groups
of measurements from the same route. It is assumed that there are measurement files with coordinates
and corresponding maps in the database.
Step 1: Open a Measurement File on a Map
Open a map file and drag and drop measurements on it.
Step 2: Performing Delta Plotting on Map
Delta plotting makes it possible to display the difference between two groups of measurements from the
same route on map.

Click the Delta Plotting icon on the Tools panel and select an area from the map.

142
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

In the screenshot below, you can see the area selection surrounded by a thin dotted line.

Selecting an area opens the Delta Plotting dialog box.

To select measurements for Measurement Group 1, click Configure and the Analyze Wizard – Select
Measurement dialog box opens. In this dialog box, you can select the measurements you want to perform
the delta plotting on. You can have one to many measurements in each measurement group. A
measurement group average is calculated from all measurements within a Measurement Group. The
difference value plotted on map represents the difference between the two measurement group averages.

143
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Folder defines the measurement folder whose contents are displayed in the field below.
Using the Filter field, you can search for measurements.
The Selected measurements field displays all the measurements that have been selected for the
measurement group
With the button, you can select measurements
With the button, you can clear measurements
Once you have selected the measurements you want to include in the Measurement Group 1, click Next.
This opens the Analyze Wizard – Measurement parameters dialog box. Select the parameter based on
which you want to compare the two measurement groups and click Next. Note that you have to select the
same parameter for both measurement groups.

The Analyze Wizard – Filters dialog box opens.

144
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Filter options are optional. Define filter options if necessary and click Finish.

Repeat the steps above to define measurements for Measurement Group 2.

145
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Once you have selected measurements for both measurement groups, click OK in the Delta Plotting
dialog box.
From the Choose Statistics Type dialog box you can choose whether statistics are weighted by time
(select Time), or distance (select Distance), or whether they are not weighted at all (select Sample).
Although delta plotting as an operation is by default distance-based, each sample has its unique time and
distance weights that can be used in calculating time and distance averages per bin. In delta plotting this
average per bin is calculated for bins of both routes separately. To find out the difference between the bin
values of one route and the bin values of the other, a subtraction is performed between the bin values of
the routes.
Depending on the operation you are performing, select either Time, Distance, or Sample and click OK.
The delta plotting results are displayed on the map as a new layer.

Use Case 17: Displaying base station cell beam range on map
To display the cell beam range of an individual cell on map, select the relevant cell with a right-click.

146
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The beam range of the selected cell is displayed on the map as a sector.
If the BTS file you are using does not contain cell beam range data, you can set the range in BTS options.
Select View | Options to define base station display settings.
The Options dialog box opens. Select BTS | General.

BTS texts options allows you to define the size and style of BTS text.
Display BTS overlay on top of other layers sets BTS layers to be displayed over all other layers.
Default BTS filter allows you to set default BTS filter that will automatically turn the chosen filter on if there
are such base stations in the BTS file.
Optimization defines when cells and sites are drawn on a map.
In the Tools window there is a BTS filter field that enables you to choose which base stations are shown:

For UMTS and LTE options you must set a Carrier number which defines which part of the BTS filter is
chosen.
When Turn off BTS workspace is selected, sites tree is hidden to optimize performance.

147
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Default enables you to define the default color for base stations when displayed in the map view.
Default beam color enables you to define the default beam color.
Default settings for BTS parameter, when selected, enables you to define default color sets for BTS
parameters.
BTS defines the parameter used in the coloring.
Color set defines the colors for parameter values.

BTS Technology Based Settings enable you to choose the color and the size of the base station
depending on which network´s base station it is, or based on the carrier number.
When the Use technology based settings (overrides icon size settings) option is selected, you are able to
open the Set Technology Setting view by clicking Add. By clicking Icon color, the size and the color of
the base stations changes on the map. If this option is not selected, only the size of the base station
changes.
To edit cell-specific properties, right-click a base station icon cell, and select Properties from the popup
menu.

148
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The Current tab of the Properties dialog box opens. To see descriptions of the BTS cells settings, see the
Cell tab.

Beam range defines the cell beam range in meters.

149
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Draw line to active base station enables the drawing of a line from the serving BTS to the test vehicle.

Icon size defines the size of the BTS icon in pixels. Fixed defines the fixed size of BTS icons in pixels.
Dynamic, max size defines a maximum size for dynamic BTS icons (i.e. icons which change size based
on zoom level).
Show site names hides and displays the site names.
Draw frame hides and displays the outlines of BTS icons.
Site transparency defines the transparency of the BTS icons.

150
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Show cell information, when selected, allows you to choose what information is shown for BTS cells.
Select Add to define which parameters are shown.
Hide cell texts on low zoom levels (performance optimization) hides partly or completely the cell texts
when the map is zoomed out so that the map can be drawn faster and with less visual distractions. The
level is adjustable with a slider. Zoom levels are specific to used maps.
Use cell beam range from BTS file allows you to enable/disable the display of cell beam range based on
cell beam range data in the BTS file.
Additionally, use estimation from antenna height and tilt estimates the base station coverage area based
on antenna height and tilt.
Beam transparency defines the transparency of the beam range layer.
Cell beam range can also be displayed by selecting a cell in Workspace | Base Stations | File Contents
with a left-click.

151
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Use Case 18: Synchronizing base station map overlay with grid rows
Nemo Analyze allows the synchronization of grid data with base stations on map. To synchronize BTS
map overlay with grid data, first open both a measurement file (p. 54) and a BTS file (p. 55) on map.
Next, split the data view vertically by right-clicking on the map and selecting Data View | Split | Vertically
from the popup menu.

The data view is split into two sections.

152
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Right-click on the view and select Data View | Insert | Grid from the popup menu to add a grid with BTS
data to the empty section.

Next, drag and drop an .nbf file from the workspace.

153
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

A grid with BTS data is now displayed. The map now zooms automatically to the cell selected in the grid.

Use Case 19: Using BTS reference parameters

Parameters view contains a set of parameters with the parameter name prefix BTS reference. These
parameters display information on the current serving and neighboring cell(s) based on a BTS reference
file (that is, BTS file). BTS reference parameters can be used, for instance, to display the name of the
serving cell in a workbook together with recorded metrics, or as an input data set in KPI workbench to
enable the grouping of aggregates based on, for example, serving cell. For the BTS reference parameters
to work correctly, the relevant BTS reference file must be present in the database.
A BTS file needs to be activated in order for it to be used in saved workbooks and BTS ref queries. When
opening a BTS file, a Set Active BTS File dialog box opens. You can activate a file by selecting the box
next to the file.

If there are multiple versions of the same BTS file, for example from different dates, the relevant BTS file
version must be activated. If none of the files are activated (that is, designated as relevant files), reliable
results cannot be guaranteed.
To modify active BTS settings of a file that has already been added to the database, open the BTS page
of the Workspace by clicking the button, right-click on the relevant BTS file, and select Activate
from the popup menu.
Once the relevant BTS file has been activated, open the Measurements page of the Workspace by

clicking the button.

154
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Select a measurement or a measurement folder, and type the word reference to the filter above the
Parameters view to list BTS reference parameters.

To open a parameter in its default view, select a measurement in the Workspace and then double-click a
parameter in the Parameters view. If you want to open the parameter in some other type of view, right-
click on a parameter in the Parameters view and select the view type from the popup menu.
To run statistics based on the parameter, right-click on a selected parameter in the Parameters view and
click Parameter Launchpad in the menu. This opens the Parameter Launchpad. For more information on
Parameter Launchpad, see page 49.

Use Case 20: Displaying base station connections on map based on pilot
pollution
Nemo Analyze allows base station connections to be displayed on map based on pilot pollution. To
display base station connections from measurement to individual cells on map based on pilot pollution,
select a measurement file from Measurements, right-click on a Pilot pollution in the Parameters view, and
select Open In | Map from the popup menu.
The program will ask for a carrier number. Select query values and enter a value.
The value has to match the one of BTS file.

155
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The Select columns dialog box opens. Click OK.

When the query has been executed, the results will be drawn on a map.
Go to base stations tab and drag the BTS file onto the map.

The program will ask if you want to associate route with BTS, select Yes.
Enter a channel number to match the previously entered query value.
The measured pilots will be drawn on the map.
To view the drawn BTS go to Tools | Layers, then right-click and select Properties | BTS.

156
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Use Case 21: Cell locator analysis

Cell locator is an algorithm that estimates the site locations and antenna directions of individual cells
based on measured signal strength per cell. The accuracy of the estimate depends on the geographical
coverage of the collected data; a confidence number (1—10) is reported per estimated cell location, with
accuracy of <100 meters (110 yards) when data is collected from opposite sides of the BTS. The Cell
locator works for WCDMA and LTE scanner and mobile data collected outdoors. The BTS locations and
antenna directions are displayed in a map illustration and in a .csv text file (Nemo BTS reference file
format).
In the example below the real location of the cell is indicated in green, and the estimated location based
on drive test data is indicated in purple.

The Cell locator can be found in the Workspace parameter tree: LTE mobile cell locator, LTE scanner cell
locator, UMTS mobile cell locator, and UMTS scanner cell locator.

157
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

When running the analysis, the following inputs are prompted:

• Minimum accuracy: set the number to 6 or higher to receive only the most accurately (<100m)
located cells/sites. Setting the number to 9 or 10 may filter out all results if the collected data is not
covering the measured region densely enough.
• Carrier number: analysis is done by carrier (channel number). Pick the carrier number from the list
of available channel number in the dataset from the dropdown menu.
• Minimum received power: data points with a signal strength lower than the threshold will be filtered
out. In most cases the accuracy improves when the very low values (-120dBm in LTE and -
100dBm in UMTS) are filtered out due to mobiles and scanners reporting incorrect ghost cells on
very low power levels.

Double-click the analysis on the parameter tree to open the analysis in a map as a BTS reference overlay.

158
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Right- click on the layer in the side panel to export the data to .kml and MapInfo tab.
Right-click on the parameter and select Open in | Grid to open the analysis in a table view.
From the table view the results can be exported to CSV, Microsoft Excel, and MapInfo .tab files. Right-
click and select Export Data To | [your selection].

Use Case 22: 5G beam visualization

To make a graphical visualization for the best beams of 5G mobile and scanner measurements using
Nemo Analyze, follow the instructions below:

1. Load and activate a related BTS file.

2. Plot the route of a 5G measurement on the map workbook.
3. Right-click on top of a route.
4. Click Beam lines.

5G measurement route is automatically detected and lines are drawn from all points of the route to the
site/cell of the best beam. Lines are colored based on the beam index (automatic colorset is used).

See below an example of 'Serving beam lines' plot for a 5G scanner measurement:

159
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Use Case 23: Exporting KML beam lines to Google Earth

To export KML beam lines to Google Earth, follow the instructions below.

1. Right-click on the layer titles in the layer browser to access a set of map-related tools.
2. From the BTS Filter drop-down menu, select Serving Cell Lines to export KML beam lines to Google
Earth. The beams drawn from the base stations on the route are shown on Google Earth.

Spreadsheet Grid
Nemo Analyze spreadsheets enable the processing of measurement data in spreadsheet format. As the
basic functionality of Nemo Analyze spreadsheets is in line with the de facto standard followed by most
spreadsheet applications on the market, this section will focus only on those features and usages that are
specific to Nemo Analyze and to measurement data post-processing.
To use a spreadsheet grid, select the option in View | Options | Environment | Layout | Show
spreadsheet grid in menus. Then select View | Workbook | Spreadsheet Grid in the ribbon bar to
open an empty spreadsheet.
You can drag and drop parameters on the spreadsheet from the Parameters view. Nemo Analyze will
display a green icon if spreadsheet is a suitable data view for the parameter, and a red icon if the
data view is unsuitable.

160
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The query is opened on the spreadsheet.

Alternatively, you can open measurements with parameters on a spreadsheet straight from the
Parameters view.

161
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Select a measurement folder or file in the Workspace and right-click a parameter in the Parameters view.

From the popup menu, select Spreadsheet.

The query is opened on a spreadsheet.

162
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Editing cell format

To format cells containing parameter data, right-click on the cell in the top left corner of the parameter
data set and select Format Cells from the popup menu.

The Query tab of the Format Cells dialog box opens.

Please note that the Query tab is not displayed if Format Cells is not accessed via a
right-click on the cell in the top left corner of a parameter data set.

Show results, if selected, displays the parameter data set as a whole. If cleared, Show results minimizes
the parameter data set into a single cell. Although minimized and not visible, functions can still be run on
the entire parameter data set as each cell can still be referred to, based on the original parameter data set
structure. For more information on making references to a minimized parameter data set in a formula, see
“Use Case 24: Retrieving data from minimized data sets” on page 170.
Show columns, if selected, displays data set column names.
Short column names, if selected, displays short versions of data set column names.

163
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The Number tab of the Format Cells dialog box allows you to define the format in which numbers are
displayed within the selected cell(s).

General defines that the default settings for the content type are used.
Number defines the cell content as numbers and allows you to set the number of decimals displayed.
Percentage defines the cell content as a percentage and allows you to set the number of displayed
decimals.
Time defines the cell content as time and displays the value in the cell in hours, minutes, seconds, and
milliseconds.
The Alignment tab of the Format Cells dialog box allows you to define the alignment of text within cells.

Text alignment
Horizontal defines the horizontal alignment of text within the selected cells as Default, Left, Center, or
Right.
Vertical defines the vertical alignment of text within cells as Top, Center, or Bottom.

Text control
Wrap text, if selected, enables word wrap within the selected cells.
Merge cells enables you to merge selected cells into a single cell. Select the cells you want to merge,
right-click on the selection, select Format Cells from the popup menu, and select Merge cells from the
Alignment tab of the Format Cells dialog box.

164
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The Font tab of the Format Cells dialog box allows you to define the font and color of the text within cells.

Font defines the font of the text within cells.

Color defines the font of the text within cells.
The Border tab of the Format Cells dialog box allows you to define borders for cells.

Border width defines the border thickness for cells as Thin (default), Medium, or Thick.
Presets allows you to select which border groups are to be displayed. With None, no borders are
displayed. With Outline, only the outlines of a cluster of cells are displayed as a border. With Inside, the
borders of all cells within a cluster of cells are set as borders.
Border buttons (that is, Top, Middle, Bottom, Left, Middle, and Right) allow you to select manually which
borders are to be displayed.

165
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The Patterns tab of the Format Cells dialog box allows you to define cell background color.

Cell color defines the cell background color.

Filtering data
To filter out unwanted data based on values in a particular column, select the contents of the columns you
want to filter, right-click on the selection, and select AutoFilter from the popup menu.

166
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

An AutoFilter drop-down menu is created based on values in the selected column(s).

To filter out all rows that do not contain a particular column value, select a column value from the drop-
down menu.

All rows that do not contain the selected value in the filter column will be filtered out. Selecting (All) from
the drop-down menu displays all rows again.
To remove an AutoFilter from a column, right-click the AutoFilter element at the column heading, and clear
AutoFilter from the popup menu.

167
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Creating formulas
You can enter a formula in any cell on the spreadsheet. The creation of a formula always begins with the
equal sign (=). The next element identifies the mathematical function, for example, AVG stands for the
function Average. For more functions, see Chapter “Adding functions” on page 168.
=AVG
The rest of the formula defines the source data for the function and is placed within brackets.
=AVG()
If the cells containing the source data for the function are located on another sheet, it is first necessary to
identify the location of the data by entering the sheet name followed by the exclamation mark (!).
=AVG(Sheet 2!)
If the cells containing the source data for the function are located within a separate data set on the same
spreadsheet, it is first necessary to identify the location of the data by entering the data set name (for
example the name of a query opened on the spreadsheet) preceded by the asterisk (*) and followed by
the exclamation mark (!).
=AVG(*BLER DL!)
Next, a reference to the actual cells is added. A cell is referred to by a combination of the column letter
and the row number that intersect at the cell’s location, for example A1. To refer to a range of cells, first
identify the start point of the range (that is, the first cell in the range), and separate it from the end point
(that is, last cell in the range) with a colon (:). If the range covers multiple columns, the start and end point
references should be to the cells in the upper left and lower right corners of the range.
=AVG(*BLER DL!A1:D555)
If the range covers all cells in a column, the range can be referred to by using just the column letter as
both the start and end point, instead of referring to individual cells with row numbers.
=AVG(*BLER DL!A:A)
To refer to more than one cell range, separate each range with a semicolon (;).
=AVG(*BLER DL!A1:B12;C10:D16)
For information on the general format of spreadsheet formulas, see one of the numerous helps and guides
for spreadsheet applications available on the internet.

Adding functions
To perform a mathematical operation based on a group of cells, select the cells by holding the left mouse
button down while moving the cursor over the selected cells. Once all intended cells have been selected,
release the left mouse button and right-click over the selection. A popup menu opens. From the popup
menu, select Insert Function | [function].

168
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The function is added below the selected cells. The cell with the function displays the result of the
function. The formula of the function is displayed in the formula field on the topmost bar of the
spreadsheet view.

If you wish, you can relocate the function by cutting and pasting.
If you do not find an appropriate function amongst those displayed in the popup menu, select Insert
Function | More Functions instead.
The Insert Function dialog box opens.

169
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

When you select a function from the list, the info field below displays a description of the function. Select a
function from the list and click OK. The function is added below the selected cells, as discussed above.

Use Case 24: Retrieving data from minimized data sets

It is possible to minimize parameter data sets on a spreadsheet to take up the space of only one cell. For
minimizing data sets, see Chapter “Editing cell format” on page 163.
To retrieve data from a minimized table, you first have to know which column in the maximized data set
contains the data you want to retrieve. The first column in a separate data set is always considered to be
Column A, the second Column B, and so forth, no matter how the data set is situated on the spreadsheet.
Thus, if you are retrieving data from the first column of a minimized table, you are interested in the
contents of Column A. The name of the query (that is, the parameter data set that has been opened on
the spreadsheet) has to be known as well in order for you to be able to refer to the right data set.
The creation of a formula for data retrieval begins with the equal sign (=) to identify the string as a formula.
Next, add the operator of the mathematical function you want to use. For instance, with the function
Average, the operator is AVG. For more functions, see Chapter “Adding functions” on page 168.
Next, within brackets, define the data set on which the mathematical function is to be run. The data set
definition string is generally of the following format: open bracket, asterisk, query name, exclamation mark,
reference to the first cell in the range, colon, reference to the last cell in the range, and closed bracket.
Thus, a formula for calculating an average based on values on rows 1-15 in Column A of the BLER DL
data set would be of the following format: =AVG(*BLER DL!A1:A15). For more information on formulas,
see Chapter “Creating formulas” on page 168.

170
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Processing uplink voice quality data

1. When measuring with Nemo Outdoor, make sure its clock is synchronized with the voice quality
server clock. In Nemo Outdoor, select User Interface Measurements | Use time from GPS. In
Nemo Server, select NTP (Network time protocol) from the NSM menu. Internet connection is
needed in order for the server to use NTP time. If there is no internet connection available or NTP
time cannot be set through, that is, LAN, Nemo Outdoor clock and server clock must be
synchronized manually.
2. Before measurement, the number of each server’s phone line must be configured manually to the
voice quality server. By doing this, the numbers will also be set to the server end’s log file headers.
3. Load both Nemo Outdoor and server log files into Nemo Analyze. After this, you are able to use
Nemo Outdoor files normally. If you want to see UL MOS for a specific Nemo Outdoor log file,
select the file in question and UL MOS from the Parameters view. Nemo Analyze connects UL
MOS values from the correct server file to the Nemo Outdoor file in question by comparing time
and phone numbers.

171
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Indoor measurements
With Nemo Analyze you can also view indoor measurements on floor plans. Right-click on the
measurement in the Workspace and select Adjust Coordinates.

In the Adjust Coordinates dialog box, select the floor plan in the Map file field or click Import Image as
Map to convert an image file into a map (see page 26). Click OK.

Nemo Analyze opens the map file according to the information included in the header of the selected file.
If the map file does not include header information (older measurements), you need to manually define the
map file used. In the map file, first you need to place the coordinate markers in the right places. With the
Arrow tool, click on the map and the active marker (highlighted with pink in the table on the right) will be
placed there. The Longitude and Latitude values are updated as you place the markers on the map.

172
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

After you have placed all the markers, click Update Coordinates to save the marker coordinates.

Nemo Analyze will ask if you would like to open the route on a map. Click Yes, and the route is opened on
a map.
When you open the indoor measurement on the floor plan the next time, the route is automatically drawn
on the map. You can color the route and use all the features available for maps.

173
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

In-building measurements with IBWC maps

Note that support for in-building measurements is optional. Contact your sales
representative to update your license.

The in-building measurements option allows analyzing and post-processing in-building (that is, indoor)
measurements that have been performed on various floors of one or several buildings (that is, venues).
With the in-building measurement feature, Nemo Analyze automatically organizes measurements
performed on the same venue/building/floor under the same folder. The measurement tree in the
Workspace shows map file and venue/building/floor information in tooltip for in-building measurements.
The in-building measurements option enables duplicating a workbook page per device or floor so that
each device/floor contains the same data in the properties. Right-click on the workbook and select
Workbook | Properties. Then select In-building. After that, right-click on the page and select Page |
Properties and select Copy page for each device or Copy page for each in-building floor.

Note that old workbooks can be modified to be used with new in-building
measurements with the selections above.

BWC Files
In-building measurements with IBWC files can be created with Nemo Handy or with an external iBwave
tool. An IBWC file consists of a venue plan: each venue can contain several buildings and each building
can contain several floors. Each floor can contain floor maps and indoor base stations (transmitters).

Note that when IBWC maps are created, all maps must be geocoded using GPS
coordinates.

174
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

When in-building measurements are created with Nemo Handy or Nemo Outdoor/Nemo Invex, all
measurement files contain an nmf header tag displaying venue/building/floor information, describing
where the measurement was performed: #FLOORPLAN "name", "gps", "file", "venue", "building", "floor".

Note that IBWC files are not delivered with the Nemo Analyze product package,
therefore they must be uploaded separately to Nemo Analyze.

When an ibwc file is added to the Nemo Analyze database, the file appears in the Loaded iBwave files
section of the Map page in the Workspace. In addition, a new in-building folder is created to the folder list
in the measurement page on the workspace. The in-building folder has venue/building/floor structure.

In-building folders can be hidden from Options | Environment | Layout by clearing Show inbuilding
folders.
Measurements can be loaded before or after .ibwc files.
To import the custom settings file (.aex), see Chapter “Importing custom settings”.
A tooltip in the measurement tree in the Workspace shows map file and venue/building/floor
information for in-building measurements. You are also able to see from the measurement tooltip into
which building/floor the measurement belongs to.

8.14.1.1 Group by floorplan or venue/building/floor

To group statistics by floorplan or venue/building/floor, right-click on a parameter in the Parameters view
and select Statistics By from a pop-up menu and select Floorplan or Venue/building/floor.

Note that grouping by floorplan or venue/building floor also functions without an

IBWC file with indoor measurements if your license supports the in-building option.

8.14.1.2 Search folders with in-building measurements

The In-building tab in the Search Folder Properties dialog box allows you to add venue/building/floor-
based filters for in-building measurements.
In the in-building tab, select In-building and define Venue, Building, and Floor by clicking the Add button
after each selection. The added options are displayed on the Selected list.

175
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

8.14.1.3 In-building maps on live maps

When an IBWC file that has been added to the database is dragged and dropped onto a live map, new in-
building layers are created for each building.
Different floors can be selected from pop-up menu in the Layers section on the map panel. Each floor
shows corresponding floor map, possible transmitters and related measurements.

When an in-building measurement is opened on live map, it also opens related ibwc file on live map if not
yet opened. The measurement is only visible if correct floor is selected.

Repositioning map images

If map images on image layer or on in-building layers are not properly positioned on live map, map image
positions can be fine-tuned.

176
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Note that you can use the quick turn tool for turning the in-building map 90 degrees clockwise. If this is not
sufficient, use repositioning to adjust the map further.
Work flow:
1. Click map image and go to image layer or in-building layer in the map panel.
2. Select the Reposition tool from the layer popup.

3. Click two corner points for a new image position. The first click corresponds to the first marked
corner point, the second corresponds to the second marked corner point, and so forth.

4. Double-click on third corner point.

177
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

5. The last (fourth) corner point is counted automatically and the map image position is moved on the
map. Map image shows the order of the corners.
6. To cancel last reposition operation, select Undo.
8.14.1.4 Tab files
All normal properly geocoded MapX Maps files (.tab files) can be dragged onto a live map and new image
layers are created on top of the live map.

Please note that OpenStreetMap support is not accurate enough for most in-building
measurements, therefore Google Maps is highly recommended.

The tab file properties is also visible from image layer properties.

Numerical data views

Numerical data views are useful, for example, for viewing benchmarking data from multi-measurements:
you can open several measurement files side by side and compare the values.
You can open a numerical view, for example, by opening an empty workbook (View | Workbook) and
then adding a numerical view data view in the workbook: right-click on workbook, select Page | Add Data
View | Numerical Data.

Drag a measurement or measurements in the view, and Nemo Analyze will display some network
parameters for the file. If no data are shown on the table, the data are retrieved from the very beginning of
the measurement. Double-click on the measurement file in the Workspace to view the Timeline view, and
move the red time line forward to view captured data.

You can edit the contents of the numerical data view.

178
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Right-click on the view and select Properties.

The Visible parameters list offers a list of parameters that can be displayed in the numerical data view.
With Move up and Move Down you can change the order in which the different parameters appear in the
numerical data view.

179
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Title defines the column title.

Alignment defines how the text is aligned.

The Color Sets list enables you to select the appropriate color sets for the parameters from the drop-down
menu.

Info views
Info views are used to display more detailed information, for example, about signaling, BTS sites and layer
messages. To add info view on an empty workbook, right-click and select Page | Add data view | Info
view.

180
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Timeline view
The Timeline view enables you to view and analyze a selected time range of a measurement file. For
example, you can select to view data before and after certain events, for example call failures, to
troubleshoot what may have caused the particular event. Or you can select a time range and generate a
report for that range.
Right-click on a measurement in the workspace and select Timeline or double-click a measurement to
open the Timeline view. You can also open the Timeline view for multi measurements.

The Timeline view displays the start and finish time of the file. The red synchronization line marks the
current point in the measurement file. Current time is displayed below the synchronization line.

181
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Highlight Parameter in Timeline view

With Highlight Parameter you can visualize problem areas in the measurement. For example, you can
view certain events or parameters when their values are under/over certain user specified threshold.
Right-click on the Timeline view and select Highlight Parameter.

In the Pick Parameter dialog box, select the parameter you want to highlight and click OK. You can also
find a given parameter from the list by using the filter field within the red box.

182
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Double-click the Value field to define the event for the selected parameter and click Finish.

The parameter events will be highlighted.

183
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Notifications in Timeline view

You can also view notifications in the Timeline view. Right-click on the view and select Properties. In the
Notifications tab, select the notifications you want to view in the Timeline view, for example, attach
failures, and BLER, and click OK.

The small red vertical bars represent the selected notifications. The example shows for example
answered calls.

Range selection in Timeline view

Now you can take a closer look at the problem spot by selecting a sample, a range, of the file around the
attach failures. Select the starting point of the range by double-clicking with the left mouse button and the
ending point with a left click.

To generate a report based on the selected time range, right-click on the range and select Range |
Report | Open from the popup menu. In the Open dialog box, select a report template (*.rpt) and click
Open.

184
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

To generate a workbook based on the selected time range, right-click on the range and select Range |
Workbook | [workbook folder] | [workbook].

Depending on your selection, a report or a workbook is generated from the data in the selected range.

185
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Other views

Network Parameters
The Parameters view displays some key network parameters. Right-click on a file in the workspace and
select Network Parameters.

If the Parameters view is empty, right-click on the measurement in the Workspace to view the Timeline
view. Move the red time line forward to a point in time where data have been gathered during the
measurement.

Right-click on the view and select Pick Parameter… to add more parameters. To remove parameters
from the view, right-click on the view and select Properties. In the parameters page, clear the parameters
you want to remove and click OK.

186
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Measurement Settings
The Measurement Settings view displays some information about the settings that were used when the
file was recorded. Right-click on a file in the workspace and select Measurement Settings.

Properties
The Properties view displays information about items that are selected in the main window. The view is by
default docked to the right side of the main window. Move your mouse over the Properties tab for the

187
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

window to appear. If the Properties tab is not visible, open the Properties view by selecting View |
Properties. You can also drag the view elsewhere on the Analyze main window. If you want to dock it
back to the side of the main window, double-click on the Properties view.

Query Clipboard
Query Clipboard displays a list of queries that have been copied, and which can further be pasted into
views. The view is by default docked to the right side of the main window. Move your mouse over the
Query Clipboard tab for the hidden window to appear. If the Query Clipboard tab is not visible, enable the
Query Clipboard by selecting View | Query clipboard. You can empty the clipboard by clicking Clear.
You can also drag the view elsewhere on the Nemo Analyze main window. If you want to dock it back to
the side of the main window, double-click on the Query Clipboard.

Parameters can be copied to Query Clipboard by right-clicking on a parameter in a workbook and

selecting Query | Copy. To paste query into an empty workbook right-click on a view and select Query |
Paste. The Paste Query dialog box displays the contents of the Query Clipboard. Select the query to be
pasted and click OK.

188
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Activity
Activity (View | Activity) displays the progress of file upload, file conversion, and file upload queue. Nemo
Analyze imports various data sources including Nemo (.nmf), TEMS (.trp) and .csw, as well as
compressed files.

With Cancel and Cancel All, you can abort the upload of either the currently uploaded measurement file
or the upload of all measurement files in the upload queue.
To move a measurement file to the top of the list of uploaded measurements, right-click on the file and
select Move To Top.

Log window
The Log window displays some program and error messages and the SQL statements that are being
processed. The view is by default docked to the bottom of the main window. Move your mouse over the

189
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Log tab for the hidden window to appear. If the Log window is not visible, open it by selecting View | Log
window.

To show output from Log and SQL, click , and make selections in the Logging dialog box.

You can also drag the Log window from the bottom of the Nemo Analyze main window elsewhere on the
screen. If you want to dock the Log view back to the bottom, double-click on the view.

To show Timestamps in the Log window output, select Show Timestamps. You can clear the Log window
by right-clicking on it, and selecting Clear. You can also save the contents of the Log window in a log file
by selecting Write to File and typing a name for the file. The log is saved in a text file (.txt).

190
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

9 Workbooks
Viewing measurement data in Nemo Analyze is extremely flexible and user-configurable. The various
views are organized into workbooks, pages, and data views.
A workbook is the main component that contains all the different pages and data views. There is a
selection of ready-made workbooks but you can also create new workbooks.
To open an empty workbook, select View | Workbook.
A list of all workbooks can be found by right-clicking on a measurement and selecting Analyses.

It is also possible to open a workbook with a predefined layout, for example a 2x2 view arranged in a grid
by selecting View | Workbook Layout.

To open a ready-made workbook on a measurement file/folder, right-click the measurement file/folder and
select System | [workbook folder] | [workbook] (for example UMTS | UMTS full details) from the
popup menu.

191
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

To cancel a running query during workbook execution, click Cancel in the Executing Queries dialog box.
To cancel the execution of all queries within the workbook, select Cancel All.

Adding data views

In order to view measurement data in the workbook you will need to create a data view. Right-click on the
workbook and select Page | Add Data View | [data view type]. An empty data view will be opened in the
workbook.

192
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Now you can add data in the data view. You have two options. You can either drag a measurement file in
the data view, or right-click on the view and select Pick Parameter. In the latter case, first choose the
graph type.

In the Pick Parameter dialog box, select the measurement file in the Measurement field and pick the
parameter to be viewed. In the Filter field you can type the name of the parameter you want to add in the
data view to locate all the options, in this case all instances of BLER, more quickly from the list.

193
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The selected view is opened.

You can create several pages and each page can contain several data views. To add more data views on
the same page, right-click on the view and select Page | Add Data View | [data view type]. If you select
Data View | Insert | [data view type], the existing data view is replaced with the new one.

194
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Right-click on the empty grid view, select Pick Parameter, select the parameter to be displayed and click
OK. Now you have a workbook with one page that contains two data views. To add more pages to your
workbook, see the next chapter.

195
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Adding pages
You can have several pages in a workbook each containing one or more data views. Right-click on a view
and select Page | Add Page.

An empty page is added to the workbook and you can now open data views on the page. You can switch
between the pages from the tabs at the bottom of the workbook.
You are also able to add a page containing several data views by right-clicking on a view and selecting
Page | Add Page Layout | [page layout type]

196
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

An empty page is added to the workbook and you can now open data views on the page for example by
dragging and dropping a parameter. You can switch between the pages from the tabs at the bottom of the
workbook.

Saving a workbook
After you have opened all the relevant views, right-click on a view and select Workbook | Save to save
the workbook for later use.
The Save Workbook dialog box opens.

Folder defines the folder under which the workbook is saved. You are able to create subfolders under this
folder, and you can browse different folders by clicking on the button with the three dots next to the the
Folder text field. This folder structure is also displayed on the Nemo Analyze user interface in the
Workspace window as the menu structure.
Filename defines the name of the report template.
Shared (with server connection) enables you to save the workbook on a network drive (defined in View |
Options | Environment | Default Paths | Shared path) so that other users connected to the network
drive are able to view and access the workbook.
After defining the filename and the destination folder, click OK.

Exporting workbooks
An open workbook can be exported as a PDF or as a set of image files (image per page).

197
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Exporting workbooks as PDF/MS Word/MS PowerPoint files

To export an open workbook as a PDF, Microsoft Word or Microsoft PowerPoint file, select File |
Workbook to File.

The Save As dialog box opens.

To save the report as a PDF/MS Word/MS PowerPoint file, type in a file name in the File name field and
click Save.

Exporting workbooks as image files

To export an open workbook as image files, select File | Page Image to clipboard, and select export type
from the drop-down menu.

Page image to clipboard saves the workbook page currently open on the clipboard.
Page image to file saves the workbook page currently open as an image file.
Workbook images to file saves all workbook pages as separate image files.
Export ratio allows defining the export ratio (%), or selecting fixed size 640*480.

198
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Copying a workbook
After you have opened all the relevant views, right-click on a view and select Workbook | Create Copy

for Measurement or click the Create copy of workbook button in the toolbar’s Layout tab to make a
copy of the workbook for another measurement file.

Select the measurement for which you want to open the workbook and click OK. The workbook is opened
with the new data.

199
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Workbook Properties
You can rename a workbook by right-clicking on the workbook and selecting Workbook | Properties. In
the Workbook Properties dialog box, type a new title for the workbook and click OK.

Note that old workbooks can be modified to be used with new inbuilding
measurements with the selections above.

200
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Page Properties
In the Page Properties dialog box you can change the settings of each page. Right-click on a page and
select Page | Properties.
On the Page page you can define a title for the page. The name is displayed at the bottom of a workbook.
Here you can also define the page size.

If Fit to window is selected, all the layers are displayed in the visible area of the page. This means that
when a new layer is added, the space for each layer gets smaller.
With Fixed size you can define an exact size in pixels for the page. This will give more space for each
layer. With the scroll bar you can scroll up and down the page to view all layers.
If your Nemo Analyze license includes the in-building option the following functions are available:
Copy page for each device enables duplicating a workbook page per device so that each device contains
the same data.
When a workbook is run for a folder containing inbuilding measurements, all pages with Copy page for
each inbuilding floor are copied for each floor containing measurements.

201
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Example workbook
The example workbook, GSM, contains four pages, each of them displaying different GSM-related KPIs.
The first page displays three different RF Parameters in line graphs stacked on top of each other in
separate graphs. The Numerical data table on the right displays information in numerical form.

202
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Page two contains Serving and Neighbor cell data in line and bar graphs.

Page three contains L3 signaling data in a grid, and the decoded data in an info view.

203
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The fourth page contains a map with the measurement route. The route is colored with the RX level color
set.

Sharing workbooks
Nemo Analyze Client users are able to share workbooks and reports through network drive. Network
share (any folder in the system) is a source for reports and workbooks in addition to the current locations.

204
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

10 Reports
To maintain report layout, the screen resolution can be max 1920 x 1080, and
scale and layout 100%. Note that you might have to sign out of Microsoft
Windows for the changes in settings to take place.

With Nemo Analyze, you can select the optimal approach for each statistical reporting task. A set of
predefined compatible report templates for optimization and benchmarking purposes are available. Report
templates are available in the following formats: Crystal reports (.rpt), and two proprietary MS Excel based
formats: .srt (Spreadsheet Report Template) and .axt (Analyze Excel Template). The Crystal reports and
.axt templates are legacy formats that are not updated anymore. Hence, the Spreadsheet Report
Template (.srt) format is the recommended way for reporting, both default templates as well as the user-
defined templates. In addition, the Workbook templates of Nemo Analyze UI can be used for reporting.
However, the Workbook templates has limited exporting options: the workbook can be only exported in
PDF format.

Spreadsheet report templates (.srt)

Nemo Analyze spreadsheets offer a spreadsheet functionality that follows the current de facto standard in
spreadsheet applications, fully integrated with Nemo Analyze's drive test data-specific post-processing
features. You can drag and drop parameter aggregates and statistics on a single spreadsheet based on
multiple measurement files and KPIs, and calculate for example success rates by employing the standard
range of arithmetic operations and other capabilities of the spreadsheet approach. The resulting
spreadsheet can be saved as a report template and subsequently run as a workbook on any
measurement data.

Workbooks
The fully customizable and automatable Nemo Analyze workbooks provide you with a completely new
angle on statistical reporting. Each workbook can contain several pages and data views. All open
workbooks and all data views within the workbooks are automatically synchronized in time. The
comprehensive selection of data views includes spreadsheets, maps, grids, line graphs, bar graphs, pie
charts, layer 3 messages, surface grids, and color grids. Nemo Analyze features a full set of ready-made
workbooks with pages and views for all the relevant KPIs. Nemo Analyze workbooks can be scheduled to
be run automatically on predefined measurement file folders. Nemo Analyze paired with an automatic
measurement solution such as Nemo Cloud can indeed equal to automatic up-to-date measurement
reports popping up on your desktop as and when measurement sessions are completed. All custom
settings, such as workbooks, queries, layouts, color sets, KPIs, and so forth, can be imported and
exported to enable sharing between colleagues.
For performing reporting using Nemo Analyze workbooks, see Chapter “Workbooks”.

205
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Generating reports
To generate reports, right-click on the measurement file from which the report will be generated and select
Report. Select one of the existing report templates, for example LTE optimization report.srt. If a saved
report has not been loaded into the database yet, select Open and select the report from the list.

The report is generated and opened in a new workbook.

Note that this may take a few minutes, depending on the processing power of the
computer and on the complexity of the report.

206
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

You are able to save the report as Excel workbook form or as PDF by clicking on the toolbar Save as
Excel Workbook or Save as PDF.
You can also generate reports from multi-measurements or from folders containing several files. Right-
click on the multi-measurement file name, or on the folder, and select Report and the report template.

In the Scope Filter dialog box you can define what kind of data will be included in the report. After making
all the selections, click OK and the report is generated.

207
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

System and Band define from which

cellular systems and frequency data
will be included in the report.

Begin time and End time define the

time period from which data is
included in the report. By selecting
Area, and clicking the Define Area..
tab, you can enter the Select Area
dialog box below.

208
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Select Area defines the geographical

area from which data is included in
the report.

With Area | Name you can select a polygon area you have previously saved.
By clicking Area you are able to select a polygon on the map. After selection, the Add polygon dialog box
opens, in which you can give the polygon a name.
You can zoom in and zoom out to change the map view.
By clicking Pan you can move the map by dragging it.
By clicking Reset you can erase the area selection made.

Creating custom reports with Spreadsheet Report Designer

With Spreadsheet Report Designer, you are able to create custom report templates containing statistics,
charts, and map plots of drive test data in MS Excel (.xlsx) format. Any metric from the Parameters view,
including custom KPIs created with KPI Workbench can be used to produce source data for the report
template. It is also possible to show Workbook pages of Nemo Analyze as images on the report template.
This is particularly useful for populating map plots in the Excel report.
The data should be processed as much as possible beforehand in Nemo Analyze so that the Excel report
shows the preprocessed statistics/metrics rather than raw values. For example, it is better to export
average Ec/N0 to the report rather than raw Ec/N0 samples and then calculate the average using Excel
formula. This is because the performance of MS Excel is not optimal when processing thousands of rows
of data. It is also possible to create an empty report template with all the necessary formatting and charts
directly in MS Excel, open the resulting .xlsx document in the Spreadsheet Report Designer and use it as
baseline for the report.

Creating and opening a report template

To create a report template, select Tools | Spreadsheet in Nemo Analyze to open the Spreadsheet
Report Designer and a new report template.
You are also able to create a report template layout beforehand using MS Excel. To do this, open a blank
workbook in MS Excel by selecting File | New | Blank workbook. Add the necessary worksheets and
charts and format their appearance. Once you have finished defining your MS Excel workbook, save it by
selecting File | Save As.
If you have already created a report template with Spreadsheet Report Designer or MS Excel and want to
use or edit it, select Open from the Spreadsheet Report Designer toolbar. A dialog box showing all
existing templates in C:\Nemo Tools\Nemo Analyze\Reports folder appears. Select a spreadsheet report
template (.srt file) from the list of files and click Open.

209
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Once you have created or opened a report template in Spreadsheet Report Designer, you need to define
which data will be exported when the report is run and the export location within the MS Excel report
template.
To add a parameter to the template, select a cell on the report template and drag and drop the parameter
into the report template. However, to improve the responsiveness of MS Excel, it is recommended not to
use MS Excel in calculating raw values that contain tens of thousands of rows. For example, you should
not export to MS Excel any isolated Ec/N0 values and calculate average values with MS Excel’s formula.
Success rates and such, instead, are well-suited to be calculated using MS Excel. For example, you can
export from Nemo Analyze “Number of call attempts” and “Number of call attempt failures”. MS Excel will
then calculate and show call setup failure rate, that is, “number of call attempt failures”/”number of call
attempts”.
You are also able to add a parameter to the template by left-clicking on a parameter in the Parameters
view to open a dialog box in which you are able to define in which format the parameter is shown on the
report. It is possible to show the raw values (do not calculate statistics) or to show average or other pre-
calculated statistical figures in the report. After having defined the settings, click Add Parameter to [the
selected cell].

210
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

To insert elements into a worksheet, select a cell on the report template and click Insert in the
Spreadsheet Report Designer toolbar.

Workbook Image: adds an image of a Workbook page to the worksheet.

211
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The workbook image placeholder appears on the worksheet. You can define whether to use workbook
default dimensions, or user-definable workbook placeholder dimensions.
If you select Use workbook placeholder dimensions, define width and height and click Set to
confirm.
Under MapX settings you can select whether to keep aspect ratio or fit to placeholder dimension
when adding a MapX image to a workbook.
Selecting Keep aspect ratio maintains the form/dimensions of the MapX image when it is added
to the workbook, and the image is placed to the left upper corner of the placeholder.
Selecting Fit to placeholder dimension inserts the MapX image in its natural size, stretching the
image to match the dimensions of the placeholder and therefore distorting the image aspect
ratio.
Statistics Table: inserts a statistics table to the worksheet.
Manual SQL Query: allows you to type a query directly into the worksheet.

Rows: inserts new rows to the worksheet. When adding a parameter to the statistics table the statistics
table must grow downwards. In Nemo Analyze version 7.00 and earlier, the statistics table automatically
inserted a row to make room for the table. But this could cause changes to any formatting on left or right

212
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

side of the statistics table. Starting from version 7.10 the statistics table does not insert a row when a
parameter is added. Instead it replaces data on a row below the statistics table. To make room for more
parameters you can insert rows/cells manually.
Columns: inserts new columns to the worksheet.
Worksheet: inserts a new worksheet to the workbook.
Chart: inserts a chart to the worksheet. First select the data range, then select Insert | Chart and double-
click to open SpreadsheetGear Chart Explorer.
Picture: inserts a bitmap picture to the worksheet.
Text Box: inserts a text box to the worksheet.
Auto Shape: inserts a shape such as box or ellipse to the worksheet.
Line: inserts a line to the worksheet.

Saving a report template

Select Tools | Spreadsheet Designer | Tools Protection settings to open the Protection Settings
dialog. Select Never allow editing of the report to lock the report template, i.e. make an official version of
the report that cannot be changed. Save your work versions of the template separately.

Column group
When setting two or more statistics tables to the same column group, the tables will always have exactly
the same columns and column order. This happens regardless of the data in the statistics table – if there
is no data for one of the columns, zero is displayed in the column. This feature can be useful to ensure
that multiple statistics tables are aligned correctly in the report. By default, any newly added statistics
tables do not belong to a group (Column group is empty).

213
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Screenshots below show two statistics tables, the one at B2 is grouped by operator and the one at B5 is
grouped by device extension. Image A shows the tables in different column groups, which makes them
work independently. Image B shows the tables in the same group, which makes both tables contain the
same columns.
A: Two statistics tables in different column groups

B: Two statistics tables in the same column group

Insert columns
When the Insert Columns setting is off, any new columns added to the statistics table replace existing
cells on the right side of the statistics table. When this setting is on, empty cells are inserted when new
columns are added to the statistics table.

Note: enabling this can cause unwanted side-effects, such as other cells and frames
in the report being moved unpredictably.

The screenshot below shows two statistics tables, and column F which is highlighted with blue color.

In the screenshot below the statistics table at B2 has Insert columns set to No, which puts the results into
C3 and D3 without inserting any columns. The table at statistics B5 has Insert columns set to Yes, which
inserts a cell when more space is needed for the results. But in this case you can see that inserting
columns has broken the formatting for F column in the screenshot above.
Default (and recommended) value for this setting is the results.

214
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Cumulation and density for specific parameters

It is possible to add Cumulation and density statistics for parameters Serving system and band and
Packet Tehcnology to a statistics table. This produces a statistic matrix that can have groups on rows and
columns.
Note that when running a report with this type of statistics table, rows are automatically inserted to make
room to expand the statistics table. This may cause unwanted side-effects to formatting on left and right
sides of the statistics table.

Modifying a spreadsheet report template

It is possible to format the report template, for example to add headers and titles and insert relevant
workbooks. Modifications can be performed in MS Excel or in Spreadsheet Report Designer. To make
changes to the report template in MS Excel, select File | Edit in Microsoft Excel….

215
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Report configuration dialog box opens. Select Edit in Excel. You can also select relevant measurements.
After making the changes, close MS Excel and continue using the Report Designer.
Define the settings of the elements you have added to the worksheet by clicking the View tab on the
toolbar.

Workbook Explorer defines settings related to workbooks.

Range explorer defines settings related to cells.
Chart explorer defines settings charts.
Shape explorer defines settings related to shapes.
Report Configuration Editor allows you to define the values of the input variables of certain metrics and
KPIs in the Nemo Analyze Parameters view at the time of query execution. For example, “Ec/N0 CPICH
Nth best selected carriers”, where N and the channel range are defined by the user at the time of query
execution. Such metrics can be used in the report template, and the values of the input variables are
controlled with Report Configuration Editor.
Report configuration editor can be used to create easily customizable attributes in a report, without having
to open the report in Spreadsheet report designer for editing. The typical attributes to be customized are
channel number filters in scanner queries, N in Ec/N0 Nth best query and similar. Any query that has been
configured to use filter, or has parameters prompted from the user, can take the input attributes via the
Report configuration editor.
Select Add group to add a parameter group. Parameter groups are used to organize how the input
parameter appears in the dialog box that is used to modify them. Using more than one group is not
mandatory. However, if there are a lot of parameters, groups help organizing them.
Select Add parameter to define a new attribute. Identifier is the attribute name used in the report
template. Name is the friendly name of the attribute shown in the configuration dialog box when modifying
the attributes. Default value is the default value for the attribute.

216
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The attributes defined in Report configuration editor can be used anywhere in the report as an argument
or filter values. The syntax is {?<identifier>?}. For example, if the identifier of the attribute is nth, the string
typed in the argument field is {?nth?}.
The values of the attributes can be changed from reports tab of the workspace right-clicking and selecting
Configure.

Report Configuration Editor’s Script tab contains a text editor. Here you can write scripts that customize
the report behavior. The report script is written in Python programming language and it allows customizing
the report.
Below you can see two examples of what can be done:
Exporting workbook pages to image files
The script can export workbook pages to a set of image files (one file per page) to disk, while running the
report. This is a rather specialized feature that is not usually needed but can be useful for some situations.
Here is an example script for doing this:

217
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Opening the report automatically in Excel

The script can be used to automatically save and open the report in Excel after it has been generated.
The script for doing this is pictured below:

Zoom in / Zoom Out / Zoom level allow you to adjust settings related to zooming.
To perform test runs for the reports, select Run Report from the toolbar and select for which
measurement you want to run the report and click Run Report.
Once all the workbooks and layouts are ready, you can save the template as a .srt file by clicking File |
Save as. When the report in finished, you are able to run it the same manner as normal Crystal Reports.
The Format tab on the toolbar allows you to change formatting options of cells, rows and columns.

The spreadsheet opens in Analyze Spreadsheet Report Viewer:

218
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

You are able to save the report as Excel workbook form or as PDF by clicking on the toolbar Save as
Excel Workbook or Save as PDF.
The Report Scope dialog box appears, allowing you to filter the report to show results from selected
system, band, and area. This step is not, however, mandatory.

Finally, click OK to generate the Excel report. The report opens in Analyze Spreadsheet Report Viewer.
To save the document as Excel workbook or as PDF, click Save as Excel Workbook or Save as PDF on
the toolbar.

Handling of deleted or renamed worksheets

When the Report Designer detects that a report item (query, workbook or statistics table) is located on a
sheet that has been deleted or renamed, it shows a window that allows you to correct the situation.
In the example below, the Data worksheet has been renamed, and the Voice worksheet has been deleted.
With Update Worksheet References, the report items are updated so they will remain on correct pages.
Also if worksheet is marked as deleted, there is a window that warns about report items that are about to
be deleted. With Undo Excel Changes any changes made in Excel are cancelled.

219
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Using VBA macros in Analyze Spreadsheet reports

Nemo Analyze spreadsheet reports are compatible with Excel; the report template files (.srt) can be
opened with MS Excel. However, the Spreadsheet Report Designer does not support all the functionalities
of MS Excel. The most commonly faced limitations include 3D charts, pivot tables, forms (for example
buttons in the Excel document to run macros or do other actions), and the VBA macros. Spreadsheet
Report Designer has the feature to edit the report template in Excel (File | Edit in Microsoft Excel…). If
non-supported features are added in the Edit in Excel mode, these additions are lost when reverting back
to the Spreadsheet Report Designer, except for the VBA macros. The VBA macros cannot be run in
Spreadsheet Report Designer, but macros created and saved for the workbook in MS Excel edit mode are
carried over to the spreadsheet report template (.srt), and they can be executed after running the report
template and saving it as Excel file.
The limitations of supported Excel features in Spreadsheet Report Designer can be overcome by
recording a macro that adds all the non-supported Excel features to the template when the report is the
executed report is opened in Excel.

Step-by-step workflow:
1. Create a spreadsheet report template (.srt) with all the needed input data from Nemo Analyze
parameter tree.
2. Select File | Edit in Microsoft Excel… in Spreadsheet Report Designer.
3. A temporary .xlsm excel workbook is opened based on the .srt template.
4. In the .xlsm template, select View | Macros | Record Macro.

5. Add the functions you wish to have in your final report to the .xlsm, for example a pivot table, and
select View | Macros | Stop recording.
6. Clean up everything you did during the macro recording from the .xlsm document.
7. Press Alt+F11 to access the VBA editor in Excel. In the project browser, go to .xlsm document
name | Modules | Module 1, where you will see the VBA code of the created macro. Copy all of
the code between Sub and End sub rows.

220
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

8. Go to .xlsm document name | Microsoft Excel Objects | ThisWorkbook from the top drop down
menus, select Workbook and Open. The function body for Workbook_Open() function is added.
Paste the code of your custom macro into the body of the function. The Workbook_Open() function
is automatically run every time the workbook is opened in Excel.

9. Save the changes in VBA editor and close it, save the temporary .xlsm file and close it, and switch
back to Spreadsheet Report Designer window and save the changes. The macro you created is
now embedded in your .srt report template.
10. Close the Spreadsheet Report Designer and run the report.
11. When the report is executed, it is opened in the Report Viewer window. From there, select Save as
Excel Workbook. When the Save as dialog box opens, change the file type to Excel macro-
enabled workbook.

221
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

222
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Showing PDF/CDF charts in reports

These use cases explain two ways of showing PDF/CDF charts in reports.
10.4.9.1 Use case 1: Exporting a workbook from Nemo Analyze
1. In Nemo Analyze workspace, right-click on a parameter from the Parameters view, select
Statistics By from a pop-up menu, and select how you wish to filter the statistics.

223
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

2. The workbook displaying the PDF/CDF chart opens:

3. You can modify the chart properties (axes scales and 3D mode) and color (chart and margin,
gradience) by right-clicking on the chart and selecting Properties | Statistics and Properties |
Color.

4. Modify the workbook if needed. For more information, see chapter “Workbooks”.

224
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

5. Save the workbook by right-clicking on it and selecting Workbook | Save from the pop-up menu.

6. In the Save Workbook dialog box, and define the name of the report template.. Click OK.

225
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

7. Open Spreadsheet Report Designer. Select Insert | Workbook image and select the workbook
from the pop-up menu list.

8. Save the report template and run the report.

10.4.9.2 Use case 2: Creating a Spreadsheet Report Designer report with device-specific images copied
from a workbook
1. Create a new workbook and click OK.

226
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

2. For each page of the workbook you wish to copy results from each device or floor, select Copy
page for each device, Copy page for each inbuilding floor, or Copy device to same page
from [right-click] | Page | Properties and click OK.

3. Save the workbook. You can test the workbook by running it over a set of measurements.

Note that although the Copy page for each device option is primarily intended for
inbuilding measurements, it can be used also for drive measurements.

4. Go to Tools | Spreadsheet | Spreadsheet Report Designer and create a new report.

5. Click Insert Workbook and insert the workbook page(s) – preferably each page on a separate
sheet.
6. Save the report.
Leave empty space below each image that has the Copy page for each device or
Copy page for each inbuilding floor option selected in the workbook.

227
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

7. Run the saved report over a set of measurements. Select a measurement, right-click on it and
select Reports | [your report]. Images that are suitable for copying are copied per device or per
floor as a series of images as in the example below.

228
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

10.4.9.3 Use case 3: Creating a chart in Spreadsheet Report Designer

1. Open a report template in Spreadsheet Report Designer.
2. Select a cell or a range and left-click on a parameter in the Parameters view. Doing this opens a
dialog box in which you are able to define in which format the parameter is shown on the report.
After defining the settings, click Add Parameter to [the selected cell].

The ResultSet shows the following statistics:

Lowerbound and Upperbound define the upper and lower boundaries of each cumulation/density
bucket.
Cumulation shows the cumulation as a percentage.
Cumulation sample show the absolute cumulation in samples.
Density shows the density as a percentage.
Density sample shows the absolute density in samples.
Group shows the value if you have benchmarked the measurement by a group.
3. Select File | Edit in Microsoft Excel… in Spreadsheet Report Designer. Then, select Edit in
Excel in the Report Configuration dialog.
4. In MS Excel, select the results by defining a range, go to Insert in the ribbon bar, and select how
you wish the results to be displayed (as a column, line, pie chart, or other). For further instructions
on how to use MS Excel, please refer to documentation provided by Microsoft.

229
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

5. After making the changes, save the MS Excel file and close MS Excel. You can now continue
using the Spreadsheet Report Designer.

Showing map plots in report templates

This use case explains showing map plots as workbook images in reports.
1. First, a workbook with map plots must be created in Nemo Analyze. For more information, see
Chapter “Workbooks”. Alternatively, predefined workbooks, such as UMTS map summary, can be
used.
You are able to modify the Workbook in Nemo Analyze. It is, for example, possible to change
default map (displayed in bold) by right-clicking on the map file in Workspace view and selecting
Default Map from the popup menu. You can also set the side panel visible/invisible by right-
clicking on the map and selecting/clearing Side Panel from the popup menu. For more information,
see Chapter “Workspace”.

Please note that you cannot modify a Workbook image once it has been inserted to the worksheet.
Modify the original workbook instead and then insert it as a Workbook image to the worksheet. See
Chapter “Workbooks” for more information on how you can further to modify workbooks.
2. Open a report template in Spreadsheet Report Designer. Click Insert | Workbook image to select
from the popup menu a workbook containing map plots and define on which page of the workbook

230
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

the map plot to be inserted is located.

3. Save and run the report. The workbook image is displayed on the Report Viewer.

4. In Analyze Spreadsheet Report Viewer, you are able to save the report as Excel workbook form or
as PDF by clicking Save as Excel Workbook or Save as PDF on the toolbar.

Reporting with Microsoft Excel

With Nemo Analyze’s Microsoft Excel export templates, you can export query result data sets from Nemo
Analyze to a selected location within an existing MS Excel document. The exported parameters and the
export locations within the MS Excel workbook are saved as a report template. The template can be
subsequently run on any measurement data. The feature allows you to use the full data formatting
functionality of MS Excel in reporting and make use of any existing, custom-made MS Excel
spreadsheets.
In the following example, Sheet1 of the existing target MS Excel sheet displays the final report output
which is generated based on input data sets on Sheet2. In other words, as Sheet2 acts as a basis for the

231
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

final output on Sheet1, the data sets should in this case be exported to the appropriate columns on
Sheet2.

Note: Before doing anything else, it is recommended to open the data set intended
for export in grid data view to check the data set’s number of columns and column
order. The data set will be exported from Nemo Analyze in fixed table format and
thus it may be necessary to make changes to the column order of the target MS
Excel sheet before the export operation.

The target MS Excel workbook must be saved to Nemo Analyze’s default Reports directory. To find out
what the default folder for reports is, select View | Options from the ribbon bar, and Environment |
Default Paths | Reports in the Options dialog box.
To create an MS Excel export template, select Tools | Spreadsheet Old Excel Export Template.

232
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The Excel Export Template dialog box opens.

Excel workbook defines an existing MS Excel workbook as the target spreadsheet for the export.
Excel template defines a name for the new MS Excel export template.
Run macro on finish, when selected, runs the chosen macro in Excel once the export has been
performed.
Exported queries displays all queries selected for export.
Add opens the Excel Template Row dialog box, enabling you to define a new query. It is also possible to
drag parameters from the Parameters view to the excel report creation template dialog.
Modify allows you to modify an existing query. Select the query in the Exported queries field and click
Modify.
Delete allows you to delete an existing query. Select the query in the Exported queries field and click
Delete.
Preview displays the columns of the query data set selected in the Exported queries field.
Exported images displays all data view images selected for export.
Add opens the Excel Export Template dialog box, enabling you to define a new image.
Modify allows you to modify an existing image. Select the image in the Exported images field and click
Modify.
Delete allows you to delete an existing image. Select the query in the Exported images field and click
Delete.

233
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

To browse for an existing Excel workbook (to be used as the target spreadsheet for the export), click the
… button.

The Open dialog box opens.

Select the Excel workbook you want to use as the target spreadsheet for the export and click Open.
The path of the target spreadsheet is displayed in the Excel workbook field. To rename the export
template, type a new name to the Excel template field.
To define a new query for export, click Add.

234
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The Excel Template Row dialog box opens.

Sheet name defines the target sheet in the target MS Excel workbook for the exported parameter data set.
Cell defines the target cell in the target MS Excel workbook for the exported parameter data set. In the
present example, A2 is selected (instead of for example A1) because the first row of Sheet2 is reserved
for column names.

Note: As the parameter data set is likely to contain more than one column, the target
cell defined here will act as the upper left corner of the exported parameter data set.
Thus, if the exported parameter data set contains three columns, and the target cell
is defined as C2, the first-row cells of the second and the third columns will be D2
and E2 respectively. The Preview field in the Excel Export Template dialog box
displays the columns included in the selected parameter data set.

Note: To make the exported data sets as versatile as possible in terms of the existing
operations in the target MS Excel workbooks, all irrelevant data, including the Nemo
Analyze column names, are removed from the exported data sets.

Parameter defines the exported parameter data set. Click the … button to browse for a parameter.
With Modify you are able to modify the parameter data set that has been selected in the Parameter box.
Select … and the Analyze Wizard – Start dialog box opens.

Pick measurement parameter opens the Parameters view. The Parameters view enables the use of both
ready-made parameters and previously saved custom KPIs (that is, parameters created using the KPI
workbench or SQL). By default, custom KPIs can be found in the Parameters view under the User item.
For Generic query wizard, see page 287.
For Manual query, see page 291.
For Correlate parameters, see page 293.

235
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Selecting Pick measurement parameters in the Analyze Wizard – Start dialog box opens the Analyze
Wizard – Measurement Parameters dialog box.

Select a parameter and click Finish. Previously saved custom KPIs can be found in the Parameters view
under the User item.
The Excel Template Row dialog box opens.

Define Sheet name, Cell, Parameter, and Statistics. With Modify you are able to modify the parameter that
has been selected in the Parameter box.
The defined query is now displayed as a row in the Exported queries field. The Preview field displays the
columns the selected query contains and the column numbers they will take up in the target spreadsheet.
If you want to add another query, click Add… in the Excel Export Template and repeat the procedure
above.
To edit an existing query, select the query in the Exported queries field and click Modify.
To delete an existing query, select the query in the Exported queries field and click Delete.
It is also possible to drag parameters from the Parameters view to the Excel report creation template
dialog.
In the Exported images section, it is possible to define images to be exported into the Excel repot. Images
can be exported from a file or from a Nemo Analyze workbook.
To define a new data view image for export, click Add… in the Exported Images section.

236
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The Export Image dialog box opens.

File defines the name of an image file that will be exported to Excel.
Workbook defines the workbook that will be exported to Excel as an image.
Page, Image position, Image size, and Relative size define to which page of the workbook the image is to
be exported, the desired position and the size of the image, and the size of the image in percentage.
Sheet name defines the name of the Excel sheet that the image is exported to.
Once Page name, Cell, and Parameter have all been defined, select OK.
If you want to add another data view image, click Add in the Excel Export Template and repeat the
procedure above.
To edit an existing image, select the image in the Exported images field and click Modify.
To delete an existing query, select the image in the Exported images field and click Delete.
Once all the intended queries and images have been added to the template, click OK.
The Excel export template is saved to the default Report directory. To find out what the defined folder is,
go to View | Options | Environment | Default Paths | Reports.
To load the Excel export template to the report template database, first click the icon on the bottom
of the workspace panel.
The Reports page of the Workspace opens.

Next, double-click on the Excel export template in the Report Folder field.
The Excel export template is added to the database and is now displayed in the Loaded field.

237
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

To run the Excel export template on a measurement file/folder, right-click on the measurement file/ folder
and select Report | [Excel export template].axt from the popup menu.

The parameter data sets defined in the export template are exported to the defined page (Sheet2 in the
present example) of the MS Excel workbook.

238
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Microsoft Excel generates the final output page (Sheet1) based on the input page (Sheet2).

Reporting with Crystal Reports

In Nemo Analyze you can run statistics in the form of reports over a single or multiple measurement files.
The reports include essential network and application performance KPIs as defined by standards
specifications, such as, ETSI and ANSI. In addition, smaller-scale statistics can be run over a single
parameter in the User Interface.
Reporting in Nemo Analyze is based on Crystal Reports. The Crystal Report Viewer tool is embedded in
Nemo Analyze. Reports can be exported to for example PDF or Excel, as in standard Crystal Reports.
Default report templates with all the most essential KPIs are provided in Nemo Analyze, but you can also
create your own report templates. For this you will need the Crystal Reports Professional edition
(independent third-party software).

239
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Exporting reports
After you have generated a report you can export it to another format. Click the Export Report button in
the report workbook.

In the Export dialog box, select the output format and the destination for the exported file. Click OK.

In the Export Options dialog box, you can select the report pages that will be exported. The dialog box
also allows creating bookmarks from the group tree. When finished, click OK.

The report is saved in the location and format defined.

240
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Configuring reports
The report contents and layout are user-configurable. Select the Reports page in the Workspace, right-
click on the report template that you want to configure, and select Configure.

In the Report Configuration dialog box you can edit the report contents. On the General page you can
select which statistics are shown in the report. You can also type a Report description and a Report title
that will be shown on the report front page. Show bins defines whether numerical data is shown in
cumulation and density histograms.

Under the other items you find a list of available parameters. For each parameter you can define some
properties, such as, the lower and upper bound, threshold, and channel numbers. The selection depends
on the parameter.

241
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The changes will affect all reports that are generated using this template.
For benchmarking reports you need to define how the benchmarking report is grouped. Open the Report
Configuration dialog box for a benchmarking report, click on General. In the Benchmark by field select the
grouping factor and click OK.

Reporting with MS PowerPoint/Word

Nemo Analyze allows creating reports with Microsoft PowerPoint and Microsoft Word. You can create
PowerPoint/Microsoft Word report templates and define workbook pages or pictures that are exported
from Nemo Analyze to PowerPoint or Word. PowerPoint/Word reporting functionality automates
populating the report without having to copy and paste pictures. The created report templates can be
opened in Tools | Report.

The work flow below explains step by step how to first create a PowerPoint or a Word template, and how
to run a report.
For reporting with PowerPoint the PowerPoint version must be 2007 or newer.
Work flow:
1. In Nemo Analyze, create workbooks that are needed in the report. Workbooks may have one or
multiple pages. Save workbooks.

242
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

2. Start Microsoft PowerPoint or Microsoft Word. When Analyze is installed on the computer, Analyze
Reporting is shown as a tab in PowerPoint’s/Word’s toolbar.
3. In PowerPoint/Word, create a document or open an existing one and select Fetch workbook
images. Nemo Analyze must be running on the background. You must first select a measurement:
it could be any measurement saved on the computer.

4. This opens the Fetch Workbook Images dialog box. You can now select the workbooks you want
to use in the report template.

Search allows searching for workbooks.

You can define the image size with Image Width and Image Height. The default image size is
800x600 pixels.
5. Click Ok. Nemo Analyze opens the selected workbooks and copies the images to Workbook Image
Gallery. This may take a few moments depending on the amount and size of workbooks. Once all
images are copied into the gallery the progress window closes.

243
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

6. To add images to the report, select Workbook Image Gallery.

The View image dropdown menu shows all images that are copied in the gallery. After selecting an
image, click Add… to add the image in the report.

Note that before adding images into a PowerPoint report, a shape/ frame into which
the images are added in a slide must be selected, otherwise images cannot be
added. PowerPoint includes layout options that are suitable for Analyze reporting:
they include content shapes that can be selected for adding images.

Clicking | First, < Previous or Next> allow moving from an image to another.

Search allows searching for images by their name. Note that entering a word without a colon (:)
searches for image names including that word before the colon, and searching for a name with a
colon (for example, :application) searches for image names that include the word after the colon.
Keep aspect ratio and Fit to shape change the resolution of the image. The result is shown in the

244
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Workbook Image Gallery’s preview.

Selecting Dim added image darkens the added place holder images. This helps identifying the
images that are from Nemo Analyze, for instance in case there are also other images in the report.
When the report is run, the images are updated and no longer appear dimmed.

Note that if images are removed from the workbook image gallery, the only way to
restore them is by fetching them again from Nemo Analyze.

When all place holder images are chosen and the report template is ready, you can save the
template.
7. To run a report, go to Nemo Analyze. Right-click on a measurement you want to run the report on
and select Report | Create PowerPoint Report for a PowerPoint report or Report | Create Word
Report for a Word report. Select the PowerPoint/Word report template you want to use. A progress
window is displayed while the report is run.

In a ready report the images no longer appear dimmed. You can further modify the report.
Remember to save the report when it is completed.

245
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Note that it is possible to open a report directly in Microsoft PowerPoint or in Microsoft Word
through the Analyze Reporting tab in the ribbon bar.

PowerPoint 2007 setup

Enabling Analyze reporting on PowerPoint 2007 version requires the following setup process. Note that all
updates through Microsoft Update concerning Microsoft Office 2007 must be installed before performing
the setup.
1. Open the main menu and search POWERPNT.EXE. Right-click on POWERPNT.EXE and click
Run as administrator.

246
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

2. The User Account Control dialog box opens. Click Yes.

3. A new PowerPoint presentation opens. Click the main menu button on the upper left corner to
open the main menu.
4. On the main menu, click PowerPoint Options.

247
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

5. The PowerPoint Options dialog box opens. Click Add-Ins.

6. The Add-ins view opens. Click Go…

248
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

7. The COM Add-Ins dialog box opens. Select AnalyzePowerPointAddIns, click Remove, and then
click OK.

8. Close PowerPoint.
9. Open the AnalyzePowerPointAddIns.vsto file from C: | Program Files | Anite | Nemo Analyze.

249
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

10. Install AnalyzePowerPointAddIns by clicking Install. When the installation is complete, close
Microsoft Office Customization Installer by clicking Close.

11. If the Program Compatibility Assistant dialog box opens, click This program installed correctly.

250
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

12. Open PowerPoint. You are now able to use the Analyze Reporting functionality.

Report Automation
This section guides you with the possibilities on report automation with Nemo Analyze client and Nemo
Analyze server. It is possible to create, test, and run the report with Nemo Analyze client, but it is also
possible to first create and test the report with Nemo Analyze client and then configure and transfer the
report template to Nemo Analyze Server, where the report is run directly on the server side.

Scheduling events with Nemo Analyze client

The Event Scheduler makes it possible to schedule workbooks and reports to be run and measurement
files to be loaded to the database automatically from a predefined folder.
To open Event Scheduler, select Tools | Event scheduler from the ribbon bar.
The Scheduler view opens.

Click on the calendar, and you can open a pulldown menu for view and time scale values in the dynamic
ribbon bar. Default values for View and Time scale can be set in View | Options | Scheduler.

251
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

To add an event, select a timeslot from the calendar, right-click over it, and select Add Event from the
popup menu.
The Schedule Event Batch dialog box opens.

One event batch can contain several events that are being run successively.
Batch name defines a name for the batch.
Start time defines a start time for the batch.
To define a recurring batch, click Recurrence. For more information on recurring events, see Chapter
“Defining recurring events”.
Events displays the events of the event batch.
Use custom settings enables defining event-specific settings.
Use default MapX map, available when Use custom settings is selected, enables selecting event-specific
MapX map, overriding global map settings.
Delete enables you to delete an event.
Up enables you to move an event up in the batch.
Down enables you to move an event down in the batch.
Add… enables you to add events through the Schedule Event dialog box.
Event name defines a name for the event.
Event type defines the event as a report event, a workbook event, a load folder event, or as a KPI
threshold alarm event. To create and define an event of the selected type, click Configure.
Nemo Analyze enables loading log files and autonomous rep files to the database automatically over FTP
or SFTP connection.
Loading of the files over FTP is two-step process. First the files are retrieved from the FTP server and
saved to a local folder. Then the files are loaded from the local folder into the database.

Please note that the measurements files are removed from the FTP server’s
autoload folder after loading.

You can configure automatic measurement loading from an FTP server on the FTP Autoload page in the
Nemo Analyze Server Manager. Nemo Analyze Server can periodically connect to a remote FTP server
and load any measurements from the FTP server to the server's database.
Protocol enables you to select between FTP and SFTP protocols. For FTP protocol, the Use active mode
option can be used to select either passive or active FTP connection. For SFTP the Use active mode
option is not available.
Host, Port, Username and Password define the address and login information of the remote server.
Remote folder defines the folder on the server from where Nemo Analyze Server will search for the
measurement files to load. Nemo Analyze Server can search for measurements in more than one folder
on the server. To add more folders, enter the folder names into the Additional folders field separated by
vertical line ( | ) characters.

252
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

10.8.1.1 Report events

Selecting Run Report as the Event Type in the Schedule Event dialog box and clicking Configure opens
the Configure Report dialog box.

Workspace folder defines the folder on which the report will be run.
Update folder before report execution, if selected, checks whether there are new measurement files in the
folder before running the report.
Do not run event for empty folder, if selected, ensures that a report is not generated if the folder where the
report should be generated is empty.
Report per measurement, if selected, runs the report on each measurement file separately.
Report file defines the report that is to be run on the measurement files within the folder defined in
Measurement folder. To browse for a report file, click the browse button, select a report file, and click OK.
Export, if selected, enables automatic export of scheduled reports to PDF, MS Excel, MS Word, Rich text,
text, and HTML.
Autogenerate name generates a filename for the exported file automatically.
Export folder defines a destination folder for the exported report.
Additional Report Scope Settings opens the Scope Filter dialog box.
Save report to Nemo Cloud enables saving the report to Nemo Cloud. Note that Export and Export folder
must be selected for this functionality to work.
Nemo Cloud connection enables selecting which Nemo Cloud connection is used. Tap Login to log in to
Nemo Cloud.
Nemo Cloud project enables selecting the project for which the report is saved to. Note that you must be
logged in to Nemo Cloud to do this.
Close workbook when report ready, if selected, automatically closes the workbook after export.
Send email when report ready defines an automatic notification email to be sent upon scheduled report
execution.
Attach report, if selected, automatically attaches scheduled reports to event reporting emails.
Configure email allows you to define notification email settings.
Clicking Configure email in the Configure Report dialog box opens the Email dialog box.

253
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

To defines the recipient email address.

Subject displays the default subject line of the notification email.
Message allows you to edit the automatic notification email.
Clicking Scope Filter in the Configure Report Event dialog box opens the System tab of the Scope Filter
dialog box.

System defines the systems that will be included in the report.

Band defines the bandwidths that will be included in the report.
To define the scope of the report based on time or area, select the Time & Area tab.

254
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Begin time defines the start time for the time range from which the measurement files will be processed.
End time defines the end time for the time range from which the measurement files will be processed.
Area, if selected, enables the limiting of the report scope based on area.
Define Area opens the Select Polygon Area dialog box.
Clicking Define Area on the Time & Area tab of the Report Scope dialog box opens the Select Polygon
Area dialog box.
Filter out events marked as scheduled, if selected, events will be filtered.

With Area | Name you can select a polygon area you have previously saved.
By clicking Area you are able to select a polygon on the map. After selection, the Add polygon dialog box
opens, in which you can give the polygon a name.
You can zoom in and zoom out to change the map view.
By clicking Pan you can move the map by dragging it.
By clicking Reset you can erase the area selection made.
10.8.1.2 Workbook events
Selecting Run Workbook as the Event Type in the Schedule Event dialog box and clicking Configure
opens the Configure Workbook dialog box.

255
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Measurement folder defines the folder on which the report will be run.
Update folder before report execution, if selected, checks whether there are new measurement files in the
folder before running the report.
Do not run event for empty folder, if selected, ensures that a report is not generated if the folder where the
report should be generated is empty.
Report per measurement, if selected, runs the report on each measurement file separately.
Workbook defines the workbook that is to be run on the measurement files within the folder defined in
Measurement folder. To browse for a workbook file, click the browse button, select a workbook file, and
click OK.
Export to defines whether the workbook is to be exported as image files (image per page) or as a PDF
document.
Export folder defines a destination folder for the exported workbook.
Autogenerate name, if selected, generates a filename for the exported file automatically.
Export name defines the name of the exported report.
Close workbook when report ready, if selected, automatically closes the workbook after export.
Send email when workbook ready defines an automatic notification email to be sent upon scheduled
workbook execution.
Attach report, if selected, automatically attaches scheduled reports to event reporting emails.
Configure email allows you to define notification email settings.
Clicking Configure email in the Configure Workbook dialog box opens the Email dialog box.

To defines the recipient email address.

256
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Subject displays the default subject line of the automatic notification email.
Message allows you to edit the automatic notification email.
10.8.1.3 Office report events
Selecting Run Office report as the Event Type in the Schedule Event dialog box and clicking Configure
opens the Configure Office Report Event dialog box.

Measurement defines the folder on which the report will be run.

Update folder before report execution, if selected, checks whether there are new measurement files in the
folder before running the report.
Do not run event for empty folder, if selected, ensures that a report is not generated if the folder where the
report should be generated is empty.
Report per measurement, if selected, runs the report on each measurement file separately.
Report type defines the report type: Microsoft PowerPoint or Microsoft Word.
Template file enables you to select the template on which the report is displayed. Note that the template
must already exist before the report can be exported. To browse for a report template, click the browse
button, select a template file, and click Open.
Export folder defines a destination folder for the exported workbook.
Autogenerate name, if selected, generates a filename for the exported file automatically.
Report file defines the name of the exported report file.
Scope filter opens the Scope Filter dialog box. For more information on scope filtering, see chapter 10.3.
Send email when report ready defines an automatic notification email to be sent upon scheduled Office
report execution.
Attach report, if selected, automatically attaches scheduled reports to event reporting emails.
Configure email allows you to define notification email settings.
Clicking Configure email in the Configure Office Report Event dialog box opens the Email dialog box.

257
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

To defines the recipient email address.

Subject displays the default subject line of the automatic notification email.
Message allows you to edit the automatic notification email.
10.8.1.4 Load folder events
Selecting Load files in folder as the Event Type in the Schedule Event dialog box and clicking Configure
opens the Configure dialog box.

Load folder defines the folder from which all measurement, map, BTS, and report files are loaded.
Include subfolders, if selected, causes all measurement, map, BTS, report, and other files to be loaded
from all subdirectories of the folder defined in Load folder.
Download files x last days enables you to define the number of days during which measurements loaded
are performed. For example, if the number is three, the measurement files created during the last three
days are loaded to the folder.
File types enables you to define the file types to be loaded.
Other extensions enables you to define custom extensions.
10.8.1.5 FTP autoload
Selecting FTP autoload as the Event Type in the Schedule Event dialog box and clicking Configure
opens the Configure FTP Autoload Event dialog box.

258
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Protocol defines the protocol used, the options are FTP and SFTP
Use active mode, when selected, uses the FTP active mode.
Host defines the host URL.
Port defines the host port.
Username is the username created for the FTP server.
Password is the password created for the FTP server.
SSH key file defines the SSH key file.
Remote folder defines the folder on the server from where Nemo Analyze Server will search for the
measurement files to load. Nemo Analyze Server can search for measurements in more than one folder
on the server.
Other folders enables you to define additional remote folders. Enter the folder names into the Other
folders field separated by vertical line ( | ) characters.
Local folder defines the destination folder to which the files are downloaded.
Use remote folder structure, if selected, preserves the remote folder structure in the downloaded folder.
File types enables you to define the file types to be loaded.
Other extensions enables you to define custom extensions.
Load files recursively from subfolders, when selected, loads files from possible subfolders recursively.
Delete files from server after load, if selected, deletes the downloaded files from the server after the
download.
10.8.1.6 Nemo Cloud autoload events
Selecting Nemo Cloud autoload as the Event Type in the Schedule Event dialog box and clicking
Configure opens the Configure Nemo Cloud Autoload Event dialog box.
Nemo Cloud connection enables you to select which Nemo Cloud connection, previously configured in
Options – Nemo Cloud, is used.
Project enables you to select a Nemo Cloud project.
Login logs you into Nemo Cloud. Note that you need to log in before you can view any projects or folders
located in Nemo Cloud.
Project enables you to select a project you want to download to Nemo Analyze from Nemo Cloud.
Local folder defines the destination folder to which measurement files from the selected Nemo Cloud
project are downloaded.
Download files X last days enables you to define the number of days during which measurements
downloaded are performed. For example, if the number is three, the measurement files created during the
last three days are downloaded to the destination folder.
File types enables you to define the file types to be loaded.
Other extensions enables you to define custom extensions.

259
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

10.8.1.7 KPI Threshold Alarm events

Selecting KPI Threshold Alarm as the Event Type in the Schedule Event dialog box and clicking
Configure opens the Configure KPI Threshold Alarm dialog box.

Measurement folder defines the measurement folder on which the KPI is run.
Update folder before report execution, if selected, checks whether there are new measurement files in the
folder before running the report.
Do not run event for empty folder, if selected, ensures that a report is not generated if the folder where the
report should be generated is empty.
If the Check threshold for each measurement in folder option is selected, the threshold will be executed
per file separately, instead of running the threshold test over all the log files in the selected folder.
Report per measurement, if selected, runs the report on each measurement file separately.
KPI threshold allows you to define the threshold condition.
Run script, when selected, allows you to set any script (.bat) to be run when the threshold condition is
fulfilled.
Send email, when selected, allows you to configure an email notification to be sent when the threshold
condition is fulfilled.
Clicking Add below the KPI thresholds field in the Configure KPI Threshold Alarm dialog box opens the
Analyze Wizard – Measurement Parameters dialog box.

260
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Select a parameter from the Parameters view and click Next.

The Analyze Wizard – Filters dialog box opens.

The dialog allows you to define optional filters by clicking Add. It is also possible to set multiple KPI
triggers with AND/OR elements.
After defining optional filters, click Finish.
The Condition dialog box opens. This dialog box allows you to define left and right columns, operator, and
value. Select OK to return to the Configure KPI Threshold Alarm dialog box.

261
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Clicking Configure email in the Configure KPI Threshold Alarm dialog box opens the Email dialog box.

To defines the recipient email address.

Subject displays the default subject line of the automatic notification email.
Message allows you to edit the automatic notification email.
10.8.1.8 Defining recurring events
Clicking Recurrence in the Schedule Event Batch dialog box and clicking Configure opens the Event
Recurrence dialog box.

262
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Event time allows you to define a Start and End time (that is, duration) for the event.
Recurrence pattern allows you to define how often the event recurs, that is, Daily, Weekly, Monthly, or
every N week(s) on [weekday(s)].
Range of recurrence allows you to define duration for the recurrence pattern, either based on Start and
End by dates, or based on a user-defined number of occurrences using the End after N occurrences
control.
10.8.1.9 Use Case 25: Triggering events
This use case describes the process of creating triggered events. Triggering events enables report
automation with server autoload, making running final measurement reports more convenient for the end-
user. It is possible to trigger events and event batches when connected to the Nemo Analyze Server –
please note that triggering events is not possible without a server connection.
First, ensure that the backup and retrieving, autoload, and FTP autoload options are enabled in the Nemo
Analyze server for the server autoload to be possible. For more detailed information on how to do this
please refer to Nemo Analyze Database Server Administration Guide.
You also need to enable the following functions in Nemo Analyze Server to use event triggering:
1. In Backup & Retrieve settings, select
• Nemo measurements (*.nmf)
• Zip archives (*.zip)
2. In Autoload settings, select
• Nemo measurements (*.nmf)
• Zip archives (*.zip)
3. In FTP settings, select
• Load files recursively from subfolders
• Delete files from server after load
After enabling these functions, create a folder on the FTP server by the name test, for example. Add
measurements to the folder named test. The files you add to the folder will be autoloaded and they will
appear on the Nemo Analyze client’s server folders in a folder with the same name as created on the FTP
server.
In Nemo Analyze, open the Event scheduler from the ribbon bar, Tools | Event scheduler.
The Event scheduler’s calendar view opens. Click on the calendar.

263
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Clicking on the calendar opens the Event scheduler ribbon bar. Click Triggering events on the ribbon
bar.

The Triggering Events dialog box opens. Click Add.

The Schedule Event Batch dialog box opens.

264
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

On the Triggering folder field you need to type in the same folder name as created in the FTP server (in
this case “test”). However, you need to add a marker to the folder name for Nemo Analyze to recognize
when to trigger the event. The trigger marker is _ready, so in this case the folder has to be named
test_ready.

Click Add to add events to the event batch normally (see Chapter “Scheduling events with Nemo Analyze
client” for details on how to add events). In this case two events were added, Run workbook (workbook)
and Run report (report). You can change the order of the events in the batch with the Up and Down
buttons, and remove events from the batch by selecting an event and clicking Delete.

As event triggering is not time-related but event-related, you cannot set a start time for the event.
Select Active (selected as default) to activate the triggering.
Once this pre-configuration is finished, click Close.

Note that this pre-configuration must be done in order for the event triggering to take
place.

At this point, load all measurement files you wish to include in the trigger event folder from the local folder
to the FTP server.

265
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Wait until the measurement files have loaded to the Analyze server from the FTP
server folder. The FTP server folder is empty once all files are loaded.

Next, on the FTP server where you created the folder called test, rename the folder to test_ready. Nemo
Analyze will wait until all the measurement files have been uploaded to the database before triggering the
event.

Once the name is changed on the FTP server it might take several minutes for the
change in the folder name to reach the Nemo Analyze Client.

The renamed folder will be automatically retrieved from Nemo Analyze server to the client. Once the
renamed folder appears on the Nemo Analyze client’s server folders the event batch you created is
triggered automatically. Once the event is run, the event batch goes to inactive state. To run the same
event batch again you need to reactivate the batch in the Schedule Event Batch dialog box.

Reporting automation with Nemo Analyze server

Note that this feature is available only with the Nemo Analyze server option.

With Nemo Analyze server, reports can be run automatically with the reporting feature. The server report
templates are similar to Spreadsheet report templates, however with server report templates the maps are
added locally.
The process of report creation for the Nemo Analyze server side is quite similar to creating reports for
Nemo Analyze client – the main difference is that while the report template is created in Nemo Analyze
client as before, the report template can be uploaded to Nemo Analyze server and then be generated
automatically by the server without the need of launching the report generation separately from the Nemo
Analyze client. The format of server reports is .ssrt.
10.8.2.1 Creating server report templates
Before you start to create the report templates, you need to configure the server settings for the reports in
View | Server config | Reporting. After you have configured the server settings, you can create the
report template.
1. With the Nemo Analyze server connected, to create a server report go to Tools in the ribbon bar
and select Spreadsheet | Server Report Designer.

2. Clicking Server Report Designer opens the Analyze Spreadsheet Report Designer where you can
create the report in the same way as you would on the Nemo Analyze client side. The only
difference is that with server reports you cannot insert workbooks to the report, only images, maps
and inbuilding maps. To insert a map or an inbuilding map, click Insert Map. The Map Plot dialog
opens.

266
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Map type enables selecting which map type is used.

Under map type you can drag and drop parameters from the parameter tree. Note that three
parameters can be added into one map currently.
o Clicking edit opens the filter box dialog for the parameter.
o Clicking delete deletes the parameter from the list.
Select Colorsets from a list of available color sets. You can set the color set for each parameter.
Delete Image enables deleting the placeholder.
Move and resize enables moving the placeholder within the document and defining its size.
Under Map presentation setting you can select with setting is used:
o Maintain aspect ratio maintains the original aspect ratio of the map regardless of how
placeholder´s limits are defined.
o Stretch to placeholder dimensions stretches the map on the workbook to fill the
entire placeholder.
o Fill to placeholder dimensions displays the route map in the middle of the
placeholder while maintaining the proportions and the limits of the placeholder and
Note that queries can be added to the report template the same as in .srt reports.

1. Create the report template as you would in Nemo Analyze client (see Chapter “Error! Reference
source not found.” for further instructions on how to do this).

267
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

2. Once you have created the report template, it is recommended to test it in the Nemo Analyze client
by running the report on a measurement. Note that the report template you created in Server
Report Designer is displayed first in the Report Folder in the Workspace, and you need to double-
click on the report template to load it for testing.

3. Once tested, upload the report to the server from the popup menu in the Report Folder window.
Right-click on the report and click Upload to Server.
4. When the upload is completed, the report appears in the Server Report Folder window, from where
it can be downloaded as a local copy by other users with the Nemo Analyze Server option (right-
click | Download from Server).
10.8.2.2 Reporting automation management
The Nemo Analyze server reporting can be automated after the report template has been created. You
can create reporting events that are run either once or repeatedly by configuring the events with the
Server reports functionality in the reporting tools.
1. After the report template has been created and tested, go to Tools | Server reports in the ribbon
bar to configure the server reporting settings.
2. Clicking Server reports opens the Configure Server Reports dialog box.

The dialog box displays the estimated run time, the name of the event, the performance mode,
and for how long the report will run. In this dialog box you can also add new reporting events,
modify or delete existing ones, and change the order in which the reporting events are run by the
server.

268
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

3. To add a reporting event, click Add to open the Server Report dialog box.
4. Name the event, the report and select the report template for the event in the Report field. This
field displays the report templates uploaded to the server.
5. In the Run report for field, define the server folder for which the reporting event is run.
6. Nemo Analyze runs report over measurements from the last X days, when Run for X last days is
selected. For example, if you select 7 days, the report is run over the measurements from the
during the previous 7 days.
7. Define when the report is run by selecting the suitable option among Run next, Run at (define
time and date), and Repeat at (define time) daily or weekly (define the weekday)
8. When selecting Save report to Nemo Cloud, the report is saved to Nemo Cloud. Select which
Nemo Cloud connection is used and click Login to log into Nemo Cloud.
9. Select the Nemo Cloud project for which the report is saved to.
Define the maximum execution time for the report in minutes (if the report creation is not finished in this time, the
report creation process is stopped). Once you are ready with the configurations, click OK.The event you created is
now displayed in the Configure Server Reports dialog box.
10. Click OK to close the dialog box. The reporting event is now ready and the configurations are
saved on the server under Configuration file path (defined in View | Server config | Reporting).

Only one user can modify the configurations at a time. When you modify the
configurations, you have one hour to make your modifications, after that the changes
will be discarded.

11. The final report is in .xsxl format, and it will be stored in the Report folder defined in View | Server
config | Reporting | Report folder. It is recommended to define the Report folder to a shared
network drive to make accessing the report easier.
10.8.2.3 (S)FTP Log File Autoload
Nemo Analyze enables loading log files and autonomous rep files to the database automatically over FTP
or SFTP connection. The feature is mainly targeted for Nemo Analyze Enterprise, but it can be enabled
also in Nemo Analyze Standalone.
Loading of the files over FTP is two-step process. First the files are retrieved from the FTP server and
saved to a local folder. Then the files are loaded from the local folder into the database.

Please note that the measurements files are removed from the FTP server’s
autoload folder after loading.

You can configure automatic measurement loading from an FTP server on the FTP Autoload page in the
Nemo Analyze Server tool. Nemo Analyze Server can periodically connect to a remote FTP server and
load any measurements from the FTP server to the server's database.

269
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Enable FTP autoload, when selected, enables automatic FTP loading can be enabled.
Protocol enables you to select between FTP and SFTP protocols. For FTP protocol, the Use active mode
option can be used to select either passive or active FTP connection. For SFTP the Use active mode
option is not available.
Host, Port, Username, and Password define the address and login information of the remote server.
Remote folder defines the folder on the server from where Nemo Analyze Server will search for the
measurement files to load. Nemo Analyze Server can search for measurements in more than one folder
on the server. To add more folders, enter them into the Additional folders field separated by vertical line ( |
) characters.
Scanning interval defines how often Nemo Analyze Server will connect to the FTP server and search for
newly-added measurements. Enter the value in seconds. To also scan subfolders, select Load files
recursively from subfolders. When selecting Delete files from server after load, all downloaded files
are automatically deleted from the server.
Apply changes by clicking Apply Changes at the bottom of the page.

270
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

11 Customization

Creating Custom Queries

NOTE: Using the easy-to-use graphical user interface of KPI Workbench, you are
able to perform all SQL-specific tasks and more without proficiency in the SQL
language.

Nemo Analyze is based on an SQL database. The data is stored and retrieved from the database using
SQL queries via the standard ODBC interface. The results of the SQL queries can be further processed
using the KPI workbench, Nemo Analyze’s graphical, flowchart-based scripting engine. The results of the
SQL queries and the KPI Workbench scripts can be visualized using Nemo Analyze’s comprehensive
selection of data views, or any third party post-processing tool supporting ODBC connectivity. This section
describes the guidelines for making custom KPIs with both SQL (see Chapter “SQL queries” on page 271)
and the KPI Workbench (see Chapter “Custom KPI Workbench” on page 294).
SQL queries represent a powerful tool for complex data filtering and data processing when the data is in
scalar format. However, SQL has some downsides as well: it is impossible to create queries that track
certain event sequences, such as changes in a particular parameter value from row to row. It is also
impossible to merge data from more than two data sets into a single result set based on time. Moreover,
the use of SQL queries requires knowledge of the Nemo Analyze database schema and proficiency in
SQL.
The KPI workbench enables the creation of complex queries, including time-based merging of multiple
inputs, and the tracking of particular event sequences. The graphical user interface makes it also easier to
use than SQL. To summarize the differences between the KPI Workbench and SQL, the KPI workbench is
a more powerful tool for data customization, whereas SQL is sometimes more convenient when filtering or
formatting raw data. For a user without previous experience with SQL, the KPI workbench is
recommended as the primary data customization tool.

SQL queries

Getting started
As a prerequisite, the following documents and tools are recommended as a reference for developing
SQL queries:

271
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

1. SQL editor. Queries can be written with the Nemo Analyze database browser (see Chapter
“Database Browser” on page 293) but there are also many specifically SQL-oriented third-party
editors available. Good freeware tools are also available, such as
http://gpoulose.home.att.net/Tools/QTODBC61.msi
2. Nemo File Format specification. The document describes the Nemo measurement file format on an
event-by-event basis. The file format specification can be downloaded from KSM, or accessed via
Nemo Analyze by selecting Help | Nemo file format from the ribbon bar.
3. Open access SQL reference. The document describes the supported SQL syntax and can be
downloaded from KSM. In addition to the Open access SQL, Keysight has added some proprietary
scalar functions and stored procedures for common tasks needed in drive test data processing.
The description of Keysight’s proprietary scalar functions and stored procedures can be accessed
by selecting Help | Help topics from the ribbon bar and searching the help with the keywords
scalar functions or stored procedures.
4. Nemo Analyze database schema. Database schema can be accessed and queried by selecting
Help | Creating Customer Queries | SQL Queries | SQL Queries Nemo Analyze Database
schema from the ribbon bar. Note that querying the schema may take several minutes. The
schema can be exported as a PDF document.

Nemo Analyze database schema

Data in a relational database is stored as relations which are perceived by the user as tables. Each table
represents an object or an event (for example employee, sales order, and so forth). Each row in a table
represents a unique instance of the object or event. Each column represents a different class of
information defining the object or event, for example first name, last name, salary, customer name, and
order charge.
In the Nemo Analyze database, the table structure is based on the event structure of the Nemo log file
format. That is, each event in the Nemo file format has a corresponding table in the database. For
instance, a BLER event is always recorded when the mobile’s Block Error Rate changes. When the log file
is loaded into the Nemo Analyze database, each BLER event is parsed as a new row in the BLER table.
When referring to a table in a query, the syntax is “[schema name]”.”[table name]”. For example,
"Nemo.UMTS"."BLER”, where the schema is Nemo.UMTS and the table BLER.

Relations between tables

If rows in a given table can be associated with rows in another table, the tables are said to have a
relationship between each other. Generally, these relationships can be of three different types: one-to-
one, one-to-many, and many-to-many. The Nemo Analyze database schema allows one-to-one and one-
to-many relations.
One-to-one relation means that each row in a given table can have a relation with a single row in another
table. In one-to-many relation, each row in a given table can have a relation with multiple rows in another
table.
These relations can be defined by two columns in a table: the columns primary key and foreign key. Each
table by necessity has a primary key. Primary key is a column that uniquely identifies each row within a
table. In Nemo Analyze database, the primary key column is always named as oid. If a table has relations
with other table(s) it will also contain a foreign key column for each related table. The foreign key column
contains the value of the primary key values (oid) of the associated row(s) in the other table. Foreign key
column names always include the prefix the_, as with the following names: the_parent, the_event, and
the_connection. For examples of how the relations are used in practice, please see the following two
chapters that describe the mapping of static and dynamic events to database tables.

Mapping of Nemo log file events to database tables

The data in Nemo log files is written in event-based format. All data related to a same object (for example
Block Error Rate) is written as a single event. Each different event type in Nemo file format has a
corresponding table structure in the database. Events can be split into two categories. Static events
always have the same amount of information elements, that is, columns. Dynamic events have a varying
number of information elements. A typical example of a static event is SHO. It reports soft handover
events in UMTS. It contains always the same information elements, including SHO status, number of
scrambling codes added to the active set, and others. An example of a dynamic event is ECN0. The

272
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

ECN0 event reports the RSCP and Ec/N0 of all measured active, monitored, detected, and undetected
cells. The number of measured cells constantly varies based on the location of the measurement device in
the network. The number of information elements, that is, columns, in the ECN0 event varies accordingly.
The diagram below illustrates the mapping of SHO events to different database tables. A similar diagram
applies to all static events. For each SHO event in the log file, there is one row written in the SHO table.
All soft handover-specific information elements within the SHO event are written to the corresponding
columns in the SHO table.
Generic information elements common to all events are written in the Event table. Such information
elements include time, latitude, longitude, GPS distance, and others. There is a one-to-one relation
between the SHO table and the Event table. The column the_event in the SHO table is a foreign key,
pointing to the oid column in the Event table. In other words, each unique row value in the column
the_event in the SHO table corresponds with a unique row value in the column oid in the Event table.
Based on this correspondence, the two tables can be correlated.
The Device table contains a row for each log file loaded into the database. The only information column in
this table is the log file extension. There is a one-to-many relation between the SHO table and the Device
table. The SHO table contains a row for each SHO event from each log file loaded into the database.
Each row of the SHO table belonging to same log file points to the same row in the Device table. That is,
the value in the column the_device in the SHO table is the same on all rows that come from the same log
file, corresponding with a single row value in the column oid in the Device table.
The Measurement table contains a row for each measurement loaded into the database. It contains all
measurement-specific information columns, including the log file title. It should be noted that the term
measurement refers to one or multiple log files collected at the same time. If a Nemo Outdoor Multi
measurement is made with four terminals, there will be a single measurement session and four log files. In
this case, the measurement title is the same for all log files and the log files are differentiated from each
other using different file extensions. When these files are loaded into the Nemo Analyze database, there
will be four rows in the Device table, one for each log file, and one row in the Measurement table. So there
is a one-to-many relation between the Measurement and Device tables. That is, the value in the column
the_measurement in the Device table is the same on all rows that come from the same measurement
session, corresponding with a single row value in the oid column of the Measurement table.

The diagram below illustrates the mapping of ECN0 events into different database tables. The ECN0
event in the log file contains Ec/N0, RSCP, channel number and scrambling code for each measured cell,
and carrier RSSI for each measured channel. Because the number of information elements in each ECN0
event varies, the data has been split to multiple different tables in order to achieve efficient data storage in
the database. As with all dynamic size events, the data is split to multiple tables in the database. There is
a single row written in the ECN0 table for each ECN0 event in the log file. The ECN0 table consists of
columns such as the number of active set cells, the number of monitored set cells, and others. The

273
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

relations between the tables ECN0, Event, Device, and Measurement are similar to those of the SHO
event, see previous example.
There is a one-to-many relation between the tables ECN0 and Channel. In the Channel table, there is a
row for each carrier RSSI value reported in an ECN0 event. All the rows in the Channel table that belong
to the same ECN0 event have the same value in the column the_parent. The value in the column
the_parent equals the oid value of the matching row in the ECN0 table.
There is also a one-to-many relation between the tables ECN0 and Cell. For each measured cell in the
ECN0 event, there is a row in the Cell table. All the rows in the Cell table belonging to the same ECN0
event have the same value in the column the_parent. The value in the column the_parent equals the oid
value of the matching row in the ECN0 table.
As an example, consider an ECN0 event that includes measurement results from six different cells. Two
of these cells are in channel x, and the rest in channel y. When parsed to the database, the event will
produce one row in the ECN0 table, two rows in the Channel table, and six rows in the Cell table.

The structures of all tables in the database follow the same principle as the SHO event and the ECN0
event above. All tables in the database are structured based on the same principle with either the SHO
event or the ECN0 event (discussed above). Each column, table, and relation is described in detail in the
Nemo Analyze database schema.

Views – Automatically joined tables

As mentioned earlier, each information element is stored as a separate table based on the event structure
of the Nemo log file format. General information, including time, lat, long, and log file name, are stored in
the tables Measurement, Device and Event. These tables have relations with measurement data tables,
as described in the dynamic and static event examples above.
Typically, when a query is made, the data of interest, such as RX level and Ec/N0, is retrieved together
with corresponding general information which at the minimum includes time, latitude and longitude. This
means that the tables Event, Device and Measurement must be joined with the table containing the data
of interest.

274
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The Nemo Analyze database schema contains views for each data table that results from joining the
Event, Device and Measurement tables. In other words, a view is a virtual table that joins the tables Event,
Device, and Measurement as one. When using a view in an SQL query, the tables are joined by the
ODBC driver and not by the user. The views should always be used when there is need for viewing time,
lat, long, and so forth, information together with the data of interest. This is for two reasons. Firstly, the
views are easier to use because queries become simpler when there is no need for performing the join
operation as part of the SQL query itself. Secondly, the query performance is also a little bit better when
using views instead of query-based join operations.
A + character at the end of the table name identifies a table as a view. For example, the view
corresponding with the SHO table is titled SHO+. In the screenshot below, all the columns in the BLER+
table are listed. It can be seen that BLER, time, lat, long, measurement name, and so forth, are all
available in the same table.

The screenshot below demonstrates how views are used as part of queries. Both of the illustrated queries
return the same information, that is, time and bler. The upper query represents a situation where the join
is performed as part of the SQL query, that is, without using the relevant view. The query retrieves bler
from the BLER table and time from the Event table. The Event and BLER tables are joined with the
WHERE clause of the query. The lower query represents a situation where the relevant view is used, that
is, the query retrieves both time and the parameter bler from the BLER+ table.

275
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Database timestamps
The Nemo Analyze database stores time in two different formats. The column sql_time in the Event table
contains the timestamps of each measurement event in a standard, readable SQL timestamp format. The
column time in the Event table contains the timestamp in proprietary binary format. The Nemo
measurement file format is time-based, as opposed to sample-based. In other words, a new “sample” is
created on a timeline only when changes occur in the monitored parameter and the temporal length of the
samples depends entirely on how often changes occur in the parameter value. This also means that the
samples are not equal in weight, as the duration of each sample affects the weight of the sample. In order
to calculate correct statistics, each sample has to be weighted by its duration. Also, to ensure that line
graphs and map plots are drawn accurately, the duration of each sample must be taken into account.
The binary time stored in the column time (of the Event table and of all the views) contains both the
timestamp and the duration of the sample. The column sql_time contains only the timestamp. When
custom queries are used in Nemo Analyze, the binary timestamp time should always be used. Nemo
Analyze converts the binary time to timestamp at runtime, and automatically utilizes the sample duration
(embedded in the timestamp) in route colouring and line drawing.

276
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The screenshot above shows how the sample duration in milliseconds can be retrieved from the binary
timestamp using the scalar function TI_INTERVAL(). It is also evident that the duration of some events is
0. These event parameters (such as dropped call, call attempt failure, and cell reselection) do not have
duration, as they represent events that occur at a point in time. Therefore, the scalar function
TI_INTERVAL(time) returns the value 0 ms. All other parameters, such as Rx level, Ec/N0, throughput,
BLER, and so forth, contain a duration.
When using Nemo Analyze queries with third-party tools, sql_time and TI_INTERVAL(time) must be used
instead of the binary timestamp. Moreover, sql_time must always be used as part of the query when
sorting the result data set by time or when using conditions (for example x.sql_time > y.sql_time).

Filtering log files

The queries are usually run on a subset of log files that is narrowed down from all the files in the
database. The optimal query performance is achieved using Keysight’s proprietary, non-SQL filters in the
end of the queries. These are called hints. Because of the physical structure of the Nemo Analyze
database, all irrelevant data is filtered out and not processed. The hints point directly to the relevant log
file(s), enabling outstanding query performance regardless of the database size. Hints are added to the
end of the query in the following format:
/* MEAS({measurement_file_name_1}:{file_extension}|{measurement_file_name_2}:{file_extension}|....) */
The screenshot below shows an example of how the filter should be integrated into a query. An example
of the same query in SQL format is also provided. It should be noted that log file filtering queries are
unnecessary when creating custom SQL queries that are intended for use with Nemo Analyze only. This
is because Nemo Analyze automatically adds the hints to the queries at runtime.

277
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Value enumeration
All textual parameters with a discrete list of possible values are written to the database as numbers. In
other words, each textual value has a corresponding numerical value. Examples of such parameters
include system (GSM, UMTS, and so forth), handover type, call disconnect status, call failure cause,
among others. The textual values of all parameters of this type are stored in a ValueEnum table (see
screenshot below).

The two screenshots below show two versions of the same query. The first one returns values in
numerical format. The second one uses the VAL_TO_STRING(<param_name>, <input column>) scalar
function for retrieving the textual value for each numerical value. The scalar function VAL_TO_STRING
retrieves the value enumeration automatically from the ValueEnum table.

278
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

It should be noted that the use of the scalar function VAL_TO_STRING is unnecessary when creating
custom SQL queries that are intended for use with Nemo Analyze only. This is because Nemo Analyze
displays the value enumeration automatically.

Connections
The connection sessions measured during a drive test are stored as connection tables. The following
connections and connection tables exist: Voice, Handover, Attach, PDPContextActivation, Data, RRC,
DataTransfer, MMS, SMS, POC, LAU, RAU, and Ping. The connections often have a hierarchical
structure. For example, the DataTransfer connection always has the Data Connection table as its parent
connection. The Data Connection table has the PDPContextActivation table as its parent connection.
Finally, the PDPContextActivation table has the Attach table as its parent connection. All data recorded
during a measurement session has by necessity a relation (or relations) with the connection tables.
Examples of such data include Tx power (recorded only during voice call or packet session), application
throughput (recorded only during data transfer), and BLER (recorded only during packet session and
voice call).
As an example, the screenshot below illustrates the relations between the tables DAS and Attach. Attach
is a connection table, containing a row for each Attach session. The DAS table contains a row for each
uplink and downlink application throughput sample. Each row of the DAS table is related to the
corresponding connection in the Attach table via the_connection foreign key. The Attach table has also
relations with the GAA (Attach attempt), GAC (Attach connected), CAD (Attach disconnected), and CAF
(Attach failure) tables. All the different connection tables follow the same principle. They contain all data
specific to a particular session, including the data events that define the beginning and the end of the
session.

279
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The connection tables can be used for various purposes:

Grouping data per session, for example average Data throughput per session:
SELECT the_connection, AVG("app_throughput_downlink")
FROM "Nemo"."DAS+"
WHERE "throughput_status"=1
GROUP BY the_connection
Filtering in only those throughput samples that were recorded during a data transfer:
Connection types:
0="Unknown"
1="Voice"
2="Handover"
3="Attach"
4="PDP contect
activation"
5="Data"
6="RRC"
7="Data transfer"
8="MMS"
9="SMS"
10="POC"
11="LAU"
12="RAU"
13="Ping"

Filtering in only those throughput samples that were recorded when PDP context was active and Access
point was Internet:

The two scalar functions utilized in the examples above can be defined as follows:
CONN_IS_SHARED(conn1.”oid”, conn2.”oid”). Checks if the two connections are actually the same, or if
one of the connections is the parent of the other
CONN_IS_TYPE(conn.”oid”, numeric_exp). Checks if the connection is of a particular type. The
connection types are listed in the example above.

280
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Correlating tables based on time

Most tables do not have relations with each other. However, it is still often necessary to correlate data
from these unrelated tables based on time. For example, the tables Rx level and Rx quality are not
related, but you may still want to correlate them based on time to find instances where bad Rx quality has
coincided with good Rx level.
Generally, for performing correlations of this type, it is recommendable to use Nemo Analyze’s Correlate
parameters functionality or the KPI Workbench. However, it is also possible to correlate the two tables
using SQL and proprietary keywords, as explained in the two examples above.
Sample-based correlation
The procedure for correlating two data sets sample by sample based on time is as follows:
1. Define the tables to be joined using a FROM clause: FROM table x, table y
2. Define the x.”time” = y.”time” condition using a WHERE clause

Note that the order in which the tables are entered to the FROM clause is extremely
important. When the table x is the first one in the FROM clause:

Each sample from the table y is retrieved and checked based on the following condition: if there is an x
sample that has the same timestamp as the y sample OR if the x timestamp falls to the validity time
interval of the y sample
When the table y is the first one in the FROM clause, the comparison is performed vice versa.

Note that the comparison is not bi-directional. If there is a significant difference in the
sample periods of the tables x and y, the table that has a smaller sample period
should be selected as the last one (y) in order to get highest possible resolution.

3. Define the condition x.the_device = y.the_device using a WHERE clause. This limits the time-
based correlation into individual measurement files, improving the performance of the query and
ensuring that the correlation is performed within a single log file.
4. Add the hint /* OPTIONS(USE_TIME_SCOPE) */ at the end of the SQL query. This enables the
join based on time scope.
The following screenshot shows an example correlation of the best active set cell Tx power and RSCP,
filtered from periods where RSCP is < -95 dBm.
Tx power is in the table ”Nemo.UMTS”.”TXPC” and RSCP is in the table ”Nemo.UMTS.ECNO”.”Cell”.
There is no established relation between the tables.
All Tx power samples that fall within the validity time interval of an RSCP sample with the value
<-95 are retrieved.

Time range correlation

Data can be correlated with a connection session or a time range if start and stop events can be retrieved
from the database. A common example of time range correlation is a situation where data is tagged to a
particular connection session and there is no established relation with the connection table. For instance,
the parameters Ec/N0, RSCP, and RxLevel are always recorded, whether or not a voice call or other
connection session is active. Although these parameters do not have established relations with the
connection tables (see Chapter “Connections”), you may still want to correlate connection session
information with them, for example to filter Ec/N0 from data transfers only, to calculate average Ec/N0 per
data transfer, and so forth.
Below you can find an example query that returns active set best RSCP from the time instants that
coincide with active data transfer sessions. The time range correlation is performed based on simple time
conditions as part of the WHERE clause of the query. The time condition should be defined using the
column sql_time. The column time cannot be used because it is in a binary format understood by Nemo

281
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Analyze only. Also T_(time) should not be used although it is the actual timestamp. This is because the
query performance with T_(time) is lower than with sql_time because T_(time) does not use indexing.
Note also that the start and end points of the time range need to be joined (see the last condition in the
WHERE clause). In practice this is possible only with tables that have relations with connection tables.

Guidelines for creating SQL queries

New custom SQL queries can be developed using an SQL editor. The Database Browser functionality, or
one of the many available third-party query editors, can be used for the purpose. When the query is
complete and tested, it can be copied to the Query Manager as a new custom query. To access the Query
Manager, select Tools | Query manager from the ribbon bar. Both the custom SQL queries and the ones
created with the KPI Workbench can be found under the User branch of the Parameters view. To execute
a query on a measurement file/folder, select a measurement file/folder in the Workspace and then double-
click on a query.
The process of creating a new query starts with the identification of relevant input data. The tables that
contain the relevant data can be identified by examining the Nemo Analyze database schema (see
Chapter “Nemo Analyze database schema”). The best way to find the data of interest is to export the
schema to a PDF document and to search the document for the parameter name. The schema describes
the database table by table, column by column, and relation by relation. Please note that the same
parameter can exist in multiple tables, mainly because of the system split, for example the tables
“GSM”.”BLER” and “UMTS”.”BLER” both contain the column bler.
The design phase of the new query follows. The source data is appropriately processed based on the
selected tables. The supported SQL syntax is discussed in the reference documents (see Chapter
“Getting started” for more information).
With Nemo Analyze’s extensive set of premade queries, it is most of the time sufficient to only modify
some of the queries found in the Parameters view. The recommended starting point is to first open the
query in a data view. Once the query has been run, the query can be captured in SQL format from the Log
window. To show output from SQL, select SQL in the Logging dialoq box.. If not visible, the Log window
can be enabled by selecting View | Log window from the ribbon bar. Output from SQL contains all
executed queries in the order of execution (see screenshot below). To copy the contents of the SQL
History view, select the contents, right-click on the selection, and select Copy from the popup menu.
Paste the query to the Nemo Analyze database browser.

If using the Nemo Analyze database browser for query development, the SQL of an existing query can
also be captured using the query clipboard. To do this, open the query of interest in a data view, right-click
on the data view, and select Query | Copy from the popup menu. Paste the query to the Nemo Analyze
database browser.

Unique features of Nemo Analyze SQL interface

Nemo Analyze database has some special behaviours and features that have been discussed in detail in
the previous chapters. In many cases, the correct query creation procedure depends entirely on whether

282
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

the query is to be used with Nemo Analyze or with a third-party ODBC data retrieval tool. The unique
characteristics of the Nemo Analyze database are summarized below.
Timestamp. The binary timestamp time should be retrieved if the query is to be used with Nemo Analyze.
Nemo Analyze converts it automatically to a readable timestamp. Nemo Analyze can also make use of the
validity time interval embedded within the timestamp when drawing line graphs and map plots, and when
calculating statistics. The standard time stamp sql_time should be used with ORDER BY, WHERE and
SELECT clauses if the query is to be used with a third-party tool.
Measurement file filter. If the query is to be used with Nemo Analyze, the limiting of the query to defined
log files must not be done as part of the SQL query, as Nemo Analyze limits the query automatically at
runtime using proprietary hint-based filtering. To achieve optimal performance, it is recommended that the
hints be used also with queries intended for use with third-party tools.
Converting numeric values to corresponding textual values does not have to be done with the scalar
function VALUE_ENUM if the query is to be used with Nemo Analyze. When necessary, Nemo Analyze
automatically converts the numeric values to the corresponding textual values.
Results have to be in chronological order. If a query result set contains the time column and the results
are to be displayed in map, line graph, bar graph or numerical data format, the results must be ordered by
time. Nemo Analyze produces the results automatically in time order, log file by log file. However, with for
example the aggregates GROUP BY and UNION, time order is lost and the results must be rearranged
using the clause ORDER BY sql_time.

SQL vs. KPI workbench

For many purposes, SQL queries represent the optimal solution. However, the SQL language and the
Nemo Analyze database schema set some limitations that can make for instance the following tasks
easier to perform with the KPI Workbench.
Correlating more than two tables based on time. Sample-based correlation (described above) enables two
tables without an established relation to be joined based on time. However, with three or more tables the
task becomes impossible. For example, correlating BLER, Ec/N0 and TX power based on time is
impossible with SQL because all of the parameters are located in separate tables with no established
relations between them.
Creating queries that track certain event sequences, such as the change in particular parameter value
columns from row to row. SQL works well in scalar data processing where mathematical or logical
operations are performed on a row-by-row basis, using different columns of each row as input. SQL sub
queries can be utilized in creating an event to track situations where the system changes from GSM to
UMTS (that is, where a row contains the serving_system parameter value GSM and the subsequent row
the value UMTS), but the method will cause the performance of the query to collapse. The state machine
element of the KPI Workbench enables such queries to be created with ease and optimal query
performance.
SQL queries are at their best in scalar data processing. If all the required input data is located in the same
table (that is, time-based correlation based on multiple tables is not necessary), SQL is a good approach
to complex scalar (row-by-row) data processing. Some examples of such tasks can be found below:
Data filtering. Complex filters can be created using SQL scalar functions and logical operations.
Data reformatting. Query result set columns can be modified and combined using various string and math
functions. Conditional outputs can be created using the SQL statement CASE.
As mentioned earlier, using SQL requires proficiency in SQL and knowledge of the Nemo Analyze
database schema, and even then, the SQL language itself poses some limitations. Therefore, for a user
without previous experience with SQL, KPI Workbench is recommended as the primary data
customization tool. KPI Workbench avoids the limitations of SQL and offers full functionality also for data
filtering and data reformatting purposes.

Query Manager
Queries are sets of rules based on which data is retrieved from the database, and then displayed in the
various views in Nemo Analyze. There is a wide range of queries ready in Nemo Analyze that will assist
you in your day-to-day data analysis but it is also possible to create new queries.
You should not limit a query to certain measurement file(s), as Nemo Analyze limits the query
automatically to the measurement files required. This way the query is not statically limited to some
predefined measurement file or files, but instead, it can be run over any given measurement file or files in
the database.
In the ribbon bar, select Tools | Query Manager.

283
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

In the Query Manager dialog box, select the User item and click Add.

There are different types of queries: you can select a measurement parameter from a list (Pick
measurement parameter), select query data from tables (Generic query wizard), or type the query
string manually (Manual query).

Pick Measurement Parameter

Pick Measurement Parameter is a quick and easy way to make new queries. The Analyze Wizard will
guide you through the steps. Select Pick measurement parameter from the list and click Next.

The Measurement Parameters page displays a list of available parameters. Select a parameter from the
list and click Next. In the Filter field you can type the name or part of the name of the parameter you are
looking for to locate it faster. This is especially useful when the parameter list is long.

284
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

In the Fill Parameters dialog box you can further limit the query results by adding different filters. All
parameters can be filtered, for example based on Area and Time. Filters can be applied to parameters
that are part of the query. Right-click on top of the filter name or value to Add, Modify or Delete filters.

With numeric parameters (for example Ec/N0, but not for instance L3 signaling), the Analyze Wizard –
Statistics dialog box opens. The view allows you to define statistics to be run over the selected parameter.

285
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Statistics type defines the statistics type.

Percentile value allows you to define the percentile value, for example 95th percentile.
Group by allows you to define the basis for grouping the parameter aggregates, for example Ec/N0 values
could be grouped according to scrambling code.
In Properties dialog box you can define name, title and description for the query. It is also possible to edit
SQL manually.

In the Column Aliases page you can define how the retrieved data is displayed in the various data views.
This setting is optional. Click Finish.

286
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The query is added to the Query Manager and it can also be found in the Analyze Wizard under the User
item, and in the Parameters view under the User item. In the Query Manager you can manually edit the
query and the query filters, properties, statistics, and aliases by selecting the query from the list and
clicking Modify. You are also able to modify correlation queries, however, note that filters cannot be
modified for correlations queries. To make a copy from an existing query by selecting a query from the list
and clicking Copy.

Generic Query Wizard

Generic Query Wizard gives you more query options to choose from.

In the Select Tables page are displayed all the data tables available in the Nemo Analyze schema. Select
the table(s) from which you want to retrieve the query data.

287
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Choose the parameters for the query, and click the simple arrow for single parameters, and the double
arrow to transfer all the parameters in the table.

In the Select Columns page, select the information that you are interested in. Click Next.

288
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

In the Sort Columns page you can define in which order the data will be displayed. It is recommended that
you sort columns based on time. If there is only one table selected to the query, the columns are by
default ordered by time. This setting is optional.

In the Filters page, you can define filters for the query data. For example, you can define that the query is
only applied to parameter values less than 0. You can also define a textual filter, for example,
{?Threshold}. When the query is run, Nemo Analyze will open a dialog box where you can enter a
numerical value for the filter, for example, 10. This setting is optional.

289
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

In the Properties page, define a name for the query. In the Description field you can write a description for
the parameter. Click Next.

If you defined a textual filter in the Filters page, define a numerical value in the Fill Parameters page and
click Finish. Right-click on top of the filter name or value to Add, Modify, or Delete filters.
In the Column Aliases page you can define how the retrieved data is displayed in the various data views.
This setting is optional. Click Finish.

290
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The query is added to the Query Manager and it can also be found in the Analyze Wizard under the User
item, and in the Parameters view under the User item. In the Query Manager you can manually edit the
query by selecting it from the list and clicking Modify.

Manual Query
Manual Queries require knowledge of SQL and the Nemo Analyze database schema. Nemo Technical
Support will provide you with the database schema.

291
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Type a name for the query and select the Edit SQL manually option. In the Description field you can write
a description for the parameter. Click Next.

Type in the query string and click Finish.

292
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The query is added to the Query Manager and it can also be found in the Analyze Wizard under the User
item, and in the Parameters view under the User item. In the Query Manager you can manually edit the
query by selecting it from the list and clicking Modify.

Correlate parameters
The Correlate Parameters query type is explained in more detail on page 73.

Database Browser
You can enter the database browser via Tools | Database browser.
Database Browser can be used to display the table structure of the Nemo Analyze Database. The
contents of each table or individual columns of a table can be viewed by double-clicking it. The
corresponding query will be shown in the text window. Database Browser can also be used to write and
test custom queries. The query can then be copied to the clipboard and saved to the UI with Query
Manager.

293
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Custom KPI Workbench

Custom KPI Workbench makes it possible to create custom KPIs by dragging and dropping parameters,
correlations, various operations, filters and sort elements to the Workbench, defining their properties, and
connecting them into a logical flow chart. The KPI Workbench is part of the Troubleshooting Toolkit option.
To open Custom KPI Workbench, select Tools | KPI Workbench in the ribbon bar.
An empty Custom KPI Workbench view opens.

To clear the Workbench view, right-click on the Workbench background and select New Script from the
popup menu.
To run the KPI on a measurement file, right-click on the Workbench background and select Run Script
from the popup menu. For further instructions, see p.337.

294
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Note that before running the scripts, a parameter must be connected to the Output,
so that Output turns green.

To save the KPI, right-click on the Workbench background and select Save from the popup menu. For
further instructions, see p.338.

Designing custom KPIs and adding input data sets

The first step of creating custom KPIs should always be careful planning. First, determine what the KPI is
supposed to do, i.e. what kind of data the output should consist of. Next, determine what kind of raw data
parameters are needed to produce the right kind of output.

Note: In some cases, it may be necessary to create a KPI that correlates two
separate files that do not have any parameters in common (for example mobile and
scanner files from the same measurement session). You may also wish to define
value constants, that is, values that can be referred to in scripts with a generic
reference. If the use of either of these functionalities is necessary in terms of the KPI
you intend to create, it is recommended to see Chapter “Defining KPI execution
method and value constants” before continuing.

To add a raw parameter data set (containing all samples within the data set), select a measurement file in
Workspace | Measurements, and drag and drop the appropriate parameter to the Workbench from the
Parameters view (located on the bottom left of the screen).
To add a data set limited to pre-calculated statistics on a folder of measurement files, select a folder in
Workspace | Folders, and drag and drop the appropriate parameter to the Workbench from the
Parameters view.

You can also create a custom input parameter by dragging and dropping a Parameter element to the
Workbench view from the menu structure on the right and defining the parameter using the Query
Manager (see Chapter “Parameter”).
To leave out irrelevant columns from the input and output data sets, columns in the parameter data set
can be disabled. To do this, double-click on the parameter element in the Workbench view. Note that the

295
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

columns can only be modified before the parameter element is connected to any subsequent KPI
elements.

The Properties dialog box opens.

To disable column(s), click Result Columns, clear the column(s), and click OK.

Parameter
A parameter is a data set in tabular format that has a column containing parameter values and typically
other columns such as time, coordinates, and system.
To create custom parameters to form the basis for the new custom KPI, drag and drop the Parameter
element from the menu structure to the Workbench view.

296
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

This will open the Query Manager and enable you to customize and optimize parameters by selecting only
the relevant columns to be included in the parameter output.

Select user query allows you to select a custom query (for example one previously created and saved
using KPI Workbench) as an input data set.
For Pick measurement parameter, Generic query wizard and Manual query, see Chapter “Query
Manager” on page 283.
If there is no need to customize parameters, you can open default parameters on either entire raw
parameter data sets or on data sets limited to pre-calculated statistics.
To add a raw parameter data set (containing all samples within the data set), select a measurement file in
Workspace | Measurements, and drag and drop the appropriate parameter to the Workbench from the
Parameters View (located on the bottom left of the screen).
To add a data set limited to pre-calculated statistics on a folder of measurement files, select a folder in
Workspace | Folders, and drag and drop the appropriate parameter to the Workbench from the
Parameters view.

297
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Combining input data sets

Parameter elements consist of measurement data in tabular format. Thus, the raw data parameter Rx
Level is a table with the columns rx level, time, latitude, longitude, and so forth. If you need more than one
raw data parameter, it is usually necessary to combine these data sets or tables into a single table before
you can perform any arithmetic operations on or between them. Determine which method of combination
would be the most useful in terms of the operations you are going to use.
Note: Because different operations often have different requirements on the method of how the data sets
are combined, it is important that the phases Combining Input Data Sets and Adding Operations are
planned together.
With operations that correlate parameters or search values from different parameters from the time range
of a particular data set (namely the correlations Previous, Next and Current Value and All Values Within
Time Range), it is important that the primary data set is placed on the extreme left compared to the other
parameters or data sets connected to the same correlation, operation, and so forth. For instance, with the
correlation Left Outer Join, all data entries from the data set on the left are included in the output, and
from the secondary parameters or data sets, only the ones that match those of the primary data set.
Similarly, the correlation All Values Within Time Range produces all values of the secondary parameters
from the time range of the primary (leftmost) parameter or data set.

Secondary
parameter

Correlation
Primary
parameter Connecting elements by
dragging connector lines
from output sockets to
input sockets

In the example above, the Previous Value element is used to examine values of a secondary data set in
relation to the primary data set, the parameter Call Attempt Failure. Thus, the values of the secondary
parameter Ec/N0 Active Set are examined from a time range determined by both the correlation Previous
Value and the primary data set Call Attempt Failure. As the primary data set Call Attempt Failure consists
solely of call attempt failure events and the correlation Previous Value produces only those values of the
secondary parameter Ec/N0 Active Set that immediately precede events in the primary parameter, the
output will consist of Ec/N0 Active Set values preceding the start time of each Call Attempt Failure event.
To connect the various KPI elements to each other, connect output sockets to input sockets by pressing
the left mouse button down on the output socket of one element and holding it down while dragging the
connector line to the input socket of the other element.
To connect the same set of data to several different operations, simply draw as many connector lines as
needed from the output socket of the data set (see picture below).

298
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Once connected, the elements will turn green to signify that they are operational. If an element remains
red, it requires further configuration. Right-click the element and select Properties from the popup menu.
For more information on configuring individual elements, see the related topic below.

Correlation: Previous/Current/Next Value

The Previous Value, Current Value and Next Value elements are used in examining values of secondary
data sets from points in time determined by a primary data set. This makes it possible to examine what
occurred in the network before, during, or after parameter events in the primary data set based on one to
many secondary parameters. Previous Value produces only the previous value immediately before the
start time of the parameter events in the primary data set, Current Value only the current value during the
parameter events, and Next Value only the next value immediately after the events.
To add a Previous/Current/Next Value element to the KPI, first make sure that the primary parameter or
data set is situated the leftmost compared to the secondary parameters whose values are to be examined.

Drag and drop the Previous/Current/Next Value element to the Workbench. Connect the primary data set
to the leftmost input socket of the Previous/Current/Next Value element.

299
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Connect the secondary parameters (that is, the parameters whose previous/current/next values are to be
examined from points in time determined by the primary parameter) to the other input sockets of the
Previous/Current/Next value element.

The Previous/Current/Next Value element changes color from red to green, signifying that the element is
operational. Even if you are still going to add more elements to the KPI, it is recommended to test the
operation of the KPI at this point by connecting it to the Output element. Then, select a measurement or
several measurements from the Measurements section on the Measurements page of the Workspace.
Right-click on the Workbench background, and select Run Script from the popup menu.

300
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

For more information, see Chapter “Running and testing KPIs” on p. 337.

Correlation: Previous Or Current Value/Next Or Current Value

The Previous or Current Value and Next or Current Value elements are used in examining the parameter
values in secondary data sets from points in time determined by a primary data set. These functions
enable you to examine the parameter values in any number of secondary data sets before and during, or
during and after, an event (such as a dropped call) has been logged in the primary data set. Previous or
Current Value produces the previous value (immediately before the start time of the parameter event(s) in
the primary data set), or the current value (during the parameter event(s) in the primary data set) if a
current value is available. Next or Current Value produces the next value (immediately after the parameter
event(s) in the primary data set), or the current value (during the parameter event(s) in the primary data
set) if a current value is available.
To add a Previous or Current Value/Next or Current Value element to the KPI, first make sure that the
primary parameter or data set is situated the leftmost compared to the secondary parameters whose
values are to be examined.

Drag and drop the Previous or Current Value/Next or Current Value element to the Workbench. Connect
the primary data set to the leftmost input socket of the Previous or Current Value/Next or Current Value
element.

301
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Connect the secondary parameters (that is, the parameters whose previous/current/next values are to be
examined from points in time determined by the primary parameter) to the other input sockets of the
Previous or Current Value/Next or Current Value element.

The Previous or Current Value/Next or Current Value element changes color from red to green, signifying
that the element is operational. Even if you are still going to add more elements to the KPI, it is
recommended to test the operation of the KPI at this point. Connect the KPI to the Output element. Then,
select a measurement or several measurements from the Measurements section on the Measurements
page of the Workspace, right-click on the Workbench background, and select Run Script from the popup
menu.

302
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

For more information, see Chapter “Running and testing KPIs”.

Correlation: All Values Within Time Range

All Values Within Time Range, as compared to Previous, Current, and Next Value elements that produce
only one value, produces all values from the secondary parameters from the time range of the primary
(leftmost) parameter or data set.
Generally, all parameters of the Nemo file format have a time range. This is because the Nemo
measurement file format is time-based as opposed to sample-based. In other words, a new “sample” is
created on a timeline only when changes occur in the monitored parameter and the temporal length of the
samples depends entirely on how often changes occur in the parameter value. Event parameters (such as
dropped call, call attempt failure, and cell reselection) do not have a time range as they represent events
that occur at a point in time.
A major difference between All Values Within Time Range and the other join elements (namely Inner Join,
Left Outer Join, and Union) is that All Values Within Time Range combines the data based on time,
whereas these other join elements do this based on matching values in the data sets.
To add an All Values Within Time Range element to the KPI, first make sure that the primary parameter or
data set is situated the leftmost compared to the secondary parameters whose values are to be examined
from the time range determined by the primary element.

Note: When deciding which input data set to use as the primary dataset, consider the
fact that the output will be written only when there are valid values in the primary
dataset. Therefore, if filtering out data from the secondary data set is not desirable,
the parameter that contains valid samples for the most of the duration of the log file
should be selected as the primary dataset. For example, selecting RX qual as the
primary data set when correlating the parameters RX lev and RX qual, will produce
results only from instances when a call was active. On the other hand, if RX level is
selected as the primary data set, the results will include both idle periods and periods
when a call was active.

If Rx level is selected as primary dataset, results are given both from idle, and call connected periods.
Drag and drop the All Values Within Time Range element to the Workbench.
Connect the primary parameter or data set to the leftmost input socket of the All Values Within Time
Range element.
Connect the secondary parameters or data sets (that is, the parameters whose values are to be examined
from a time range determined by the primary parameter) to the other input sockets of the element.
The All Values Within Time Range element changes color from red to green, signifying that the element is
operational.

303
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Even if you are still going to add more elements to the KPI, it is recommended to test the operation of the
KPI at this point. Connect the KPI to the Output element. Then, select a measurement or several
measurements from the Measurements section on the Measurements page of the Workspace, right-click
on the Workbench background, and select Run Script from the popup menu.
For more information, see Chapter “Running and testing KPIs”.

Join: Inner Join

Inner Join can combine two sets of data that share a join value (such as identification code, channel
number or scrambling code) defined by the user. Only the rows containing a matching join value will be
included in the output. For instance, if two parameters both contain scrambling code information, the
parameters can be joined using Inner Join by defining scrambling code as the join value. All rows with a
scrambling code value that does not match with any of the scrambling code values in the other data set,
and those containing a null value in the scrambling code column, will not be included in the output.
To add an Inner Join element to the KPI, first open both of the data sets that are to be combined on a grid
(for opening measurements on a grid, see Chapter “Viewing measurement data” and consider which join
values (such as identification code, channel number, scrambling code, and so forth) you can use as a
basis for the join, that is, what values do the data sets have in common, what values would form a logical
basis for the join in terms of the KPI’s purpose, and so forth.
In the example screenshots below, the two tables can be joined based on the scrambling code values
they share.

304
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Drag and drop the Inner Join element to the Workbench.

Connect the data sets that are to be combined to the upper (that is, input) sockets of the Inner Join
element by pressing the left mouse button down on the output socket of each data set and holding down
the mouse button while dragging a connector line from the data set output socket to the input socket of the
Inner Join element. Right-click the Inner Join element and select Properties from the popup menu.

From the Join tab of the Properties dialog box, select the join values (that is, the values that form the basis
for the join) using the Left column and Right column drop-down menus.
After you have defined the properties of the Inner Join element, click OK, and the element changes color
from red to green, signifying that the element is operational. Even if you are still going to add more
elements to the KPI, it is recommended to test the operation of the KPI at this point. Connect the KPI to

305
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

the Output element, right-click on the Workbench background, and select Run Script from the popup
menu.

For more information, see Chapter “Running and testing KPIs”.

Join: Left Outer Join

Left Outer Join can combine two sets of data that share a join value (such as identification code, channel
number, or scrambling code) defined by the user. From the leftmost set of data, all rows are always
included. From the secondary data set, only the rows containing join values that match rows in the
leftmost set of data will be included in the output.
For instance, if two parameters both contain scrambling code information, the parameters can be joined
with Left Outer Join by defining scrambling code as the join value. All rows from the leftmost parameter
are included in the output. From the secondary parameter, only the rows with scrambling codes that
match with those of the left parameter are included.
To add a Left Outer Join element to the KPI, first open both of the data sets that are to be combined on a
grid and consider which join values (such as identification code, channel number, or scrambling code) you
can use as a basis for the join, that is, what values do the data sets have in common, what values would
form a logical basis for the join in terms of the KPI’s purpose, and so forth.
Drag and drop the Left Outer Join element to the Workbench.
Connect the data sets that are to be combined to the upper (that is, input) sockets of the Left Outer Join
element by pressing the left mouse button down on the output socket of each data set and holding down
the mouse button while dragging a connector line from the data set output socket to the input socket of the
Left Outer Join element.
Right-click the Left Outer Join element and select Properties from the popup menu.

306
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Note: Depending on the input data sets, it may sometimes be necessary to group the
input data sets based on the join value before using Left Outer Join to combine them.
In the screenshot below, both input data sets have been grouped by scrambling code
because scrambling code is going to be used as the Left Outer Join join value.

From the Join tab of the Properties dialog box, select the join values (that is, the values that form the basis
for the join) using the Left column and Right column drop-down menus.

For more information, see the topic Running and Testing KPIs.
After you have defined the properties of the Left Outer Join element, click OK, and the element changes
color from red to green, signifying that the element is operational. Even if you are still going to add more
elements to the KPI, it is recommended to test the operation of the KPI at this point.
Connect the KPI to the Output element. Then, select a measurement or several measurements from the
Measurements section on the Measurements page of the Workspace right-click on the Workbench
background, and select Run Script from the popup menu.

307
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

For more information, see Chapter “Running and testing KPIs”.

Join: Union
Union joins two or several sets of data, with or without matching rows, into a single data set without
removing any duplicate rows. Same-named columns containing data of the same type (for example, both
contain a string) are combined into a single column. Otherwise, each data set forms a new column into the
resulting data set. Because the rows and columns in the resulting data set are in no particular order, it is
often necessary to sort the resulting table based on, for instance, time in order to produce meaningful
results.
To add a Union element, drag and drop the Union element to the Workbench.
Connect the data sets that are to be combined to the upper (that is, input) sockets of the Union element by
pressing the left mouse button down on the output socket of each data set and holding down the mouse
button while dragging a connector line from the data set output socket to the input socket of the Union
element.

The Union element changes color from red to green, signifying that the element is operational.
Because the rows and columns in the unified data set are in no particular order, it is often necessary to
sort the resulting table based on, for instance, time in order to produce meaningful results.
To add a sort element, drag and drop either Ascending or Descending sort element to the Workbench.
Connect the Union element to the sort element. Define the sort element’s properties by right-clicking the

308
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

element and selecting Properties. For more information on defining the sort element’s properties, see
p.325.

Even if you are still going to add more elements to the KPI, it is recommended to test the operation of the
KPI at this point. Connect the KPI to the Output element. Then, select a measurement or several
measurements from the Measurements section on the Measurements page of the Workspace, right-click
on the Workbench background, and select Run Script from the popup menu.

For more information, see Chapter “Running and testing KPIs”.

309
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Join: Cartesian Product

Cartesian Product (or Cross Join) combines all rows from two or more data sets, producing a row for each
possible combination. For the purposes of the KPI Workbench, Cartesian Product is most commonly used
in combining two or more sets of data that are both known to contain only a single row of data (such as
the results of Aggregate functions) into separate columns on a single row.
To add a Cartesian Product element, drag and drop the Cartesian Product element to the Workbench.
Connect the data sets that are to be combined to the upper (that is, input) sockets of the Cartesian
Product element by pressing the left mouse button down on the output socket of each data set and
holding down the mouse button while dragging a connector line from the data set output socket to the
input socket of the Cartesian Product element.

The element changes color from red to green, signifying that the element is operational. Even if you are
still going to add more elements to the KPI, it is recommended to test the operation of the KPI at this point.
Connect the KPI to the Output element. Then, select a measurement or several measurements from the
Measurements section on the Measurements page of the Workspace, right-click on the Workbench
background, and select Run Script from the popup menu.

310
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The Select Measurement dialog box opens. Select a measurement from the list and click OK. For more
information on the Select Measurement dialog box, see Chapter “Running and testing KPIs”.

Adding operations
Once you have combined all the necessary raw data sets into a single table, use the state machine,
arithmetic operations, filters, time functions, and others to define how the raw data is to be processed by
the KPI.
As the various KPI elements can be used together in countless different and complex combinations (with
complex state machines, aggregate functions, Cartesian products, sort elements, and so forth), you need
to determine what correlations and operations are required and how they should interact in order to isolate
only the relevant parts of the measurement data. For instance, whether a state machine needed, and if it
is, what states would be relevant in terms of the data you are looking for, how should the transitions from
state to state be triggered, what entries in the data would be the most logical or useful triggers for these
transitions, and so forth. With the State Machine and other more complicated operations it is often
necessary to first open a sample of the kind of measurement data the KPI is intended for with suitable
parameters on a grid to determine how the data progresses and for instance what data entries should be
used as triggers to obtain the most accurate results. For opening measurements on a grid, see Chapter
“Viewing measurement data”.
It is also worth noting that some operations may require a value (for example, a transition trigger in state
machine) to be defined when defining the operation’s properties. Entering a value to a field of this type
can prove restricting in terms of the various different purposes the KPI could otherwise be used for. To
avoid this problem and effectively create a more versatile KPI with values that can be entered later on
based on the requirements of the KPI’s each individual application, define each value as a variable by
entering the string {?<variable name>} to the value field. This way, the program will prompt you to define a
value for each value defined as a variable every time the KPI is run.
This makes it possible, for instance, to create a generic state machine to calculate the delay from any one
L3 signaling message to any another. The state machine will prompt the user to define the two signaling
messages each time the KPI is run, enabling the same KPI to be used for calculating delays between any
number of different signaling message pairs.
It should also be kept in mind that the Nemo file format is time-based as opposed to sample-based (see
Chapter “Correlation: All Values Within Time Range”). Because of this, operations should always be
weighted by time when applicable. If the results are not weighted by time, it will not be possible to know
how long a particular parameter value has been valid and the results of operations such as Average and
Count will not be accurate.

Operation: Case
With Case, you can create rules that filter and divert different values from the data set to different output
sockets, making it possible to direct these values to different operations or to examine them separately in
the final output. Each of the output sockets filters out all the values that are not in accordance with the rule
defining the socket.
To add a Case element to the KPI, drag and drop the Case element to the Workbench.
Connect the data set to the upper (that is, input) sockets of the Case element by pressing the left mouse
button down on the output socket of each data set and holding down the mouse button while dragging a
connector line from the data set output socket to the input socket of the Case element.
Right-click the Case element and select Properties from the popup menu. From the Flow Control tab in
the Properties dialog box, click Add to add a rule.

311
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The Rule Properties dialog box opens.

Name defines a name for the rule.

Column defines the grid column (in the input data set) that contains the values that are compared to Value
based on the rule defined in Operator.
Operator defines the rule that determines which values are filtered out. For instance, with Scrambling
Code (Column) <= 2 (Value), all the values that do not fulfill the condition of being smaller than or equal to
2 are filtered out.
Value defines the limit value that the Operator compares to the Column value. To define the value as a
variable (that is, the value is to be defined by the user each time the KPI is run), enter the string
{?<variable name>} to the value field.
Define Case properties and click OK. The Rule Properties dialog box closes.
To create another rule, click Add again in the Properties dialog box and define properties for the rule. In
the example screenshot below, two rules have been defined, each represented by an output socket of the
Case element.

The element changes color from red to green, signifying that the element is operational. Even if you are
still going to add more elements to the KPI, it is recommended to test the operation of the KPI at this point.
Connect the KPI to the Output element. Then, select a measurement or several measurements from the
Measurements section on the Measurements page of the Workspace, right-click on the Workbench

312
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

background, and select Run Script from the popup menu. For more information, see Chapter “Running
and testing KPIs”.

Operation: Moving Average

Moving Average calculates value averages based on a user-defined number of samples preceding each
value. In practice, this removes anomalies from, for instance, a graph, making it more stable and explicit.
To add a Moving Average element to the KPI, drag and drop the Moving Average element to the
Workbench.
Connect the data set to the upper (that is, input) sockets of the Moving Average element by pressing the
left mouse button down on the output socket of each data set and holding down the mouse button while
dragging a connector line from the data set output socket to the input socket of the Moving Average
element.
To define Moving Average properties, right-click the Moving Average element and select Properties from
the popup menu.
The Running Function tab of the Properties dialog box opens.

Column defines the grid column (in the input data set) from which the moving average is to be calculated.
Samples defines how many surrounding values will be sampled when calculating the average for each
point in time.
Define Moving Average properties and select OK.
The element changes color from red to green, signifying that the element is operational. Even if you are
still going to add more elements to the KPI, it is recommended to test the operation of the KPI at this point.
Connect the KPI to the Output element. Then, select a measurement or several measurements from the
Measurements section on the Measurements page of the Workspace, right-click on the Workbench
background, and select Run Script from the popup menu.
For more information, see Chapter “Running and testing KPIs”.

Operation: Conversion
Conversion enables you to convert value formats between integer, real (that is, decimal) and string (that
is, text). If, for instance, a division is to be performed for data entries defined as integer values, it may be
useful to convert these values to real format before the division to avoid rounded and thus inaccurate
results. Also, if it is known that data entries have been falsely defined as being of string (that is, text) data
type but in reality consist of numbers, conversion can be used to convert the data type to numbers (that is,
either integer or real, depending on whether the entries contain integer or decimal values.)
To add a Conversion element to the KPI, drag and drop the Conversion element to the Workbench.
Connect the data set to the upper (that is, input) sockets of the Conversion element by pressing the left
mouse button down on the output socket of each data set and holding down the mouse button while
dragging a connector line from the data set output socket to the input socket of the Conversion element.
To define Conversion properties, right-click the Conversion element and select Properties from the popup
menu.

313
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The Conversion tab of the Properties dialog box opens.

Column defines the grid column (in the input data set) that contains the values that are to be converted.
Target type defines the target data type to which the data within the column (defined in Column) will be
converted. Possible target types include integer, real (that is, decimal), and string (that is, text).
After you have defined the properties of the Conversion element, click OK, and the element changes color
from red to green, signifying that the element is now operational. Even if you are still going to add more
elements to the KPI, it is recommended to test the operation of the KPI at this point. Connect the KPI to
the Output element. Then, select a measurement or several measurements from the Measurements
section on the Measurements page of the Workspace, right-click on the Workbench background, and
select Run Script from the popup menu.
For more information, see Chapter “Running and testing KPIs”.

Operation: State Machine

State Machine makes it possible to define and isolate specific states and transitions between them from a
single data set. It can be used, for instance, for examining the start and the end of particular events, the
duration of such events, values of other parameters before, during and after these events, and so forth.
For the state machine to work properly, it is recommended that the states and transitions are conceptually
mapped (for example in the form of a flow chart, with references to events that trigger the transitions and
define the boundaries of the states) beforehand based on grid data. Open the data set you are interested
in on a grid (for opening measurements on a grid, see Chapter “Viewing measurement data") and decide
which value, signaling message name, event_ID, and so on, is going to trigger which transition between
which states. For instance, a transition could be triggered by an Ec/N0 value or an L3 signaling Message
Name.
It is also very important that there is always a returning transition from each state in case the conditions of
the transitions to the state are not fulfilled anymore. This ensures accurate results and the correct
operation of the state machine.

314
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Ec/N0 difference
BLER >= 20 <0
Bad BLER
OK Missing
handover

BLER < 20 Ec/N0 difference > 0

BLER < 20

After the operation of the State Machine has been conceptually mapped (see flow chart above), drag and
drop State Machine to the Workbench.
With State Machine it is important that the input data set is sorted based on time. Open the data set you
are interested in on a grid and check whether it is sorted by time. If not, sort the input data set based on
time by adding a sort element (for example Ascending or Descending, see p. 325) between the input data
set and the State Machine.
Connect the data set to the upper (that is, input) sockets of the State Machine element by pressing the
mouse button down on the output socket of each data set and holding down the mouse button while
dragging a connector line from the data set output socket to the input socket of the State Machine
element.
Right-click the State Machine element and select Properties from the popup menu.
The State Machine tab of the Properties dialog box opens.

First, create all the required states. To create a new state, click Add.
The State dialog box opens.

315
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Enter a name for the state in the Name field and click OK. The State dialog box closes. To create another
state, click Add again in the Properties dialog box.

Note: Repeat these steps until you have created all the states you are going to need.
You should have at least an idle state (that is, a state that is not of interest to you)
and an active state (that is, a state that is in the focus of your analysis).

Next, select the idle state as the Initial State from the drop-down menu. To start defining transitions
between states, select one of the states and click Modify.

The State dialog box opens.

316
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Click Add.
The Transition dialog box opens.

Conditions displays the defined transition conditions.

Time trigger defines a transition that is triggered if the condition is not fulfilled within the defined time
period (in milliseconds).
Target defines the state to which the transition occurs.
Output defines a title for the state that will be displayed in the final output data set. If the field is left blank,
no output will be generated from this transition. For instance, with the idle state, leave this field blank. With
the state(s) that interest you, be sure to define a title for the state. The output data set generated based on
a state is defined as follows. When a transition occurs from the state x to state y, the point in time when
the transition occurred from state x to state y (start_time), the point in time when the transition occurred
from the state y to the next state, and the time in milliseconds that passed while in the state y
(time_interval) are recorded in the output data set. Depending on the application of the state machine,
different columns may be useful. When using state machine to create a custom event, the start_time is
usually needed in the results to indicate the timestamp when the event occurred. State machine can be
also used to calculate delay of certain procedure, for example radio bearer establishment in UMTS. In
such case, state machine must be defined so that there is a state that is entered when radio bearer
establishment begins, and the state is left when radio bearer is established. In this example, time_interval
output column directly indicates the delay of radio bearer establishment in milliseconds.
To define a condition, click Add.
The Condition dialog box opens.

317
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Left Column defines the grid column (in the input data set) that contains the values that are compared to a
value defined in Value, or another column defined in Right column, based on the rule defined in Operator.
Operator defines the rule that determines what kind of relationship there has to exist between the values
in Left Column and Right column/Value for the transition to be triggered (and for the present state to end).
For instance, with the L3 Signaling message (Left Column) = CALL ATTEMPT (Value), the transition to
the next state occurs when the value CALL ATTEMPT is found in the column L3 Signaling.
Right column allows you to define a column to which the values in the Left Column are compared. If
<Value> is selected, the Left Column value is compared to the value entered in the Value field. If
<Previous value> is selected, and used with the Operator != (that is, not equal to), the condition is
fulfilled when the value in the Left Column changes.
Value defines the value that triggers the transition, that is, the end of one state and the beginning of a new
one. To define the value as a variable (that is, the value is to be defined by the user each time the KPI is
run), enter the string {?<variable name>} to the value field. Note that each transition should have a unique
variable name.
After the condition has been defined, click OK.
The condition is displayed in the Transition dialog box.

To define another condition for the same transition, click Add again, and a new Condition dialog box
opens. Define condition properties in the Condition dialog box and click OK.
Both conditions are now displayed in the Transition dialog box.

To define the AND/OR relationship between the conditions, right-click on the AND element.

318
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Select AND or OR from the popup menu.

When you have defined all the conditions for the transition, click OK to return to the State dialog box.
Repeat the steps to define transitions and conditions from each state you have created.
Finally, when all the transitions and transition conditions have been defined, click OK in the Properties
dialog box. The State Machine element changes color from red to green, signifying that the element is
operational.
Even if you are still going to add more elements to the KPI, it is recommended to test the operation of the
KPI at this point. Connect the KPI to the Output element. Then, select a measurement or several
measurements from the Measurements section on the Measurements page of the Workspace, right-click
on the Workbench background, and select Run Script from the popup menu
The Select Measurement dialog box opens. Select a measurement from the list and click OK. For more
information, see Chapter “Running and testing KPIs”.
For a practical example, see “Use Case 27: Creating a KPI for dropped calls resulting from a missing
handover”.

Operation: Group By/Binning

The Group By element enables you to select multiple parameters from an input data set and group or bin
the rest of the data set based on these parameters. The Group By element also enables you to
simultaneously run multiple different aggregates based on any number of parameters contained within the
input data set. Thus, the Group By element can be used for both grouping input data and producing
parameter aggregates based on the input data. The available aggregate functions include Minimum,
Maximum, Average, Standard Deviation, Variance, Sum, Count, Mode, Median, Percentile, First, and
Last. For more information on aggregates, see Chapter “Aggregate Functions”.
First, combine the parameter data sets into a single data set by dragging and dropping a relevant
correlation element (for example All Values Within Time Range) to the Workbench. For more information
on correlation elements, see Chapter “Combining input data sets”.
With All Values Within Time Range, connect the primary parameter or data set to the leftmost input socket
of the All Values Within Time Range element. Connect the secondary parameters or data sets (that is, the
parameters whose values are to be examined from a time range determined by the primary parameter) to
the other input sockets of the element.
Next, add a Group By element to the KPI by dragging and dropping the element to the Workbench.
Connect the correlation element (that is, the data set that combines all the individual parameter data sets)
to the Group By element by pressing the left mouse button down on the output socket of the correlation
element and holding down the mouse button while dragging a connector line from the correlation element
output socket to the input socket of the Group By element.

319
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Right-click the Group By element and select Properties from the popup menu.
The Group By tab of the Properties dialog box opens.

Input displays all parameters within the input data set. From these parameters, you can select parameters
to the Group By and Aggregates categories.

320
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Group by defines how the parameter aggregates defined in Aggregates are to be grouped. For instance,
when calculating an Ec/N0 average per scrambling code, the aggregate function Average would have the
following settings: Group by: scrambling_code and Aggregates: ec/no (with the aggregate function
Average selected from the Function drop-down menu). To define a parameter as a basis for grouping,
select a parameter in the Input field and click the button. To remove a grouping parameter, select the
parameter in the Group by field and click the button. There can be multiple grouping parameters.
The order in which the grouping parameters are entered is also important, as every grouping parameter
hierarchically determines also the grouping of the subsequent grouping parameters.
Aggregates defines the aggregate parameters. To add a parameter to Aggregates, select a parameter in
the Input field and click the button. To define parameter aggregate properties, select the parameter
in the Aggregates field and define aggregate properties using Function, Weight by, and Result title. Once
the properties of a single parameter aggregate have been defined, start defining the next one by simply
selecting another parameter from the Input field and clicking the button. To remove a parameter
aggregate, select the parameter in the Aggregates field and click the button. For more information on
defining the properties of aggregate elements, see Chapter “Aggregate Functions”.
Function defines the aggregate function applied to the selected parameter in the Aggregates field.
Function properties are defined using Weight by and Result title.
Weight by defines the how the calculation is to be weighted, that is, by time, distance (based on GPS
coordinates), and so forth. Weight by is usually used only with the aggregate functions Average and
Count.

Note: Because the Nemo measurement file format is time-based as opposed to

sample-based (that is, a “sample” is created on a timeline only when changes occur
in the monitored parameters), the aggregate functions Average and Count should be
weighted by time in order to obtain accurate results.

Result title defines a title for the result. Without a title, the parameter aggregate will not be operational.
In the example below, three Ec/N0-based aggregates (ec/no minimum, maximum, and average) and three
tx_power -based aggregates (tx power minimum, maximum, and average) have been defined. These
have been grouped based on two parameters: bts_site_name and bts_cell_name. As the parameter
bts_site_name is the uppermost, all other parameters, that is, the grouping parameter bts_cell_name and
the six parameter aggregates, will be grouped based on bts_site_name in the resulting data set. In
addition to this, the parameter aggregates will also be grouped based on the parameter bts_cell_name, as
bts_cell_name is a grouping parameter.

321
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

With the settings above, the resulting data set will look like this.

Once the properties of the Group By element have been defined, select OK.
The Group By element changes color from red to green, which means that it is operational. Test the
operation of the KPI this far by connecting it to the Output element (even if you are still going to add more
elements). Then, select a measurement or several measurements from the Measurements section on the
Measurements page of the Workspace, right-click on the Workbench background, and select Run Script
from the popup menu.

322
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

For more information, see Chapter “Running and testing KPIs”.

Aggregate Functions
Aggregate functions include Minimum, Maximum, Average, Standard Deviation, Variance, Sum, Count,
Mode, and Median. Aggregates are simple functions used for producing minimum and maximum values,
averages, sums, and counts (number of samples, values, and so forth) from data sets. The same steps
are taken in defining all of them. To simultaneously produce multiple different aggregates based on
multiple parameter data sets, use the Group By element (for more information, see Chapter “Operation:
Group By”).
To add an aggregate element to the KPI, drag and drop the element to the Workbench.
Connect the data set(s) on which the calculation is to be performed to the upper (that is, input) sockets of
the aggregate element by pressing the left mouse button down on the output socket of each data set and
holding down the mouse button while dragging a connector line from the data set output socket to the
input socket of the aggregate element.

323
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Right-click the aggregate element and select Properties from the popup menu.
The Aggregate tab of the Properties dialog box opens.

Column defines the column on which the calculation is going to be performed. In most cases, the
parameter present in the list (such as bler and ec/no) is selected. The symbol * is selected only with the
aggregate function Count when null values are to be included in the count. If null values are to be left out
of the count, select the parameter.
Group by defines how the value type defined in Column is to be grouped. For instance, when calculating
an Ec/N0 average per scrambling code, the aggregate function Average would have the following settings:
Column: ec/no, Group by: scrambling_code, and Weight by: time.
Weight by defines the how the calculation is to be weighted, that is, by time, distance (based on GPS
coordinates), and others. Weight by is usually used only with the aggregate functions Average and Count.

Note: Because the Nemo measurement file format is time-based as opposed to

sample-based (that is, a “sample” is created on a timeline only when changes occur
in the monitored parameters), the aggregate functions Average and Count should be
weighted by time in order to obtain accurate results.

324
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Result title defines a title for the result. Without a title, the aggregate element will not be operational.
Define the properties of the aggregate function and click OK.
The element changes color from red to green, signifying that the element is operational. Even if you are
still going to add more elements to the KPI, it is recommended to test the operation of the KPI at this point.
Connect the KPI to the Output element. Then, select a measurement or several measurements from the
Measurements section on the Measurements page of the Workspace, right-click on the Workbench
background, and select Run Script from the popup menu.

For more information, see Chapter “Running and testing KPIs”.

Sort elements
The sort elements Ascending and Descending respectively change the order of values in a data set to
ascending and descending based on a user-defined value (for example time).
To add a sort element to the KPI, drag and drop the sort element (either Ascending or Descending) to the
Workbench.
Connect the data set to the upper (that is, input) sockets of the Ascending element by pressing the left
mouse button down on the output socket of each data set and holding down the mouse button while
dragging a connector line from the data set output socket to the input socket of the Ascending element.
To define a sorting value, right-click the Ascending sort element and select Properties from the popup
menu.

The Sort tab of the Properties dialog box opens.

325
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Select the sorting value from the drop-down menu and click OK.
The element changes color from red to green, signifying that the element is operational. Even if you are
still going to add more elements to the KPI, it is recommended to test the operation of the KPI at this point.
Connect the KPI to the Output element. Then, select a measurement or several measurements from the
Measurements section on the Measurements page of the Workspace, right-click on the Workbench
background, and select Run Script from the popup menu.
For more information, see Chapter “Running and testing KPIs”.

Filters
Filter makes it possible to filter out all the values from a data set that do not fulfill the defined condition(s).
For instance, a filter for Scrambling Code <= 2 would AND Scrambling Code > 0 would filter out all other
scrambling codes than 1 and 2.
To add a Filter element to the KPI, drag and drop the Filter element to the Workbench.
Connect the data set to the upper (that is, input) sockets of the Filter element by pressing the left mouse
button down on the output socket of each data set and holding down the mouse button while dragging a
connector line from the data set output socket to the input socket of the Filter element.
Right-click the Filter element and select Properties from the popup menu.

The Filter tab of the Properties dialog box opens.

326
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Click Add to add a filter.

The Condition dialog box opens.

Left column defines the grid column (in the input data set) that contains the values that are compared to
Value (or to another column if a column name is selected in the Right column drop-down menu instead
<Value>) based on the rule defined in Operator.
Operator defines the condition that determines which values are filtered out. For instance, with Scrambling
Code (Column) <= 21 (Value), all the values that do not fulfill the condition of being smaller than or equal
to 21 are filtered out.
Right column defines the data to which the data defined in the Left column is compared. <Previous value>
defines the filter condition based on a comparison between the value in the Left column and the value
preceding it (also in the Left column). <Value> enables you to enter a numerical limit value in the Value
field (see below). The drop-down menu displays also parameter names based on the parameter data
available in the input data set. Selecting one of the parameter names defines the comparison to be
performed between the data selected in the Left column and the data selected in the Right column.
Value defines the limit value that the Operator compares to the Left Column value. To define the value as
a variable (that is, the value is to be defined by the user each time the KPI is run), enter the string
{?<variable name>} to the Value field.
Define conditions and select OK.
The Properties dialog box now displays the defined condition.

327
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

To add another condition, click Add.

Alternatively, if no more conditions are required, click OK to return to the Workbench view.
The logic of the filter element follows that of a binary tree. Thus, one node can always have only two child
nodes.

If a third child node, that is, condition, is added, another level is automatically added to the tree.

Individual nodes can be dragged and dropped from one level or node to another.

328
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

To define AND/OR relationships between the nodes, right-click on a logical operator, that is, AND/OR, and
select AND or OR from the popup menu.

You are also able to select several filters and then group them by right-clicking the Group option from the
context menu. A line will appear in the left-hand corner to signify grouping. You can also ungroup filters by
right-clicking Ungroup from the context menu.
Once all the required conditions have been defined, click OK to return to the Workbench view.
The Filter element changes color from red to green, which means that it is operational.

329
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Test the operation of the KPI this far by connecting it to the Output element (even if you are still going to
add more elements). Then, select a measurement or several measurements from the Measurements
section on the Measurements page of the Workspace, right-click on the Workbench background, and
select Run Script from the popup menu.
For more information on the Select Measurement dialog box, see Chapter “Running and testing KPIs”.
For a practical example, see “Use Case 26: Creating complex filters using multiple conditions”.

Filters: Top-N, Bottom-N, Nth Best, Nth Worst, and Discard Worst

Top-N and Bottom-N list a defined number of best/worst entries in a predefined column of a data set,
filtering out all other data entries.
Nth Best and Nth Worst produce only the Nth best/Nth worst value entry from a defined column in a data
set.
Discard Worst discards X number of the worst entries from a predefined column of a data set,

Right-click the Discard Worst filter element and select Properties from the popup menu.
The Discard Worst tab of the Properties dialog box opens.

330
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Percent allows you to select what percentage of worst values is discarded

When High values is selected, X percent of high values for the selected parameter is discarded.
To add a filter element to the KPI, drag and drop the element to the Workbench.

Connect the data set(s) on which the calculation is to be performed to the upper (that is, input) sockets of
the filter element by pressing the left mouse button down on the output socket of each data set and
holding down the mouse button while dragging a connector line from the data set output socket to the
input socket of the filter element.

Right-click the filter element and select Properties from the popup menu.
The Nth tab of the Properties dialog box opens.

331
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

N enables you, depending on the filter, either to define the number of best/worst data entries to be listed
from a column in a data set, or to specify the position on such list that is of interest to you (that is, the Nth
best/worst value of a column in a data set).
Column defines the column from which the filter will, depending on the filter, produce either an N number
of best or worst value entries (that is, Top-N, Bottom-N) or the Nth best/worst value (that is, Nth Best, Nth
Worst). In most cases, the parameter presented on the list (such as bler and ec/no) is selected.
Group by defines how the value type defined in Column is to be grouped. For instance, to produce the
best two Ec/N0 values per each scrambling code, the Top-N filter would have the following settings: N: 2,
Column: ec/no, Group by: scrambling_code.
Define the properties of the filter and click OK.
The element changes color from red to green, signifying that the element is operational. Even if you are
still going to add more elements to the KPI, it is recommended to test the operation of the KPI at this point
by connecting it to the Output element. Then, select a measurement or several measurements from the
Measurements section on the Measurements page of the Workspace, right-click on the Workbench
background, and select Run Script from the popup menu.

For more information, see Chapter “Running and testing KPIs”.

Mathematical functions
Mathematical functions enable the performing of various arithmetic operations.
To add a mathematical function to the KPI, drag and drop a math element to the Workbench.
Connect the data set on which the calculation is to be performed to the upper (that is, input) sockets of the
math element by pressing the left mouse button down on the output socket of each data set and holding

332
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

down the mouse button while dragging a connector line from the data set output socket to the input socket
of the math element.
Right-click the math element and select Properties from the popup menu. The Operator tab of the
Properties dialog box opens.

Left column defines the parameter or data set on which the calculation will be performed.
Right column defines the value by which the Left column value is multiplied, divided, and so forth. Select
<Value> to manually define the value in the Right value field. Otherwise, select a value from the drop-
down menu.
Right value defines the value by which the Left column value is multiplied, divided, and so forth, when
<Value> is selected in Right column. To define the value as a variable (that is, the value is defined by the
user each time the KPI is run), enter the string {?<variable name>} to the value field.
Result title defines a title for the column displaying the results in the output data set.
The method of defining each of the mathematical operations is discussed below.
Addition (+), subtraction (-), multiplication (*), division (/), and modulation (%) (that is, calculating the
remainder of a division of one number by another) performs the selected operation on the data set defined
as the Left column in the element properties. Right column should be set to <value>. The value entered
into the Right value field defines the value which is added or subtracted from the Left column values, or by
which the Left column values are multiplied, divided, and so forth. For example, the Right value defined as
3 in a division (/) element would divide each of the values in the column (defined as the Left column) by 3.
Left (<<) and right (>>) bit shifting performs bit shift on the data set defined as the Left column in the
element properties. Right column should be set to <value>. The value entered into the Right value field
defines the number of digits shifted. For example, the Right value defined as 3 in a right (>>) bit shift
element would perform in the input data set a three-digit shift to the right.
The Ceiling function rounds a real number to the next larger integer based on each of the values in the
column defined as the Left column in the element properties. Right column should be set to <value>. The
value entered into the Right value field defines the rounding method, that is, 1 defines rounding to the next
integer, 10 defines rounding based on ten, and so forth.
The Floor rounds a real number to the next smaller integer based on each of the values in the column
defined as the Left column in the element properties. Right column should be set to <value>. The value
entered into the Right value field defines the rounding method, that is, 1 defines rounding to the next
integer, 10 defines rounding based on ten, and so forth.
The Log (logarithm) function calculates the logarithm of each of the values in the column defined as the
Left column in the element properties. Right column should be set to <value>. The value entered into the
Right value field defines the base for the logarithm.
Exponentiation performs exponentiation on each of the values in the column defined as the Left column in
the element properties. Right column should be set to <value>. The value entered into the Right value
field defines the exponent.
Root performs an Nth root (square root, cube root, and so forth) operation on each of the values in the
column defined as the Left column in the element properties. Right column should be set to <value>. The
value entered into the Right value field defines the root, for example 2, defines the operation as square
root.
The Round function performs rounding of a real number to the nearest integer based on each of the
values in the column defined as the Left column in the element properties. If the fraction part of the
number is <0.5, the number is rounded to the next smaller integer. If the fraction part is >=0.5, the number
is rounded to the next larger integer. Right column should be set to <value>. The value entered into the

333
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Right value field defines the rounding method, that is, 1 defines rounding to the next integer, 10 defines
rounding based on ten, and so forth.
Define the operation properties and click OK.
The element changes color from red to green, signifying that the element is operational. Even if you are
still going to add more elements to the KPI, it is recommended to test the operation of the KPI at this point
by connecting it to the Output element. Then, select a measurement or several measurements from the
Measurements section on the Measurements page of the Workspace, right-click on the Workbench
background, and select Run Script from the popup menu. For more information, see Chapter “Running
and testing KPIs”.

Time functions: Resample

As Nemo file format is event-based, samples with varying time ranges are logged only when the
parameter value changes. This means the sample interval is not constant. Resample allows the data to be
resampled at a periodic, user-definable time interval. Thus for instance 0.5-second and 1.3-second RSCP
samples with values -86 and -87 respectively, would constitute five samples of value -86 and 13 samples
with value -87 when resampled at a 100-millisecond interval.

Note: Resampling data using a sample period that is longer than the original sample
period can reduce the accuracy of the data and may cause some data to be lost.

To add a Resample element to the KPI, drag and drop the element to the Workbench.
Connect the data set to be resampled to the upper (that is, input) sockets of the Resample element by
pressing the left mouse button down on the output socket of the data set and holding down the mouse
button while dragging a connector line from the data set output socket to the input socket of the Resample
element.

Right-click the Resample element and select Properties from the popup menu.
The Resample tab of the Properties dialog box opens.

334
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Interval defines the interval at which the data set is to be resampled. The drop-down menu allows you to
define the unit of time as millisecond (ms) or second (s).
Define resampling interval and click OK.
The element changes color from red to green, signifying that the element is operational. Even if you are
still going to add more elements to the KPI, it is recommended to test the operation of the KPI at this point
by connecting it to the Output element. Then, select a measurement or several measurements from the
Measurements section on the Measurements page of the Workspace, right-click on the Workbench
background, and select Run Script from the popup menu.

For more information, see Chapter “Running and testing KPIs” on p. 337.

Time functions: Time Shift

Time Shift allows you to modify the timestamp and time range of the input dataset. For example, time shift
can be used to create a time range for event-type input that is logged as a point in time, such as Dropped
call. Defining a time range surrounding this point in time allows you to correlate the time range
surrounding the event with other parameters (for example ec/n0 best active set) to find out what the
values of the correlated parameters were not only at the time of the event but also before and after the
event.
To add a Time Shift element to the KPI, drag and drop the element to the Workbench.
Connect the data set(s) on which the time shift is to be performed to the upper (that is, input) sockets of
the Time Shift element by pressing the left mouse button down on the output socket of each data set and
holding down the mouse button while dragging a connector line from the data set output socket to the
input socket of the Time Shift element.

335
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Right-click the Time Shift element and select Properties from the popup menu.
The Time Shift tab of the Properties dialog box opens.

Time offset enables you to define an offset in relation to the point in time the event occurred. Selecting
backward from the drop-down menu defines the offset point before the event. Selecting forward from the
drop-down menu defines the offset point after the event. Define the distance of the offset point from the
event by entering an amount of time in the time field and by setting unit of time as either seconds (s) or
milliseconds (ms).
Duration allows you to define the direction and length of the time range from the offset point defined in
Time offset. Selecting backward from the drop-down menu defines the time range as ending to the offset
point defined in Time offset. Selecting forward from the drop-down menu defines the time range as
beginning from the offset point (defined in Time offset). Define the length of the time range from the offset
point (defined in Time offset) by entering an amount of time in the time field and by setting unit of time as
either seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
For example, to define a time range that begins 10 seconds before the event and ends 10 seconds after
the event, define Time offset as backward 10 s and Duration as forward 20 s.
Define the properties of the Time Shift and click OK.
The element changes color from red to green, signifying that the element is operational. Even if you are
still going to add more elements to the KPI, it is recommended to test the operation of the KPI at this point
by connecting it to the Output element. Then, select a measurement or several measurements from the
Measurements section on the Measurements page of the Workspace, right-click on the Workbench
background, and select Run Script from the popup menu.

336
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

For more information, see Chapter “Running and testing KPIs”.

Running and testing KPIs

To test the operation of the KPI, make sure all elements are of green color (operational), connect the last
element to the Output element. Select a measurement or several measurements from the Measurements
section on the Measurements page of the Workspace. Right-click on the Workbench background, and
select Run Script from the popup menu.

Once the script has been successfully run, there is a good opportunity for fine-tuning the KPI based on the
output, for instance, by adding a sort element to the KPI to make the results more explicit, defining even
more optimal states and triggers if using the state machine, or further filtering the data if the output still
contains irrelevant information. You can also hide irrelevant columns in the output data set by double-
clicking on the Output element and clearing the irrelevant columns on the Results tab of the Properties
dialog box. Ideally, the KPI should produce only the target data without any irrelevant information and in
as explicit form as possible.

Saving KPIs as components

To save the KPI as a component that can later be reused as part of more complex KPIs, right-click on the
Workbench background and select Save Component from the popup menu.

337
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Note: In order for the component to work properly as part of a KPI, it must be
operational and complete with Parameter and Output elements when saved.

The saved KPI component can be found from the menu structure on the right, under the menu item
Components.

To add a component to a KPI, drag and drop the component to the Workbench.
The Component Type dialog box opens. To open the component as a single element, select Single
component and click OK.

To open the component in multiple-element format that allows you to edit the properties of individual parts
of the component, select Multiple nodes (will reset model) and click OK.

For editing the properties of individual KPI elements, see the topic pertaining to the relevant KPI element
above.

Saving Custom KPIs

To save a KPI, right-click on the Workbench background and select Save from the popup menu. If the
script is not operational, the Save option will not be displayed in the popup menu.
The Analyze Wizard – Properties dialog box opens.

338
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Name defines a name for the KPI. Name is displayed in the Parameters view under the User item.
Title defines a title for the KPI. Title is displayed when the KPI has been dragged and dropped to the
Workbench.
Description defines a description for the KPI. The description of a KPI can be accessed by right-clicking
the KPI in the Parameters view and selecting Description from the popup menu.
Select Next.
The Analyze Wizard – Column Aliases dialog box opens.

In the Column Aliases dialog box you can define how the retrieved data is displayed in the various data
views. These settings are optional. Click Finish.
The saved custom KPI can be found in the Parameters view under the User item.

Reopening custom KPIs for editing

Go to the User item in the Parameters view. Select Tools | KPI Workbench in the ribbon bar to open the
KPI Workbench. Select the KPI you want to open for editing and drag and drop it to the Workbench.

339
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The Component Type dialog box opens. To open the component in a format that allows editing, select
Multiple nodes (will reset model) and click OK.

For editing the properties of individual KPI elements, see the topic pertaining to the relevant KPI element
above.

Defining KPI execution method and value constants

The Properties control in the bottom right corner of the screen allows you to define the KPI execution
method and value constants. If the intended purpose of the new KPI calls for switching the KPI execution
method, or if you wish to define value constants for use during the KPI creation process, these both
should be done before beginning to define the actual KPI.

KPI execution method:

You are able to select one of the following three KPI execution methods from the drop-down menu.

340
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Execute per file executes the query for each measurement file one at a time.
Execute per measurement executes the query on all measurement files belonging to the same
measurement session.
Execute per all executes the query simultaneously on all measurement files.

Defining value constants

To define values that can be referred to in scripts with a reference, right-click on the empty Constants field
in the bottom right corner of the screen and select Add Constant from the popup menu.

The Add Constant dialog box opens.

Name defines the reference string which is replaced by the constant value (for example 10000, see
screenshot below) in a script. In script, the usage of the reference string example is {$example}.
Click OK.
The Constants field now displays a row with the reference string example.

Click the content field (on the right of the reference string), enter the constant value (for example 1000),
and click Enter.
The constant example can now be referred to with the string {$example} when defining the properties of
various KPI elements. For example, when defining a filter element, the reference string can be used
instead of the actual value 10000.

Use Case 26: Creating complex filters using multiple conditions

Filter makes it possible to filter out all the values in a data set that do not fulfill a defined condition. For
instance, a filter for Scrambling Code <= 2 would AND Scrambling Code > 0 would filter out all other
scrambling codes than 1 and 2.

341
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The following example creates a filter that filters out all scrambling codes other than those belonging to
the ranges 12-21, 29-30, and 74-88. As a formula, the logic can be presented in the following format: (scr.
code<=21 AND scr. code > 11) OR (scr. code<=30 AND scr. code >= 29) OR (scr. code <=88 AND scr.
code >= 74).
To add a Filter element to the KPI, drag and drop the Filter element to the Workbench.
Connect the data set to the upper (that is, input) sockets of the Filter element by pressing the left mouse
button down on the output socket of each data set and holding down the mouse button while dragging a
connector line from the data set output socket to the input socket of the Filter element.
Right-click the Filter element and select Properties from the popup menu.

The Filter tab of the Properties dialog box opens.

Click Add to add a filter.

The Condition dialog box opens.

Define the first condition, for example scr. code <= 21, and select OK.
The Properties dialog box now displays the defined condition.

342
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

To add another condition, click Add.

The Condition dialog box opens.

Define the second condition, for example scr. code > 11, and select OK.
The Properties dialog box now displays the two conditions.

The first of the three value ranges, that is, 12-21, has now been defined. The logic of the filter element
follows that of a binary tree, and thus one node can always have only two child nodes. In other words, as
the first already defined condition pair takes up one of the two possible nodes on the highest level, there
can be only one available node left on that level. However, in order for us to be able to create a filter that
can accommodate also situations where there are values from only one of the ranges, three nodes of
equal importance are needed, one for each value range. We can accomplish this by adding the two
remaining condition pairs, that is, (scr. code<=30 AND scr. code >= 29) and (scr. code <=88 AND scr.
code >= 74) as children to the remaining free higher-level node. In practice, the original formula is

343
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

restructured in the following manner: (scr. code<=21 AND scr. code > 11) OR ((scr. code<=30 AND scr.
code >= 29) OR (scr. code <=88 AND scr. code >= 74)).
Next, the second higher-level node is created as a parent for the remaining two condition pairs. To create
the second higher level node, select one of the two existing conditions and click Add.

Define the condition, for example scr. code <= 30, in the Condition dialog box and click OK.
The new condition is automatically added as the second higher-level node. (This is because the node
selected before clicking Add in the previous phase already contained the maximum of two child nodes.)

As the filter should be able to accommodate also situations where there are values from only one of the
ranges, the logical operator between the two higher-level nodes must be changed to OR.

To change the logical operator, right-click on the operator and select the intended operator from the popup
menu.
The operator is changed to OR.

344
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Next, to complete the second condition pair, select the previously created condition, that is, scr. code <=
30, and click Add. Define the condition, that is, scr. code >= 29, in the Condition dialog box and click OK.
The second condition pair is completed.

Again, as the filter should be able to accommodate also situations where there are values from only one of
the ranges, the logical operator must be changed to OR.
To create the remaining condition pair, that is, 74-88, select one of the conditions in the latest pair and
click Add.

345
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Define the condition, that is, scr. code >= 74, in the Condition dialog box and click OK.
A new level is added automatically to the binary tree.

Next, to complete the third condition pair, select the previously created condition, that is, scr. code >= 74,
and click Add. Define the condition, that is, scr. code <=88, in the Condition dialog box and click OK.
The properties of the filter element are now complete.

Click OK to return to the Workbench view.

The Filter element changes color from red to green, which means that it is operational.

346
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Test the operation of the KPI this far by connecting it to the Output element (even if you are still going to
add more elements). Select a measurement or several measurements from the Measurements section on
the Measurements page of the Workspace. Right-click on the Workbench background, and select Run
Script from the popup menu. For more information, see Chapter “Running and testing KPIs”.

Use Case 27: Creating a KPI for dropped calls resulting from a missing
handover
This use case describes the steps for creating a KPI for dropped calls resulting from a missing handover.
To open the KPI Workbench, select Tools | KPI workbench from the ribbon bar.
Step 1: Planning and Adding Parameters
First you need to consider what parameters would be the best indicators of a missing handover. This sort
of situations can occur for instance in downtown areas where a corner of a building may instantly block
the coverage of the serving cell, giving it no time to signal the next cell of a handover. Typically, when a
missing handover occurs, two parameters are affected almost simultaneously: block error ratio value rises
and the Ec/N0 value of the active set falls below that of the monitored set. With the latter case, you need
to consider what kind of calculation and which parameters are needed to produce this sort of value.
Thus, the relevant parameters are BLER and, to be able to compare the Ec/N0 value of the active set to
the absolute best Ec/N0 value of both the active and monitored sets, both Ec/N0 best active set and
Ec/N0 1. best. In other words, if Ec/N0 1. best is better than Ec/N0 best active set, the handover has not
occurred. The value can be produced by subtracting Ec/N0 1. best from Ec/N0 active set. In other words,
if the result of the subtraction of Ec/N0 1. best from Ec/N0 best active set is smaller than zero, a better
Ec/N0 value exists than that of the active set.
Isolating missing handovers from the data will be necessary in order for it to be possible to correlate
missing handovers with dropped calls. This is best achieved by using the state machine. Missing
handover will be defined as a state and thus isolated from the data. In addition to this state, the operation
of the state machine requires also an idle state to make the transitions from state to state possible. As
Bad BLER values by necessity precede missing handovers, a state for Bad BLER might also be useful.
Thus, the state machine will use three states: OK, Bad BLER, and Missing handover.
For the transitions to occur from state to state, you have to decide what values will trigger them. In other
words, what value is considered good, bad, etc. and which transition it will trigger. For the purposes of this
use case, a BLER value that is greater or equal to 20 is considered bad and an Ec/N0 difference that is
smaller than zero is considered to signify a missing handover.
Thus, the transition from the normal state OK to the missing handover prerequisite state Bad BLER should
be triggered by a bad BLER value (that is, when BLER is greater or equal to 20). For the transition to
occur from Bad BLER to the actual Missing handover, also the Ec/N0 difference will have to be smaller

347
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

than zero. If, however, either one of the trigger values improves, the state machine should return to the
relevant state. Thus three more transitions are needed, one for returning from the state Bad BLER if BLER
improves, one for returning from the state Missing Handover to Bad BLER if the Ec/N0 difference value
improves but the BLER value remains bad, and one to return from the state Missing handover straight to
the state OK if BLER improves.
It is very important that there is always a returning transition from each state in case the conditions of the
transitions to the state are not fulfilled anymore. This ensures accurate results and the correct operation of
the state machine.
It is also recommended to always plan the operation of the state machine in the form of a flow chart,
complete with trigger values. See an example below.

Ec/N0 difference
<0
BLER >= 20

OK Bad BLER Missing

handover

BLER < 20 Ec/N0 difference > 0

BLER < 20

Once the missing handovers have been isolated from the data using the state machine, it will be
necessary to correlate the missing handover events with the parameter Call dropped to find out if any of
the dropped calls in the data occurred while a handover was missing.
From the Parameters view, drag and drop the parameters BLER, Ec/N0 best active and Ec/N0 Nth best to
the Workbench.

When you drag and drop the parameter Ec/N0 Nth best to the Workbench, the Analyze Wizard – Filters
dialog box opens.

348
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Make sure the Value field contains the value 1 and select Finish.
Step 2: Combining raw data sets
Next, as the mathematical function Subtraction requires the two values between which the operation takes
place to be found within the same data set, to calculate the Ec/N0 difference, the two parameter data sets
have to be combined into a single data set. As we are interested in two Ec/N0 values that occur
simultaneously, we can use the correlation All Values Within Time Range to combine the two data sets.
From the Correlations menu, drag and drop All Values Within Time Range to the Workbench and drag
connector lines from the output sockets of the parameters Ec/N0 best active set and Ec/N0 Nth best to its
input sockets by holding the left mouse button down.

Step 3: Adding Operations

From the Math menu, drag and drop Subtraction (-) to the Workbench and connect All Values Within
Time Range to it.

349
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Right-click on the Subtraction element and select Properties from the popup menu. The Properties dialog
box opens.

From the Left column drop-down menu, select Ec/N0. From the Right column drop-down menu, select 1.
best Ec/N0. Leave the Right value field empty. Type Ec/N0 difference to the Result title field.
At this point, there are two input data sets: BLER and Ec/N0 difference. To combine these data sets into a
single data set, you need to select a correlation method that does not remove any data from either of the
sets, namely Union.
From the Joins menu, drag and drop Union to the Workbench and connect BLER and Ec/N0 difference to
it.

350
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

To test the output at this point, connect the Union element to the Output element. Then, select a
measurement or several measurements from the Measurements section on the Measurements page of
the Workspace. Right-click on the Workbench background, and select Run Script from the popup menu.
The output grid opens as a new workbook.

351
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

From the output grid, it is evident that although the two tables and their time columns have been merged,
the rows are not ordered by time. As most operations require the input data to be ordered by time, you
need to sort the data set before performing any further operations on it.
From the Sorting menu, drag and drop the Ascending sort element to the Workbench and connect the
Union element to it.

352
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Right-click on the Ascending sort element and select Properties from the drop-down menu.
The Properties dialog box opens.

Select time from the Column drop-down menu and click OK.
The Ascending sort element is now operational.

353
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

To test the output again at this point, connect the Ascending sort element to the Output element. Then,
select a measurement or several measurements from the Measurements section on the Measurements
page of the Workspace. Right-click on the Workbench background, and select Run Script from the popup
menu.

354
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The output grid is now ordered according to time.

From the Operations menu, drag and drop State Machine to the Workbench and connect the Ascending
sort element to it.

355
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Right-click on the State Machine element and select Properties from the drop-down menu.
The Properties dialog box opens.

Click Add. The State dialog box opens.

356
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

To create a state called OK, type OK to the Name field and click OK.
In the Properties dialog box, click Add again. In the State dialog box, type Bad BLER to the Name field
and click OK.
Again, in the Properties dialog box, click Add. In the State dialog box, type Missing handover to the
Name field and click OK.

All states have now been created. As the state OK serves the function of the idle state in this use case,
select the state OK from the Initial state drop-down menu. This defines OK as the starting point for the
operation of the state machine.
Next, define a condition that has to be fulfilled in order for the state machine to move from the Initial State
(that is, the state OK) to the state Bad BLER. To define transitions from the state OK, select OK from the
States field, and click Modify.
An empty State dialog box opens. The name of the state, that is, OK, is displayed in the Name field.

357
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

To create a transition from the state OK to another state, click Add.

The Transition dialog box opens.

Next, define the target state (that is, the state to which the transition occurs) by selecting Bad BLER from
the Target drop-down menu. Because the only relevant state in terms of the KPI is Missing handover and
the output should not include any data from the state OK, leave the Output field empty.
The Condition dialog box opens.

Next, define the condition that causes the transition to occur from the state OK to the state Bad BLER. For
the purposes of this use case, it has been decided that for a BLER value to be considered bad, it has to
be 20 or more. To define this as a transition condition, select BLER from the Column drop-down menu,
select >= (greater or equal) from the Operator drop-down menu, and type the value 20 to the Value field.
When the condition has been defined, click OK to return to the Transition dialog box.
The condition bler >= 20 is now displayed in the Conditions field.

358
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

As there is no need to define any more conditions for the transition from the state OK to the state Bad
BLER, click OK in the Transition dialog box to return to the State dialog box.
In the State dialog box, the transition to Bad BLER is now displayed in the Transitions field.

As there is no need to define any more transitions from the state OK, click OK in the State dialog box to
return to the Properties dialog box.
To define transitions from the state Bad BLER, select Bad BLER in the Properties dialog box, and click
Modify.

359
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Again, an empty State dialog box opens. The name of the state, Bad BLER, is displayed in the Name
field.

Two transitions are needed from the state Bad BLER: one that returns to the initial state OK in case the
BLER value is less than 20 again, and another to move from the state Bad BLER to the state Missing
handover if the Ec/N0 difference between the best active set and the absolute best set is less than 0.
To create a new transition, click Add in the State dialog box.
The Transition dialog box opens.

Next, define the target state (that is, the state to which the transition occurs) by selecting Missing
handover from the Target drop-down menu. Because the only relevant state in terms of the KPI is
Missing handover and the output should not include any data from the state Bad BLER, leave the Output
field empty. Click Add.
The Condition dialog box opens.

Define the condition for the transition from the state Bad BLER to the state OK. Select BLER from the
Column drop-down menu, select < (smaller than) from the Operator drop-down menu, and type the value
20 to the Value field.
When the condition has been defined, click OK to return to the Transition dialog box.
The condition bler < 20 is now displayed in the Conditions field.

360
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Click OK to return to the State dialog box.

The transition from Bad BLER to OK is displayed in the Transitions field of the State dialog box.

Click Add to add a transition from Bad BLER to Missing handover.

The Transition dialog box opens.

Next, define the target state (that is, the state to which the transition occurs) by selecting Missing
handover from the Target drop-down menu. Because the only relevant state in terms of the KPI is
Missing handover and the output should not include any data from the state Bad BLER, leave the Output
field empty. Click Add.
The Condition dialog box opens.

Define the condition for the transition from the state Bad BLER to the state Missing handover. Select
Ec/N0 difference from the Column drop-down menu, select < (smaller than) from the Operator drop-down
menu, and type the value 0 to the Value field.
When the condition has been defined, click OK to return to the Transition dialog box.

361
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The Transition dialog box opens with the condition Ec/N0 difference displayed in the Conditions field of
the Transition dialog box.

As there is no need to define any more conditions for transitions from the state Bad BLER, click OK in the
Transition dialog box to return to the State dialog box.
In the State dialog box, the transitions to the states Bad BLER and Missing handover are now displayed in
the Transitions field.

As there is no need to define any more transitions from the state Bad BLER, click OK in the State dialog
box to return to the Properties dialog box.
To define transitions from the state Missing handover, select Missing handover in the Properties dialog
box and click Modify.

The State dialog box opens.

362
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Two transitions are needed from the state Missing handover: one that returns to the initial state OK in
case the BLER value is less than 20 again, and another to move from the state Missing handover to the
state Bad BLER if the Ec/N0 difference between the best active set and the absolute best set is greater or
equal to 0.
To create a new transition, click Add.
The Transition dialog box opens.

Define the target state (that is, the state to which the transition occurs) by selecting OK from the Target
drop-down menu. As the output should include the data from the state Missing handover, enter the name
Missing handover to the Output field.
Once the target state has been defined, click Add to add a condition for the transition.
The Condition dialog box opens.

Define the transition from the state Missing handover to the state OK. Select BLER from the Column drop-
down menu, select < (smaller than) from the Operator drop-down menu, and type the value 20 to the
Value field. Once the condition has been defined, click OK to return to the State dialog box.
The condition bler < 20 is now displayed in the Conditions field of the Transition dialog box.

363
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

When the transition has been defined, click OK to return to the State dialog box.
The transition to OK is now displayed in the Transitions field of the State dialog box.

As one more transition is needed from the state Missing handover, click Add in the State dialog box.
The Transition dialog box opens.

Define the target state (that is, the state to which the transition occurs) by selecting Bad BLER from the
Target drop-down menu. As the output should include the data from the state Missing handover, enter the
name Missing handover to the Output field.
Next, click Add to define the condition for the transition from the state Missing handover to the state Bad
BLER.
The Condition dialog box opens.

364
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Select Ec/N0 difference from the Column drop-down menu, select >= (greater or equal) from the
Operator drop-down menu, and enter the value 0 to the Value field. When the condition has been defined,
click OK to return to the Transition dialog box.

Click OK to return to the State dialog box.

The transition to Bad BLER is now displayed in the Transitions field of the State dialog box.

Click OK to return to the Properties dialog box. Click OK in the Properties dialog box. The State Machine
element is now operational.
The states where the BLER value rises and a handover is missing have now been isolated. To find the
events where missing handovers lead to dropped calls, we need to add the parameter Call dropped to the
KPI.
Drag and drop the parameter Call dropped from the Parameters view to the KPI Workbench.

365
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

As the only relevant dropped calls in terms of the KPI are the ones that occur during the state Missing
handover, the most optimal correlation for combining these two data sets is All Values Within Time Range.
Drag and drop an All Values Within Time Range element from the Correlations menu to the KPI
Workbench. For the output data set to include all Missing handover time ranges and only those dropped
call events that occur during these time ranges, the state machine has to be the primary data set and the
parameter Call dropped the secondary one.
Connect the state machine to the leftmost input socket of the All Values Within Time Range element.
Connect the parameter Call dropped to the next socket. Finally, connect the All Values Within Time Range
element to the Output element.

366
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Step 4: Running and Testing the KPI

To run the KPI, select a measurement or several measurements from the Measurements section on the
Measurements page of the Workspace. Right-click on the Workbench background, and select Run Script
from the popup menu. The final output includes only the rows with Missing handover events from the
measurement data, and if there are Call dropped events within the time range of the Missing handover
events, these will be displayed as well.

367
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

To save the custom KPI for later use, right-click on the Workbench background and select Save.
The Analyze Wizard – Properties dialog box opens.

Enter Dropped calls resulting from missing handover to the Name and Title fields and click Next.
The Analyze Wizard - Column Aliases dialog box opens. Click Finish. The KPI can now be found in the in
the Parameters view under the User item.

368
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

12 Other tasks

Editing color sets

Color sets are used to color the measurement route and BTS icons on a map based on parameter values.
This makes it easier to spot problem areas on a map. Color sets can also be used in grid and numerical
data views to highlight certain data. To edit and create color sets, select Tools | Color set editor.
In the Color Set Editor dialog box, you will see a list of all existing color sets. You can sort the color sets
by selecting Type and Group. You can also search for a color set by its name. To edit an existing color
set, double-click on the color set.

In the Color Set Properties dialog box you can edit the settings for each color set. Click Modify.

Name and Short Name identify the

color set.

Select from the Groups list the

items with which the color set will
be associated.

Type defines what kind of data the

color set is used with, numerical,
gradient, or string. The Groups and
Type settings can be used to sort
the color sets in the Color Set
Editor dialog box.

Values table displays the different

value ranges and the colors
associated with them.

369
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Importing color sets

It is possible to import color sets from Nemo Outdoor. Select File | Settings (Import). In the Open dialog
box, browse the color set file (.csf) you want to import and click Open. In the Import Settings dialog box,
select the color sets that you would like to import and click OK.

The imported color sets are added in the Color Set Editor.

Automatic generation of color sets

With Nemo Analyze it is also possible to generate color sets automatically from parameter values that
appear in the measurement file. First go to the Maps page in the Workspace by clicking the icon, and
open a blank map.
On the Measurements page in the Workspace, click on a measurement file. From the Parameters view,
select a parameter that you want to plot on the map, for example, RX level full, and drag it on the map.
A route is drawn on the map and it is colored by default by using color rotation.

Right-click on the map and select Generate Color Set from the popup menu.
In the Color Set Wizard, select the parameter that you dragged on the map, for example, RX level full. In
the Column field, select the parameter again. Click Next.

370
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Type a name and a short name for the new color set. Also define in which group the color set will be
added. Finally, click Finish. The new color set is generated.

To apply the new color set on the route, right-click on the route and select Properties. In the Color page,
select Based on value as Mode and then the color set you created (for example, RX level full 2(dBm))
and the corresponding parameter in the Scheme field (for example, RX level full). Click OK.

371
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The color set is applied to the route. The color legend on the right displays the colors and the
corresponding values.

With automatic color sets it is possible to highlight a value on the map. Select a value on the color legend
by clicking on the value. The value is highlighted on the map. You can change the highlighted value by
clicking on another value.

372
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The color legend information can also be exported to a text file. Right-click on the Color Legends panel
and select Export To Text File from the menu. The file can be named and saved as a .txt file.

Use Case 28: Automatic generation of color set for a value range
This use case explains how to generate a color set automatically for a value range. This functionality is
particularly useful when creating color sets for, for example, scrambling code, cell ID, and BSIC.
First, open a blank map from the Maps page in the Workspace by double-clicking on a map in the Loaded
view. It is assumed that the map has been loaded to the Workspace from the Map Folder.
Next, select a measurement file from the Workspace. From the Parameters view, select a parameter that
you want to plot on the map, for example, Cell identification, and drag it on the map.

A route is drawn on the map. The route is colored by default by using color rotation. If the route appears
as symbols, right-click on the route, select Properties, and on the Route page select Line in the Draw
Mode field. Click OK.

373
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Next, right-click on the Color Legend in the side panel. Click on Editor and select Add…. In the Color Set
Properties dialog box, click Add Range.

In the Add Range dialog box, you can define a value range for a new color set, and the interval between
the values. Here the value range is from 116731 to 117419 with an interval of 1. Click OK.

The new value range for the color set has been created. Now the various parameter values show more
distinctly on the map due to the user-defined value range.

374
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Use Case 29: Creating a color set

This use case describes the steps for creating a new color set.
Select Tools | Color set editor. In the Color Set Editor, click Add.

An empty Color Set Properties dialog box opens. Define first the settings at the top of the dialog box.
Next, start defining the value ranges and colors. Click Add.

In the Range Properties dialog box, select the color and then the upper and lower limits of the value
range. You can also write a description for the value range. Click OK.

375
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Repeat the step until you have a complete set of values. Click OK and the new color set is added to the
Color Set Editor dialog box.

376
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Use Case 30: Creating and applying a color set on map

This use case describes the steps for creating and applying a color set on a map.
Select Tools | Color set editor. In the Color Set Editor, click Add. An empty Color Set Properties dialog
box opens. Type a name for the color set, and select in which group it is added. Select gradient as the
type. Click Add.

Next define the string that will be colored. In the Value Properties dialog box, select a color and then the
minimum value for the parameter. You can also write a description for the value. Click OK. Repeat the
step for the maximum value.
Note that you should always define the values from lowest to highest. Otherwise the
color set will not work properly. If the values are not in the correct order Nemo
Analyze will confirm in a separate popup whether you wish to continue.

The defined values and colors are displayed in the Color Set Properties dialog box.

377
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

When the color set values are set, click OK and the new color set is added to the Color Set Editor dialog
box. Click Close.

Open a blank map, for example from the Maps page in the Workspace, and on the Measurements page of
the Workspace, select a measurement in the workspace. Type in Ec/N0 best active set in the Parameters
view filter field, and drag the parameter on the map. The measurement route appears on the map if the file
contains location data.

378
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Right-click on the route and select Properties.

In the Properties dialog box, go to the Color page and select Based on value as the Mode. In the
Parameter field, select Ec/N0 best active set and in the Color set field, select the EcNo gradient color
set that was created earlier. Click OK.

The route will be colored based on the set of rules defined in the new color set.

379
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Use Case 31: Creating and applying a color set in grid

This use case describes the steps for creating and applying a color set in a grid.
Select Tools | Color set editor. In the Color Set Editor, click Add. An empty Color Set Properties dialog
box opens. Type a name for the color set, and select in which group it is added. Make sure that the name
of the new color set is not already in use. Select string as the Type. Click Add.

380
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Next define the string that will be colored. In the String Properties dialog box, type in the string of text that
will be colored and select the color used. You can also write a description for the string.

Click OK.
The new string is displayed in the Values field of the Color Set Properties dialog box.

Click OK and the new color set is added to the Color Set Editor dialog box.

381
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Open a Layer3 signaling grid. Select a device in the Workspace, and type L3 in the Parameters view filter
field. Right-click the L3 signaling parameter, and select Open in | Grid. A workbook containing L3
signaling data in a grid is opened.

382
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Right-click on the grid, and select Properties.

From the Color Sets tab of the Properties dialog box, select the column Message Name and from the
drop-down menu the previously created color set. Click OK.

The signaling messages defined in the color set are colored.

383
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Managing Workspace with Projects

Project manager helps to focus on the subset of your data.
To open Project manager, select File | Project Manager from the ribbon bar.

To add project, click Add. The Add Project dialog box opens. Define a name for the project and click OK.
The project will appear in the Project drop-down menu. To remove or rename the project, click Remove or
Rename.

384
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

By clicking Add, you are able to add folders, measurements, BTS files, maps, reports, and workbooks to
the user workbook folders in the project.
By clicking Options, the Project Folder Options dialog box opens, allowing you to select the dynamic
update option. Dynamic projects allow creating projects that always show log files from the last six
months, selected IMEIs, and selected area. Files that belong to a project can be selected based on similar
search logic as in search folders. For example, all files measured inside a polygon area, all files with
dropped calls or all files of specific MNC can be automatically included in a project.

385
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

To open a project you have created, select View and click on the arrow next to the Project manager
button to display a list of all projects and select the project you want to open. If you select No Project,
Nemo Analyze will stop using the Project Manager feature and it will display all measurements and other
items in the user interface. Note that when No Project is selected, it is not possible to modify project
contents using the Project Manager.

Managing users and user groups

The User manager enables you to manage users and user groups (Nemo Analyze Enterprise Edition).
To open User manager, select Tools | User manager from the ribbon bar.
To create a new user, open the Groups pulldown menu to select the group to which you want to add a
new user. Click Add.

386
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The New User dialog box opens.

Name defines the user name.

Password defines the password for the user account.
To set a new password for a user, select the user in the Users field, and click Modify.
The Modify User dialog box opens. Type a new password in the Password field and click OK.
To delete a user, select the user in the Users field, and click Delete.

User groups
The available user groups include Administrators, Users, and Power Users.
Administrators have unrestricted rights, including access to the cleanup function.
Users do not have delete rights and are allowed only to make queries and load files into the database.
Users are allowed to view all data and alter minor elements of a file, for example configure notifications.
Power Users have delete rights, that is, they are allowed to delete measurement and BTS files. Otherwise
the rights of the Power Users are identical to those of the Users.
To add users to a group, open the Groups pulldown menu to select the group to which you want to add a
new user and click Add. The user you added appears on the Available field.

387
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Select the user(s) on the Available field you want to add into the group and click the > icon. The user(s)
you selected is now in the group and is displayed on the Members field.

To remove users from the group, select the user(s) you wish to remove on the Members field and click the
< icon. The user(s) you removed is displayed on the Available field.

Viewing Server statistics

To access server statistics (Nemo Analyze Enterprise Edition), select Tools | Server statistics from the
ribbon bar.
Server statistics are displayed in the Server Statistics dialog box.

388
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

To refresh the statistics, right-click on the statistics view and select Refresh from the popup menu.
To enable automatic statistics updates (updated every 5 seconds), right-click on the statistics view and
select Poll from the popup menu.

Editing Operator Settings

Select Tools | Operators | Operators from the ribbon bar to manage operator settings. These settings
are used as the basis of operations such as statistics per operator.

The Mobile Operator list is displayed.

To edit the properties of an operator, or to add a new operator to the list, right-click on the operator, and
select Modify or Add from the popup menu.

389
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The Operator Configuration dialog box opens.

Operator name defines the operator name.

Mobile country code defines the operator’s MCC.
Mobile network code defines the operator’s MNC.

Editing CDMA operator settings

Select Tools | Operators | CDMA Operators from the ribbon bar to manage CDMA operator settings.
These settings are used as the basis of operations such as statistics per operator.

The CDMA Mobile Operator list is displayed.

To edit the properties of an operator, or to add a new operator to the list, right-click on the operator, and
select Modify or Add from the popup menu.

390
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The Operator Configuration dialog box opens.

Operator name defines the operator name.

Sid defines the system identification number.

Configuring notification icons

Nemo Analyze allows you to configure notification icons for all measurement events. These icons can be
displayed in graphs and maps to alert you when something interesting happens. See viewing notification
icons in maps and viewing notification icons in graphs. The notification icons can be configured using the
Parameters view. Alternatively, notifications can also be configured using the Notification Configuration
functionality.

Configuring notifications using the Parameters view

The parameter-specific notification icons are displayed in connection with the relevant parameter (for
example with the parameter Call connected) in the Parameters view. The parameters that have not
been assigned with a notification icon are indicated by the icon. To change the default icon of a
parameter, right-click on the parameter and select Change Defaults from the popup menu.

391
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The Change Defaults dialog box opens.

To select a new notification icon, click the browse (…) button.

The Open dialog box opens. Select the new notification icon and click Open.
The Image field of the Change Defaults dialog box now displays the directory path of the selected icon.

Click OK to set the selected icon as the default notification icon for the parameter. The icon is displayed in
the Parameters view in connection with the parameter.

392
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Notification configuration
You can access the Notification Configuration tool by selecting Tools | Notifications.
In the Notification Configuration dialog box you can define icons for all measurement events. These icons
can be displayed on graphs and maps to alert you when something interesting happens. There are a
number of default notifications for you to choose from but you can also modify the default notifications, or
make new ones. Select a notification from the list and click Modify.

In the Notification Properties dialog box, browse a new bitmap in the Icon field and click OK.

Configuring system settings

In the Options dialog box you can make some general system settings. Select View | Options to open the
dialog box.

Options – Environment
12.9.1.1 General
Hide advanced SQL functionality hides and displays advanced SQL features that are not needed in basic
use.
Change ribbon contents dynamically, when selected ribbon contents are changed dynamically, according
which functionalities are being used.

393
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

When the Maintain workspace state when application is closed and restarted option is selected, also items
in the workspace that are not in the database, that is, maps and reports, are loaded when you start Nemo
Analyze.
When the Clear query clipboard when application is closed option is selected, the Query Clipboard is
emptied when you exit Nemo Analyze.
When a number of minutes is entered into the Auto-save default workspace every X minutes field, all open
workbooks are auto-saved as the default workspace on regular intervals. This prevents loss of work, for
example in the event of a system crash, as the latest auto-saved workbooks are always automatically
reopened in the program startup. To prevent the default workspace from opening during startup, hold
down the Shift key.
Auto save user settings automatically saves user settings defined under Options.
When Auto set synchronizer source is selected, once running a workbook on a measurement, the
measurement is automatically set as synchronizer source.
When the Remember parameter favorites state option is selected, Nemo Analyze remembers the settings
for parameters defined as favorites.
When the Display mobile type for device is selected, mobile type for the device is displayed in the
measurement tree.
When the Display device label is selected, device label is displayed in the measurement tree.
JPEG compression quality defines the quality of images exported from Nemo Analyze. You can save
workbooks as images by selecting Edit | Send as Image to.
Image to clipboard fixed size enables you to define a fixed size for pictures placed on the Clipboard.
When the Maintain aspect ratio in Powerpoint export is selected the original workbook aspect ratio is
maintained when exported in PowerPoint.

12.9.1.2 Layout
Layout defines the layout and position options for workspace and side panel.

12.9.1.3 Default paths

Default paths defines the default locations of different types of files. Nemo Analyze will automatically look
for the defined file types in these folders.
When Nemo Analyze is connected to Nemo Server it is possible to save worksbooks on a network drive
with the Shared option. The path for the shared files in the network drive is defined in Options |
Environment | Default Paths | Shared paths | Resources.

12.9.1.4 Proxy
Proxy defines the proxy server, username and password. This setting may be needed when using Live
maps.

12.9.1.5 Presentation

Throughput defines the unit of measure for throughputs

Base station identification code defines the number format for base station identification codes.
Cell identification defines in which mode the parameters are presented.
Distance defines the unit of measure for distance.
Velocity defines the unit of measure for velocity.
Others displays other possible presentation formats.
Hide date from timestamps option hides and displays the date in timestamps.
Limit number of decimal digits in UI to defines the maximum number of decimal digits displayed.

12.9.1.6 Drill-down
Drill Down enables you to set a time range from which log entries are to be included in a drill-down Before
and After a selected event in the measurement data.

12.9.1.7 Printing
Header title is displayed at the top of the page when you print views from Nemo Analyze.

12.9.1.8 Email
Server defines the SMTP server IP address.
Port defines the SMTP port.
Username defines the SMTP server username.
Password defines the SMTP server password.

394
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

From defines the sender email address.

To defines the recipient email address for notification emails sent by the event scheduler.
When Use SSL is selected, emails are sent using an encrypted connection.
Test sends a test email from the defined sender email address to the defined recipient email address.

Options – Database
12.9.2.1 Database
The Server control enables you to switch between different database configurations and databases (for
example between the standalone database and the database server). It also enables you to Add, Delete,
and Modify configurations. Analyze-Local is the default standalone database of Nemo Analyze.
Modify opens the Add Server dialog box with existing database settings, enabling you to modify an
existing database configuration.
Add opens the Add Server dialog box, enabling you to define a new database configuration.
The Additional data sources control enables you to configure connections to other ODBC databases on
your computer. It enables you to Add, Delete, and Modify configurations.
Title defines the title of the server.
Server host defines the server’s IP address.
ODBC port defines the ODBC port.
Server port defines the server port. By default, Nemo Analyze uses the server port 12001.
User defines the username.
Password defines the password.
Name selects the data source.
User defines the username.
Password defines the password.

12.9.2.2 Queries
Auto-hide columns from queries option hides query data that is not relevant.
When the Enable query memory usage warning option is selected, Nemo Analyze will warn you when the
query memory usage exceeds the Threshold value limit.
When selected, Allow queries to be run in parallel allows you to enable queries to be run in parallel and
select the maximum amount of parallel queries.
Allow overlapping when joining measurements, when selected, enables Nemo Analyze to join files even if
they are overlapping in time. This feature may be needed when processing TEMS log files that have been
cut to multiple adjacent log files during the measurement. Even though they are adjacent, there might be
an overlap of a few seconds between consecutive log files that will prevent joining the files if this option is
not selected.
Scope filtering for reports and workbooks, when selected, opens a scope filter dialog for each report and
workbook.

12.9.2.3 Loader
Add description to loaded, when set to Prompt user or Project name, automatically adds or prompts the
user to add a description to a new measurement file when it is loaded to the database. This feature is
useful if the description field is used to filter or categorize log files later on in post processing.
Auto rename duplicate file names, when selected, automatically renames a file if the filename is the same
as of an existing filename in the database.

12.9.2.4 Guard
Guard defines the startup delay in seconds.

Options – Nemo Cloud

Under Nemo Cloud connections you can add, modify and delete Nemo Cloud connections. Configure
Nemo Cloud connection username and test the connection by clicking Test Nemo Cloud Connection.
Note that you can create several connections.

Options – Color
The Palette is used, for example, to determine colors for neighbor-style graphs and routes.

395
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Clicking on a color enables you to select either a basic color or to define custom colors.
After a new color palette is created the same color palette file can be imported to different computers as
an .aex file.
With the Color Legend options you can define the default values for the color legend. These values can be
remodified on the map or on a graph with the color legend popup menu.

Options – Scheduler
The Scheduler is used for defining event template settings.

Options – Statistics
Statistics enables you to specify a default basis for statistics calculations (that is, whether the calculations
are based on Time, Distance, or Sample), whether Nemo Analyze should ask you to select the basis each
time a calculation is performed. You can also choose whether color legend statistics are calculated based
on time, distance or sample, and whether the dB-parameter statistics are calculated using linear math.
Area binning enables you to define the bin size in horizontal X steps and vertical Y steps. To set the bin in
meters, select Bins in meters.
Distance binning enables you to set the binning segments of a route in meters. Note that the statistics
collected in distance binning are based on the measuring point GPS coordinates closest to the midpoint of
the defined segment, not necessarily the mean value.
Distribution plots enables you to define whether distribution plot values are displayed in the workbook.

Options – IP Trace
When Autoload pcap files is selected, Nemo Analyze automatically uploads the IP trace (*.pcap) files
attached to the measurement file on the server/local device. Note that the file is saved on the local device
as such, it is not saved into Nemo Analyze database. In the client the pcap file is displayed on the IP
Trace tab.
Note that in a server environment the IP traces are not automatically uploaded to all clients, but other
users have to upload the traces through Workspace | Measurement | popup menu | Open trace file,
and the file is saved on the local client.
Time offset enables you to adjust the pcap file time difference caused by for example time zones.

Note that processing .pcap files requires a Microsoft Network Monitor tool to be
installed (can be downloaded in Microsoft Download Center).

Options – Graph
When the Smooth scrolling when synchronizing option is selected, the graph view will scroll smoothly
instead of displaying a part of the measurement and then jumping forward as the synchronization marker
moves out of view.
Palette defines the color palette style for graphs.
Sort bar graph by parameter enables you to group bars in bar graphs by parameter rather than by x axis
values. For more information, see Chapter “Group Values”.
Optimization reduces the time needed for the drawing of the graph.
Zoom all graphs enables you to set zoom to occur synchronously in all graphs.

Options – Map
Default map type defines the map that is opened by default when no other map file is available.
When the Open saved workbook with map type stored in workbook option is selected, Nemo Analyze
opens the workbook in the same map type as previously saved.
Zoom all maps enables you to set zoom to occur synchronously in all maps.
When the Automatically zoom to first added layer option is selected, Nemo Analyze will zoom in on the
map layer that is added first.
Draw defines how the route is drawn (line/symbol/image/image & background).

396
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

When the Automatically offset simultaneous measurement routes on the map option is selected, an offset
is automatically added to measurement routes that overlap each other, as is the case, for example, with
multi-measurements. You can define the default offset in x and y directions.
When the Automatically add default BTS for measurement route option is selected, Nemo Analyze will
check from the file header what BTS file was used when the file was recorded and open the same file if it
is loaded in the database.
With the Hide distance lines longer than X km option you are able to hide unusually long lines which
probably signify a problem with the GPS connection.
When the Hide default color line option is selected the route is hidden from the map when the route line
has no color based on the current color set.
Show route tooltip, when selected, displays the route tooltip on a map.
Default route thickness enables you to define the default thicknesses of high band and low band routes.
When the Use default MapX map in workbooks option is selected, all workbooks use the MapX map
defined in Default MapX map instead of their own default maps.
Default MapX map defines the MapX map used as default map.
When the Hide title window option is selected, Nemo Analyze automatically hides the geoset title,
improving readability of the reports with MapX maps.
Zoom margin defines the zoom margin in percentage.
Layer print ratio defines the layer print ration in percentage.
When the Use map defined in log file header option is enabled, Nemo Analyze always uses the map
defined in the log file header if it is found on the workspace. If this option is not selected, that map is not
used automatically.
Through Shared map folder, you are also able to load maps from other than just default map folders, for
example from a shared network folder. This enables sharing maps between users within the same project.
When Zoom to indoor map is selected, the view zooms on the indoor map if a live map is used
simultaneously. If this option is not selected, the view zooms on the route on the map.
Default defines the default location when using the live map functionality.
If Zoom slider is selected, a zoom slider will be displayed on the map.
Zoom margin defines the zoom margin in percentage.
Default map defines which map type is used by default
Map service defines which map service is used. For more information, see Chapter “Viewing in live map”.

Options – BTS
BTS texts options allows you to define the size and style of BTS text.
Display BTS overlay on top of other layers sets BTS layers to be displayed over all other layers.
When the Do not zoom to BTS layers option is selected (on by default), when zooming on a map where
the BTS file is set as the first layer among several layers, Nemo Analyze zooms on the route on the map
and not the BTS cells.
Default BTS filter and Carrier allows you to define the default BTS filter and carrier.
Optimization defines when cells and sites are drawn on a map.
When Turn off BTS workspace is selected, sites tree is hidden to optimize performance.
Cell size defines the size of the BTS cell icon in pixels. Fixed defines the fixed size of BTS cells in pixels.
Dynamic, max size defines a maximum size for dynamic BTS cell icons (that is, icons which change size
based on zoom level).
Show site names option hides and displays the site names.
Draw frame hides and displays the outlines of BTS icons.
Organize by name organizes BTS sites according to name. Note that if the option is selected and the BTS
files used are large and contain several BTS sites with the same name across a large area, Nemo
Analyze may draw long excess lines on the map. If the option is not selected, and the BTS files used
contain distributed BTS sites with the BTS cells in different physical locations, Nemo Analyze may not
draw all lines.
Site transparency defines the transparency of the BTS icons.
Show cell information option hides and displays the selected cell information.
When the Show Cell Information option is selected, by clicking Add you are able to
define which cell-specific information element is displayed on the map for each cell.
Metric can be set per technology and band.
Hide cell texts on low zoom levels (performance optimization) option hides partly or completely the cell
texts when the map is zoomed out so that the map can be drawn faster and with less visual distractions.
The level is adjustable with a slider. Zoom levels are specific to used maps.

397
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Use cell beam range from BTS file allows you to enable/disable the display of cell beam range based on
cell beam range data in the BTS file.
Additionally, use estimation from antenna height and tilt estimates the base station coverage area based
on antenna height and tilt.
Default beam defines the default beam range in meters.
Default beam angle defines the default beam angle in degrees.
Beam transparency defines the transparency of the beam range layer.
Default color defines the default color of the BTS icons.
Default beam color defines the default beam color.
Default settings for BTS parameter allow you to define default color sets for BTS parameters.
Gradient color enables you to choose whether cells or highlighted cells are gradient colored.
BTS Technology Based Settings enable you to choose the color and the size of the base station
depending on which network’s base station it is, or based on the carrier number.
When the Use technology based settings (overrides icon size settings) option is selected, you are able to
open the Set Technology Setting view by clicking Add. By clicking Icon color, the size and the color of
the base stations changes on the map. If this option is not selected, only the size of the base station
changes.

Importing custom settings

It is possible to import custom settings (such as custom parameters, workbooks, events, queries, color
sets, KPIs, and so forth) from other users.
Select File | Settings (Import) from the ribbon bar.

The Open dialog box appears.

Browse for the settings file (.aex) to be imported and click Open.

Exporting custom settings

It is possible to export custom settings (such as parameters, workbooks, events, queries, color sets, KPIs)
to other users. All custom settings are saved in a single .aex file.
Select File | Settings (Export) from the ribbon bar.

The Save As dialog box appears.

398
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Select a destination for the settings file (.aex) and click Save.
The Export Settings dialog box opens.

Select the settings you want to export and click OK. You can export for example database settings,
custom queries, color sets, events, and so forth. It is also possible to do multiple selections and
select/clear groups, for example all workbooks, all queries, at once.
The settings file (.aex) is saved in the selected location and can be imported to any other Nemo Analyze
Standalone/Client using custom settings import (see Chapter “Importing custom settings” on page 398).

Importing MapInfo polygons

MapInfo polygons can be used for example when defining area-based search folders (see Chapter
“Search folders” on page 29) and when limiting queries to measurement files from particular area(s) (see
Chapter “Filtering based on polygon area” on page 67).
To import MapInfo polygons, click the polygons icon at the bottom of the Workspace view, right-click
on the Workspace | Polygons | Regions background, and select Import polygon from the popup menu.

399
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

The Polygon Import dialog box opens.

File defines the MapInfo polygon (.TAB) file to be imported. Click the browse button to browse for a
MapInfo polygon file.
Available features allows you to select the polygon file features you want to import. Clear a feature to
prevent it from being imported.
Selected features allows you to select the polygon file features you want to import. Clear a feature to
prevent it from being imported.
To select a feature or a set of features, select it in the Available features field and click the button.
To select all available features, select it in the Available features field and click the button.
The selected feature(s) are displayed in the Selected features field.

400
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Import name allows you to define a new name for the imported polygon.
To clear a feature or a set of features, select it in the Selected features field and click the button.
To select all available features, select it in the Selected features field and click the button.
Once all polygons to be imported have been selected, click OK.

Viewing log on system performance and SQL functions

To access the Log window, select View | Log window from the ribbon bar.
The Log window is displayed on the bottom of the screen.

Clicking opens the Logging dialog box where you can define the functions displayed in the log.
Error, if selected, displays log on errors.
Warning, if selected, displays log on warnings.
Log, if selected, displays log on general system performance.
SQL, if selected, displays log on SQL queries and database functions.
The Clear all button clears the currently displayed log.

Loading Nemo CEM logfiles

Note that support for Nemo CEM data is optional. Contact your sales representative
to update your license.

401
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

To load Nemo CEM files, go to File | Measurement | Open measurement.

The Open file dialog box opens. In the Open file dialog box, select CEM files as the file type.

Next, you need to open the files. CEM files are csv. type.

Note that files must be named in Nemo CEM format so that the file name begins with
one of the options below. The CEM system names the file automatically this way.
Names can be changed by adding something in the end of the given file name,
however, the beginning of the file names must be kept as created by the system.

Automated names are:

• app_auto_explored
• app_monitored
• comlink

402
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

• connection
• coverage_isho
• coverage_netstat
• coverage_rssi
• data_ftp
• data_http
• data_ping
• data_sessions
• email
• messaging_mms
• messaging_sms
• survey
• time_based_questionnaire
• video_streaming
• voice
• web
Files appear in the workspace. Each column of the imported CSV file is shown in the parameter tree as a
separate parameter. All values returns all the columns.

403
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

13 User Interface

Menus
This chapter describes the contents of the menu bar in Nemo Analyze.
You can access the Nemo Analyze menu by clicking on the logo at the top left corner of the Nemo
Analyze main window.

Open enables you to open measurement files, maps, BTS files, report templates, and data source files.
When opening a measurement, you can select Fill GPS gaps to allow Nemo Analyze to generate artificial
GPS points inside, e.g. a tunnel between the last calculated GPS point prior to the gap and the first
calculated GPS point after the gap. If a measurement if open and Fill GPS gaps is selected, Fill GPS gap
dialog is displayed. Define the GPS fill gap. Please note that if the gap between GPS events is larger than
what the user has defined, the gap will be filled with calculated GPS points. Smallest accepted GPS gap
value is 50 meters. Nemo Analyze will load two files: the original file and the modified measurement file
(with _gps extension.
Workspace enables you to open, save, and close workspace items.
Workbook enables you to save active workbooks and floating windows.
Export to… enables you to export workbooks to PDF, Microsoft Word, or Microsoft PowerPoint format.
This item is displayed only if you have a workbook open.
Print… enables you to preview and print active documents, and change printer and printing options. This
item is displayed only if you have a workbook open.
Recent Workspaces enables you to open saved workspaces that you have used recently.
You can close Nemo Analyze by clicking Exit Application.

File menu

Open | Measurement enables you to load measurement files, maps, BTS files, report templates, and data
source files to the database.
Open | Workspace enables you to open saved workspaces.
Open | Folder enables you to browse for a folder, the contents of which are to be loaded to the database.
Save | Workspace enables you to save workspace files (.aws).
Save | Workbook enables you to save workbooks (p. 197) and add workbooks as templates to the
Workspace menus.
Organize enables you to organize measurement files loaded in the database.
Project manager enables you to manage workspace with projects.

404
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Menu editor enables you to add workbooks to the Workspace menus.

Import enables you to import image files to be used as maps, custom settings files (.aex), and color set
files.
Export enables you to export workbooks in PDF format and custom settings files in .aex format. Page
image to clipboard enables you to save an active workbook or map as an image. You can either save the
image on clipboard to enable pasting to other applications, or save the Image to file in .jpg format. You
can also set an Export Ratio (or an export size) for the exported image in percentages or in fixed pixel
size.
Print enables you to preview and print active documents, and change printer and printing options.
You can exit the File menu by double-clicking it.

View menu

Add Data View enables you to create empty workbooks, workbooks with selected empty data views, and
floating windows. For adding parameters on empty data views, see Chapter “Adding data views”.
Options opens a dialog box that enables you to make some general system settings.
Panels enables you to display and hide the Workspace, Log window, Properties, Query clipboard, and
Activity views.
You can exit the View menu by double-clicking it.

Tools menu

KPI workbench makes it possible to create custom KPIs by dragging and dropping parameters,
correlations, various operations, filters, and sort elements to the Workbench, defining their properties, and
connecting them into a logical flow chart. The KPI Workbench is part of the Troubleshooting Toolkit option.
Query manager enables you to add and edit queries, query filters, properties, statistics, aliases, and
correlation queries.
Color set editor enables you to edit and create color sets.
Notifications enables you to define icons for all measurement events.
Event scheduler enables you to schedule workbooks and reports to be run and measurement files to be
loaded into the database automatically from a predefined folder.
Macro editor enables you to automate user interface functions. Macro reference can be found under the
Help menu.
User manager enables you to manage users and user groups (Nemo Analyze Enterprise Edition).
Operators enables you to manage operator settings. These settings are used as the basis of operations
such as statistics per operator.
Database Browser can be used to display the table structure of the Nemo Analyze Database and to write
and test custom queries.
CSV templates enables you to create a new CSV import template.
Server statistics enables you to view server statistics.
Spreadsheet enables you to create spreadsheet report template file.
PowerPoint template enables you to create Microsoft PowerPoint templates for reports.
Word template enables you to create Microsoft Word templates for reports.

405
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Utilities menu

Reconnect enables you to reconnect to the database if the connection is lost.

Synchronization enables you to play back measurement files.
Reset Source resets the synchronization source. The field after the button displays the current
synchronization source.
Go to beginning jumps to the beginning of the file.
Step backwards steps one step backwards in the file.
Play backwards plays the file from end to beginning.
Stop ends the playback.
Play forward plays the file from beginning to end.
Step forward steps one step forward in the file.
Go to timestamp jumps to a particular point in the file if timestamps were inserted when the file was
recorded.
Counter displays the current point in the file.
Playback speed defines how fast the file is played back.
Global Filters enables you to add and remove global filters applied to all operations performed with Nemo
Analyze. For instance, if you are interested only in measurement data from a certain restricted area, you
can select this area as a filter using polygon area selection.

Map Menu/Live Map Menu

Please note that the Map Menu/Live Map Menu is only visible when a map/live map is open on the
workspace.

Refresh enables you to refresh the map (only with live maps).
Properties enables you to define map-specific properties.
Side panel enables you to hide and display the side panel on the right-hand side of the grid.
Save geoset enables you to save layers as a geoset (not available with live maps).
Organize layers enables you to change the order of layers on the map (not available with live maps).

Properties enables you to define map-specific properties (not available with live maps).

Arrow enables you to select items on the map view.

Pan tool enables you to scroll the map (not available with live maps).
Zoom in and Zoom out enable you to zoom the view. You can also zoom in and out on the views
with the mouse wheel.
Center enables you to center the map on the point where you click (not available with live maps).
Measure distance enables you to measure distances on the map.
Offset route enables you to move the route on the map. Select Offset route, click on the route and
click on the map on the spot to where you wish to move the route. The route is moved to the place you
selected (not available with live maps).

406
Nemo Analyze
User Guide

View entire map enables you to zoom out quickly (not available with live maps).
Show Elevation enables you to draw a line on a map, according to which elevation is shown in the
bottom of the screen.

Draw polygon enables you to draw polygons on the map.

Generate colorset generates a colorset.
Export to KML enables you to export a measurement route from Nemo Analyze map to for example
Google Earth in KML format.
Zoom to layers extends zoom to layers.
Folder from area creates a folder from an area.
Polygon region enables you to specify an area of any shape, and run statistics over that area. The
results are displayed in the statistics data view.
Area binning enables you to define an area on a map which you can run statistics on in the form of
bins. The results are displayed on the map as a new semi-transparent layer.
Distance binning enables you to define a map area in which the measured route is divided into
segments set by you. You can run statistics based on these segments in the form of bins. The results are
displayed on the map as a new semi-transparent layer.
Delta plotting enables you to compare the parameter values of two measurement groups from a
same route by defining an area on a map (for example a portion of the measurement route). For more
information on Delta Plotting, see Chapter “Use Case 16: Comparing two groups of measurements from
the same route on map”.
Auto centering enables you to force the map to be always centered on the current location.
Route names displays the name of the route(s) on the Workbook.
Current position displays the current position and direction on the map.
Highlight active route highlights in frames the route selected in the Layers side panel.
Optimized drawing improves the performance of the route drawing on the map. However, in rare
occasions with some projections it may result in skewed route plot. In such case, clear this option.
Scale bar option displays a distance scale bar on the map.
Select map: The drop-down menu enables you to change the map type of the active map workbook.

Layout menu
Note: The layout menu is only displayed when a workbook is open in Nemo Analyze.
When you close all workbooks, also the layout menu is closed automatically.

Add | Page enables you to add a new, empty page in a workbook. By clicking Graph, Map, Grid, or
others you can add data views in the active page. For adding parameters on empty data views, see
Chapter “Adding data views”.
Remove | Page enables you to remove an active page from a workbook.
Copy | Workbook enables you to create a copy of the active workbook for a selected measurement.
Organize enables you to close all workbooks and floating windows, and organize various workbooks and
views in the Nemo Analyze main view.

407
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

Help menu

In the Help menu, you will find access to the online help and also shortcuts to some important documents,
such as, a description of the Nemo file format.

408
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

14 Shortcut Keys
Shortcut keys available in Nemo Analyze:

Command Shortcut Key Description

Undo Ctrl+z Undoes changes.
Paste Ctrl+v Pastes cut or copied item(s).
Copy Ctrl+c Copies selected item(s).
Cut Ctrl+x Cuts selected item(s).
Select all text Ctrl+a Selects all text.
Close Alt+F4 Closes the program.
Close window Ctrl+F4 Closes the active window
(exc. main window).
New Workbook Ctrl+n Opens an empty workbook.
Next Ctrl+F6 Activates the next open
workbook (in the order of
last appearance).
Print Ctrl+p Prints the current view.

Analyze Tools menu shortcut keys:

Command Shortcut Key Description
Go to the beginning Ctrl+Shift+left arrow Jumps to the beginning of
the file.
Step backwards Ctrl+left arrow Steps one step backwards in
the file.
Play backwards Shift+F5 Plays the file from end to
beginning.
Stop F6 Ends the playback.
Play forwards F5 Plays the file from beginning
to end.
Step forwards Ctrl+right arrow Steps one step forward in
the file.

409
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

15 Troubleshooting
A Socket closed dialog box appears when opening Nemo Analyze with laptop.
If you have Virtual Machine program (commonly known as VMware) installed on your laptop, it may not be
possible to execute Nemo Analyze properly. This is caused by a conflict between VMware and the HASP
dongle used in Nemo Analyze that uses VMware for certain internal processes.
In this case, the following dialog box appears when executing Nemo Analyze:

It is recommended that VMware is removed from the laptop.

410
 Nemo Analyze
User Guide

16 FAQ
Q: How soon are changes in the Nemo File Format implemented to Nemo Analyze?
A: Changes in the Nemo File Format are implemented very quickly to Nemo Analyze and there is no need
to reload any data in the database.

Q: Which database is used in Nemo Analyze?

A: Nemo Analyze uses the Object Store database.
Q: I opened a parameter on a map but the samples are shown without color coding?
A: If you opened data on the map through the Analyze Wizard (right-click on a device in workspace | Pick
Parameter) and selected a map instead of the default view, only the selected parameters or events are
displayed. You should first open a map and then drag and drop a measurement file on the map. Then use
color sets to highlight parameter values on the route.

411
17 Technical support
If you have questions on or beyond this documentation about Nemo tools, please contact our
technical support service through Nemo Support Portal at http://nemo.support.keysight.com,
call us or send us an email at nemo.support@keysight.com. Note that for full support you need
to have the Maintenance Agreement.

Nemo Support Portal

Nemo Support Portal is a web interface for technical support, product-related questions, and
RMA requests. It offers a fast and convenient way to reach our technical support team and
submit repair, warranty repair, and calibration requests. Customers can open a support ticket,
follow the status of existing tickets, and request technical support 24/7/365. Furthermore, the
Nemo Support Portal includes a Knowledge Base for the most frequent and latest topics on
Nemo Products. Submitting a ticket via Nemo Support Portal ensures that our technical
specialists have all the necessary information available to solve your support case, resulting in
faster response times.
Please go to http://nemo.support.keysight.com to access the portal and click Request access
to obtain a password to the system.

Phone and email support

During the warranty period, the phone support related to potential software errors is free of
additional charge. Registered users with a valid Maintenance Agreement are entitled to full
support. For a list service location, please visit http://www.keysight.com/find/assist Nemo
Support Portal is the preferred channel for technical support requests, but you can also send us
an email. When emailing, please let us know the number of your Software Maintenance and
Support Agreement.
Please contact us at the following locations (global email address nemo.support@keysight.com):

Locations for Keysight Technologies

Online assistance: http://www.keysight.com/find/assist

412
18 Appendix 1 – Making MapInfo Maps

Making MapInfo maps

Using raster image files, you can bring paper maps, photographs, and other graphic images into
MapInfo. You can scan paper maps and then use paper maps as the foundation for the maps
you create in MapInfo. After scanning the paper map into a raster image file, you can display it in
a map window.
Nemo Outdoor and Nemo Analyze support only .TIF, .GIF, and .JPG formats. MapInfo can read
the following types of raster images:
• filename.TIF
• filename.GIF
• filename.JPG
• filename.PCX
• filename.BMP
• filename.BIL
Color options are:
• Monochrome images: each pixel in map image can be black or white.
• Gray scale images: each pixel in gray scale image can be black, white, or a shade of
gray.
• Color images: each pixel can be of any color from a palette of available colors.
MapInfo supports 256 colors. When using Nemo Outdoor and Nemo Analyze, we recommend
using gray scale images. Doing this, measurement route can be discerned better than with color
map images.

Registering a raster map

If you want to overlay vector data on top of a raster image, then you must register the raster map
image so that MapInfo can position it properly in a Map window. You do this in the Image
Registration dialog box. You must identify control point coordinates and projection of the raster
image map. It is important to provide accurate control point information when registering a raster
map image. Choose control points that can be easily identified and selected, such as street
intersections or use the coordinates (latitude and longitude grid) for the selected point from a
paper map.

To register a raster map with MapInfo software:

1. Choose File | Open Table and Raster Image File Format. Select your raster map
image file (.TIF, .GIF, .JPG) and open it. The Image Registration dialog box will be
displayed. A preview of the raster map image appears on the screen.
2. Select the Projection button to specify the projection of the raster image map. If you do
not know the right projection, the default value is Longitude/ Latitude.
3. Start adding control points. Click on a location in the preview (raster image map). The
Add Control Point dialog box will be displayed showing the location of the point in pixels.
Add Map X and Map Y coordinates in decimal formats. For example, to specify the
coordinates 65 degrees, 30 minutes, enter 65.5 degrees. Use negative numbers when
specifying west and south coordinates. If you want to register a raster map, which does
not use longitude and latitude coordinates, specify the appropriate projection in the Image
Registration dialog box. Enter your coordinates in the native units of the coordinate
system. For example, if you are registering a UTM map image, enter coordinates in
meters. Using MapBasic program, you can convert d/m/s coordinates into decimal
format.
4. You must choose at least three control points. Select points that can be easily identified
and selected in the map window.

413
5. After all control points have been defined, click OK in the Image Registration dialog box.
The raster map will be displayed in the map window.
6. Move filename.tab and filename.tif/gif/jpg files to the map directory of Nemo Outdoor or
Nemo Analyze.
7. Open filename.tab in Nemo Outdoor or Nemo Analyze.

414
19 Appendix 2 – CVS Files

Adding CSV files to the database

In addition to files produced with Nemo tools, you can import any character-separated value
(CSV) ASCII data into the Nemo Analyze database. The data can be post-processed and
visualized using the data views available in Nemo Analyze.
Select Tools | CSV templates.
The CSV Templates dialog box opens.

To create a new CSV import template, select Add. The CSV Import Wizard – CSV Template File
dialog box opens.

415
Template file enables you to select a CSV file to serve as a basis for the import template. Click
the browse button to browse for CSV files.
Extension enables you to define the file type the import template will apply to.

Note: It is recommended that the extensions of CSV files with different content
structures are renamed to provide each type with a unique extension. For instance,
four different types of CSV files, all originally with the extension .csv, could be
renamed as .csv1, .csv2, .csv3, and .csv4.
Once Template file and Extension have been defined, click Next.
The CSV Import Wizard – CSV Import dialog box opens.

416
Ignore defines the parts of the imported data set that are to be ignored when uploading the data,
that is, the parts that do not contain relevant data.
Column row defines the number of top rows to be ignored.
Rows allows you to define specific rows to be ignored.
Rows starting with allows you to define rows starting with a specific string to be ignored.
Columns allows you to divide a CSV data set into columns.
Fixed lines defines the content of each column based on the number of characters in a CSV
string. For example, the setting 12, 22, 32 defines that the first twelve characters (including
spaces) belong to column 1, the next 22 characters to column 2, and the next 32 characters to
column 3. Fixed lines should only be used if there are no delimiters in the data set.
Delimiter defines the character that separates columns in the CSV data set. You can use one of
the default delimiters, that is, comma, dot, semicolon, <TAB>, or <SPACE>, or you can define
your own delimiter character by entering a character to the Delimiter field.
Strip leading and trailing quotation marks removes leading and trailing quotation marks from
each column of the imported data set.
File preview displays a preview of the CSV file contents.
Once the Ignore and Columns settings have been defined, click Next.
The CSV Import Wizard – Database Schema Definition dialog box opens.

417
Table name defines the name of the template.
Columns enables you to select which columns are included in the imported data set and to
define the properties of each column using Column, Column type and Format.
Decimal separator defines the decimal separator as comma or dot.
Column defines the name of the column selected in the Columns control.
Column type defines the data type of the column selected in the Columns control.
Keyword allows you to define the content type of columns containing some general data types,
such as time and positioning data. Based on these defined content types, the data can be
correlated with measurement files of other formats.
Format defines the required syntax for the column selected in the Columns control.
To define a custom time column syntax element-by-element, click the … button. The Time
Format dialog box opens. To add syntax elements (for example YYYY) and delimiters (for
example ;), double-click the relevant element. Custom syntax is displayed in the Format field on
the Time Format dialog box.

Data preview displays a preview of the data set structure.

Once the properties of each column have been defined, click Finish.
The new template is displayed in the Template field on the CSV Templates dialog box.

418
To open a CSV file using an import template, click Import from the CSV Templates dialog box.
You can also open a CSV files using an import template by selecting File | Measurement |
Open Measurement.
The Open dialog box opens.

Select a CSV import template (for example Template1) by using the Files of type drop-down
menu, browse to a folder containing measurement files with the extension defined in the
template, select a file, and click Open. For information for “
Opening CSV files from the database”, see below.
To export a CSV template, click Export. Then, choose under which name the exported template
will be saved as from the file dialog box.

Opening CSV files from the database

All CSV files within the database are displayed on the Measurements page of the Workspace.
Files displays all the CSV files stored in the database.
Parameters displays all the parameters that are available for the file. The User folder displays
user-defined custom parameters. For creating custom queries for CSV files, click here.
To open a parameter in its default view, select a CSV file in the Files view and double-click a
parameter (for example Jerkiness [%]) in the Parameters view.

419
If you want to open the parameter in some other type of view, right-click on a parameter (for
example Jerkiness [%]) in the Parameters view and select the view type from the popup menu.
The Choose Graph Type dialog box opens.

Select a graph type.

The Select Columns dialog box opens.

Define the x and y axes and click OK.

The data view opens displaying the selected parameter data on the selected CSV file.

420
Opening CSV files without database import
Optionally, character-separated value (CSV) data can also be opened and viewed in various
data views without importing the data into the database. Using this method, the CSV data is
loaded only in the workspace.
Select File | Open | Measurement | Open Data Source File, and select the file in the Open
dialog box.

In the Analyze Wizard, you need to define file import parameters. After you have made the
settings, click Next and finally Finish.

421
 With Skip first you can
define how many lines are
skipped at the beginning of
the file.

Delimiter defines how

columns in the source file
are separated.

Columns displays a list of

columns detected in the
source file.

Column type defines the

data type of each column.

Format defines the data

format of each column.

Column aliases define how

data is displayed in the data
views. You can define a
parameter for the axes of
each view type.

422
The imported file is added to the Data Source Files page in the Workspace. You can view the
data by right-clicking on the file and selecting Open in Data View.

Creating custom queries for CSV files

Correlating and creating custom queries for CSV files is possible using SQL. The Database
browser can be used in examining the table structure of the database.
To open the Database browser, select Tools | Database browser in the ribbon bar.

423
The Database browser view opens. CSV import templates (for example Template1) can be
found in the folder Views | User.

The CSV import template folder displays both the columns that were imported and some extra
columns containing database structure data, such as the_file_title and the_file_extension.

If multiple CSV files have been imported to the database using a particular template, each
column in the directory structure will display all rows from the corresponding columns of all the

424
files that match the template. In order to make it possible to identify the file to which each row
belongs, the column the_file_title displays the name of the file from which the row was retrieved.

425
20 Appendix 3 – Event-based Data Recording Principle of Nemo
Tools
The underlying data recording principle of all Nemo measurement tools is that the data is written
to the log file only when values change, that is, values are not written periodically. More
precisely, if any of the information elements of a given event change, the event is written to the
log file.
In practice, many of the data elements are written to the log file in a periodic manner with the
minimum sampling interval. For example, signal strength and quality of serving and neighboring
cells are all written in the same event with GSM, UMTS, and other technologies. In other words,
an event containing information on all of them is written whenever the signal strength of the
serving or one of the neighboring cells changes. In a real-life scenario, these values are
constantly changing, and hence signal strength is in practice written to the log file in a periodic
manner.
However, with certain parameters the event-based data recording can have practical effects. For
example, GSM parameter Rx Quality behaves in a fairly stable manner in good network
conditions. The value is 0 (the best possible quality) for long constant time intervals, interrupted
by short peaks of interference during which higher Rx Quality values are recorded.
In good signal conditions, the following pattern could occur: At the beginning of the call, an event
with the time stamp 0 seconds and the Rx Quality value 0 is recorded. After 90 seconds, an
interference peak occurs and the RX quality value 5 is recorded. After 10 seconds, with the time
stamp 100.5 seconds, the call ends. In this case, only three RX Quality values are written during
the whole call. The values, and their durations are: 0/90s, 5/0.5s, 0/10s. The average of the
three samples would be (0 + 5 + 0)/3 = 1.667. However, this result would be incorrect because
the three samples are not of equal weight. The value 5 was valid only for 0,5 seconds; the value
0 was valid for a total of 100 seconds. Thus, the correct average is calculated by weighting each
sample with its duration: (0*90+5*0.5+0*10)/(90+0.5+10) = 0.025. More generally, the weighted
average of values in a Nemo log file is calculated in the following manner:
∑S *d i i
S Mean = i
, where d is the duration of the sample, in time or distance.
∑d i
i

To process data produced by Nemo logging tools correctly, one must take the event-based
nature of the data into account, and weight each value with its duration. This is done
automatically in Nemo Outdoor and Nemo Analyze. In practice this means that in a line graph,
the line drawn based on a sample remains constant until the next sample, that is, for the
duration of the sample.
With map plots, a stretch of measurement route is colored based on the duration of a sample.
When calculating averages, cumulation, or density histograms in Nemo Analyze and Nemo
Outdoor, each sample is weighted with its duration. It should be noted that the duration can be in
time or in distance, depending on how the data is to be used. If the samples from the entire
measurement route are to have equal weight and for instance the weighting effect of time spent
at traffic lights is to be excluded, the samples should be weighted by distance. Otherwise,
weighting based on time can be used. In Nemo Analyze, the statistics weighting method can be
selected from software options and from the report configuration of each Crystal Reports
template separately.

426
21 Appendix 4 – Difference Between Nemo Call Events and ETSI Call
Events
Nemo call events refer to the trigger points of the different phases of voice/video call setup and
teardown, as written in Nemo measurement tool log files (.nmf) and defined in the Nemo File
format specification. ETSI call events are based on the trigger points as defined in ETSI TS 102
250-2 specification.
Picture below illustrates the difference between Nemo and ETSI call events. The major
difference between the two call events is that Nemo events consider call as connected when
traffic channel over the air interface is allocated to the mobile, while ETSI events consider call as
connected when ALERTING is reached (or when call is answered if ALERTING is not used).
This difference impacts the call setup success rate and dropped call rate KPIs. If a call fails after
traffic channel is assigned, but before Alerting is reached, it is considered as dropped call in
Nemo events. The same call is considered as call attempt failure in ETSI events.
Nemo measurement tools are writing the Nemo call events to the log file. However, Nemo
events are compatible with the ETSI events, and in post-processing it is possible to convert the
Nemo events to ETSI. As can be seen from the picture, ETSI uses a subset of trigger points
compared to Nemo, and there is one to one equivalent trigger point in Nemo events for every
ETSI event. Nemo Analyze and Nemo Outdoor have both the Nemo call events and the ETSI
call events available for the user.
Which call events to use, ETSI or Nemo?
ETSI way of defining the call setup phases is a widely used industry standard. Therefore, we
recommend using the ETSI call events in call KPI reporting. Nemo call event logic inherits from
the 1990s, early stages of networks and measurement tool development. The Nemo log file
format is used in many 3rd party tools, and therefore it is important to maintain the backward
compatibility of the log file format and not to change the call event logic. Moreover, Nemo events
can be converted to ETSI events as discussed. Therefore, the Nemo call event logic will be
maintained in the raw log files also in the future.

427
22 Appendix 5 – Nemo Analyze Scalar Functions
These Scalar functions are Keysight proprietary additions to OpenAccess SQL reference.

Scalar functions are used in SQL strings to perform actions on a row by row basis. There are
currently two different types of functions.
• First are functions that execute only once per query, these perform static operations that
return constant values that can be used throughout the query execution.
• Second are functions that execute on each row of a given result set as it is added to its result
set.

In this appendix each scalar function will be described as follows:

• Type: Lists above mentioned type (either const or runtime).
• Input: Lists the different input values need for this function.
• Return: Lists the data type to be returned from this function.
• Usage: Example of syntax
• Notes: Provides description of function and other need information

Freeze Frame Scalar Function

FREEZE_FRAME scalar function returns a value from subquery for a given time instant of the
parent query. It can be used to correlate values based on time column across tables and queries
that do not have logical link in the database schema structure. FREEZE_FRAME scalar function
has three variants, one for string, real, and integer datatypes values to be returned:
INTEGER_FREEZE_FRAME returns ints
REAL_FREEZE_FRAME returns doubles
STRING_FREEZE_FRAME returns strings.

They take seven input variables

• Ordinal, running number (1,2,3,…). When multiple FREEZE_FRAME functions of same
type are used in same parent query, the oridinal input controls the caching of the
subquery results. If same oridinal number is used for all FREEZE_FRAME scalars of the
parent query, the query is executed only once at the first time when the function is called,
and the same cache is used in other calls. This speeds up the query execution when the
save value is needed in multiple columns of the parent query. If different subqueries are
used in the multiple FREEZE_FRAME functions, the oridinal number must be different for
each of the functions.
• Correlation type (-1, 0, 1)
• -1 (previous): In reference to the timestamp of the parent query row, returns the
previous value from the subquery
• 0 (current): In reference to the timestamp of the parent query row, returns the current
value from the subquery based on the validity time interval of the sub query. That is,
parent query timestamp is within the time range of the subquery row’s time interval.
• 1 (next): In reference to the timestamp of the parent query row, returns the next value
from the subquery
• oid .(Oid column of the parent query)
• time (time column of the parent query),
• Sub query time column name (name of the time column in the scalar’s sub query),
• Value name (this is the name of the value column you want to return in the scalar’s sub
query),
• Sub query

428
 Example query below correlates Tx power and BLER to the Ec/N0 serving cell query based on
time:
SELECT
"time",
"channel_number",
"scrambling_code",
"ec/no",
REAL_FREEZE_FRAME(1, 0, x.oid, x.time, 'time', 'tx_power_umts', 'SELECT
"time","tx_power_umts" FROM "Nemo.UMTS"."TXPC+"') AS Tx_power,
REAL_FREEZE_FRAME(2, 0, x.oid, x.time, 'time', 'bler', 'SELECT "bler", "time" FROM
"Nemo.UMTS"."BLER+" ') AS BLER
FROM "Nemo.UMTS.ECNO"."Cell+" x WHERE "cell_type" = 0

Time Functions

Binary Time functions

Note: All functions that take binary time as the primary input being with T_

• T_2_TIME
o Type:
• Runtime
o Input:
• binary time stamp
o Return:
• SQL TIMESTAMP
o Usage:
• T_2_TIME(“time”) AS sqltime
o Notes:
• None

• T_MIDNIGHT
o Type:
• Runtime
o Input:
• binary time stamp
o Return:
• INT
o Usage:
• T_MIDNIGHT (“time”)
o Notes:
• Returns number of milliseconds from midnight
• Can be used to compare time versus different dates, etc.

429
• T_GMT_OFFSET
o Type:
• Runtime
o Input:
• binary time stamp
o Return:
• INT
o Usage:
• T_GMT_OFFSET (“time”)
o Notes:
• Returns +/- 12 based on GMT offset.
• Not all files contain GMT information when being parsed, will return
NULL if no GMT information present.

• T_GMT
o Type:
• Runtime
o Input:
• binary time stamp
o Return:
• STRING
o Usage:
• T_GMT (“time”)
o Notes:
• Returns “TRUE” if time set in GMT and “FALSE” if time set in local.
• Not all files contain GMT information when being parsed, local is
assumed when GMT information is not preset.

• T_VALID
o Type:
• Runtime
o Input:
• binary time stamp
o Return:
• STRING
o Usage:
• T_VALID (“time”)
o Notes:
• Returns “TRUE” if time is valid and “FALSE” is time has not been set.

• T_DIFFERENCE
o Type:
• Runtime
o Input:

430
 • binary time stamp
• binary time stamp
o Return:
• INT
o Usage:
• T_DIFFERENCE (“time”, “time”)
o Notes:
• Returns difference in ticks between two timestamps, is limited to narrow
time ranges not exceeding a few days.

• T_WITH_MILLISEC_OFFSET
o Type:
• Runtime
o Input:
• binary time stamp
• INT
o Return:
• binary time stamp
o Usage:
• T_WITH_MILLISEC_OFFSET (“time”, -42)
o Notes:
• Returns a new timestamp that has been offset from the original by a
given number of milliseconds.

• T_MIN
o Type:
• Runtime
o Input:
• binary time stamp
• binary time stamp
o Return:
• binary time stamp
o Usage:
• T_MIN (“time”, “time”)
o Notes:
• Returns the lesser of two binary timestamps

• T_MAX
o Type:
• Runtime
o Input:
• binary time stamp
• binary time stamp

431
 o Return:
• binary time stamp
o Usage:
• T_MAX (“time”, “time”)
o Notes:
• Returns the greater of two binary timestamps

• T_FORMAT
o Type:
• Runtime
o Input:
• binary time stamp
• STRING
o Return:
• STRING
o Usage:
• T_FORMAT (“time”, “%#c”)
o Notes:
• Returns time written as formatted string.
• %a Abbreviated weekday name
• %A Full weekday name
• %b Abbreviated month name
• %B Full month name
• %c Date and time representation appropriate for locale
• %d Day of month as decimal number (01 – 31)
• %H Hour in 24-hour format (00 – 23)
• %I Hour in 12-hour format (01 – 12)
• %j Day of year as decimal number (001 – 366)
• %m Month as decimal number (01 – 12)
• %M Minute as decimal number (00 – 59)
• %p Current locale's A.M./P.M. indicator for 12-hour clock
• %S Second as decimal number (00 – 59)
• %U Week of year as decimal number, with Sunday as first day
of week (00 – 53)
• %w Weekday as decimal number (0 – 6; Sunday is 0)
• %W Week of year as decimal number, with Monday as first day
of week (00 – 53)
• %x Date representation for current locale
• %X Time representation for current locale
• %y Year without century, as decimal number (00 – 99)
• %Y Year with century, as decimal number
• %% Percent sign

432
 Binary Time Interval Functions
Note: All functions that take binary time but work on interval as primary input begin with TI_

• TI_INTERVAL
o Type:
• Runtime
o Input:
• binary time stamp
o Return:
• INT
o Usage:
• TI_INTERVAL (“time”)
o Notes:
• Returns millisecond range between binary time and binary time
interval as milliseconds.

• TI_2_TIME
o Type:
• Runtime
o Input:
• binary time stamp
o Return:
• SQL TIMESTAMP
o Usage:
• TI_2_TIME (“time”)
o Notes:
• Returns time offset by its interval as a SQL TIMESTAMP

• TI_2_T
o Type:
• Runtime
o Input:
• binary time stamp
o Return:
• binary time stamp
o Usage:
• TI_2_T (“time”)
o Notes:
• Returns time offset by its interval as a binary time
• Interval on return time will be 0.

433
 SQL Time Functions
Note: All functions that take SQL TIMESTAMP as primary input begin with TIME_

• TIME_2_T
o Type:
• Runtime
o Input:
• SQL TIMESTAMP
o Return:
• binary time stamp
o Usage:
• TIME_2_T (“sql_time”)
o Notes:
• Returns binary time stamp set to time defined by SQL
TIMESTAMP input
• Interval will be set to 0
• GMT data will also not be set.

• TIME_PLUS_SECS
o Type:
• Runtime
o Input:
• SQL TIMESTAMP
o Return:
• SQL TIMESTAMP
o Usage:
• TIME_PLUS_SECS (“sql_time”)
o Notes:
• Returns new SQL TIMESTAMP offset by a given number of
seconds.

• TIME_PLUS_MILLISECS
o Type:
• Runtime
o Input:
• SQL TIMESTAMP
o Return:
• SQL TIMESTAMP
o Usage:
• TIME_PLUS_MILLISECS(“sql_time”)
o Notes:
• Returns new SQL TIMESTAMP offset by a given number of
milliseconds.

434
 • TIME_DIFF_SECS
o Type:
• Runtime
o Input:
• SQL TIMESTAMP
• SQL TIMESTAMP
o Return:
• INT
o Usage:
• TIME_DIFF_SECS(“sql_time”, “sql_time”)
o Notes:
• Returns difference between two SQL TIMESTAMPS in seconds.

• TIME_DIFF_MILLISECS
o Type:
• Runtime
o Input:
• SQL TIMESTAMP
• SQL TIMESTAMP
o Return:
• INT
o Usage:
• TIME_DIFF_MILLISECS(“sql_time”, “sql_time”)
o Notes:
• Returns difference between two SQL TIMESTAMPS in
milliseconds.

Translator Functions
Translator functions change numeric values stored in the database to user friendly
descriptions.

• VAL_TO_STRING
o Type:
• Runtime
o Input:
• STRING
• INT
o Return:
• STRING
o Usage:
• VAL_TO_STRING (“systems”, “the_measured_system”)

435
 o Notes:
• Takes integer value and applies it to an array of strings to get a
user friend description for the value.
• STRING_TO_VAL
o Type:
• Constant
o Input:
• STRING
• STRING
o Return:
• INT
o Usage:
• STRING_TO_VAL (“systems”, ‘1’)
o Notes:
• Takes a string and converts it into the number used to represent
that string in the database.

Datatype Functions
Data type functions perform basic operations to change type, check type, etc.

• TO_STRING
o Type:
• Runtime
o Input:
• Numeric data types.
o Return:
• STRING
o Usage:
• TO_STRING (“value”)
o Notes:
• Takes numeric data type and returns it as a string.

• TO_FLOAT
o Type:
• Runtime
o Input:
• Numeric data types.
o Return:
• DOUBLE
o Usage:
• TO_FLOAT (“value”)
o Notes:

436
 • Takes numeric data type and returns it as a floating point
number.
• 8 bytes.

• TO_REAL
o Type:
• Runtime
o Input:
• Numeric data types.
o Return:
• REAL
o Usage:
• TO_REAL (“value”)
o Notes:
• Takes numeric data type and returns it as a floating point
number.
• 4 bytes.

• BIT_TEST
o Type:
• Runtime
o Input:
• INT
• INT
o Return:
• INT
o Usage:
• BIT_TEST (“value”, ‘0x0004’)
o Notes:
• Does AND comparison between two values.
• Returns 1 if true and 0 if false.

• IS_FLOAT_EQUAL
o Type:
• Runtime
o Input:
• DOUBLE
• DOUBLE
• INT
o Return:
• INT

437
 o Usage:
• IS_FLOAT_EQUAL (“value”, “value”, ‘6’)
o Notes:
• Compares two floating point values for equal
• 3rd input defines precision to be used.

Decoder Functions
Message decoder functions take a series of inputs and return textual string descriptions of data
contained within the messages. These functions will be all listed in a group as the inputs and
function is generally the same between all of them. The type of message they decode is all that is
different.

• MSG_L3
• MSG_L2
• MSG_MAC
• MSG_LLC
• MSG_RRLP
• MSG_RRC
• MSG_RTP
o Type:
• Runtime
o Input:
• INT (System)
• INT (Band)
• INT (Protocol revision)
• SMALL INT (Direction, 1 or 0)
• STRING (Sub Channel Type)
• STRING (Message Name)
• STRING (Message Data)
o Return:
• STRING
o Usage:
• MSG_L3 (‘1’, ‘1900’, ‘1’, ‘0’, ‘DCCH’,
‘ACTIVATE_PDP_CONTEXT_ACCEPT’, ‘8A 42 03’)
o Notes:
• Takes message coding information and returns decoded
message.

• MSG_VALUE
o Type:
• Runtime
o Input:
• STRING

438
 • STRING
o Return:
• STRING
o Usage:
• MSG_VALUE (MSG_L3(values), ‘FIND THIS’)
o Notes:
• Returns copies of the first column where a given sub string is
found.
• If no sub string is found NULL is returned.
• BSIC_BCC
o Type:
• Runtime
o Input:
• INT
o Return:
• INT
o Usage:
• BSIC_BCC (‘87’)
o Notes:
• Returns BCC part of BSIC.

• BSIC_NCC
o Type:
• Runtime
o Input:
• INT
o Return:
• INT
o Usage:
• BSIC_NCC(‘87’)
o Notes:
• Returns NCC part of BSIC.

• BSIC_BCCNCC
o Type:
• Runtime
o Input:
• INT
o Return:
• INT
o Usage:
• BSIC_NCC(‘87’)
o Notes:

439
 • Returns BSIC formatted as BCCNCC.

• CI_16
o Type:
• Runtime
o Input:
• INT
o Return:
• INT
o Usage:
• CI_16(‘32287’)
o Notes:
• Returns CI as 16 bit number.

• CI_28
o Type:
• Runtime
o Input:
• INT
o Return:
• INT
o Usage:
• CI_28(‘32287’)
o Notes:
• Returns CI as 28 bit number.

Connection Functions
Connection functions compare a special schema relationship to see if a given set of conditions
exist.

• CONN_IS_SHARED
o Type:
• Runtime
o Input:
• BINARY OID
• BINARY OID
o Return:
• INT
o Usage:
• CONN_IS_SHARED(“the_connection”, “the_connection”)
o Notes:
• Returns 1 if one connection is a sub connection of the other.

440
 • Returns 0 if the connections are not related.

• CONN_IS_TYPE
o Type:
• Runtime
o Input:
• BINARY OID
• INT
o Return:
• INT
o Usage:
• CONN_IS_TYPE(“the_connection”, ‘1’)
o Notes:
• Returns 1 if connection is of a given type, this included any
parent connections that the supplied connection might belong to.
• Returns 0 if connection is not of the given type.

OID Functions
OID Functions supply additional information about OID BINARY columns.

• OID_HEAD
o Type:
• Runtime
o Input:
• BINARY OID
o Return:
• INT
o Usage:
• OID_HEAD(“oid”)
o Notes:
• Oids are unique within a single measurement loaded into the
database; this returns the ordinal count of that OID, for a given
measurement.
• These are not unique values, only when a HINT is used to define
a single measurement, will these values be truly unique.
• In that case however they can be used to order arrival from the
measurement log.

• OID_PATH
o Type:
• Runtime
o Input:
• BINARY OID
o Return:

441
 • STRING
o Usage:
• OID_PATH(“oid”)
o Notes:
• Returns a string describing the oids location in the database.
This is truly unique; however, OID_ADDRESS should be used
for performance reasons.

• OID_ADDRESS
o Type:
• Runtime
o Input:
• BINARY OID
o Return:
• STRING
o Usage:
• OID_ADDRESS(“oid”)
o Notes:
• Returns a string describing the oids location in the database. It
is however more performance designed than OID_PATH, in that
it uses a much short string that is generally not readable, but
truly unique all the same.

442
23 Appendix 6 – Nemo Analyze Stored Procedures
These Stored procedures are Keysight proprietary additions to OpenAccess SQL reference.

Stored procedures
Stored procedures are used in SQL to perform more complex functions that normally allowed by
queries or to build result sets for later use, they can also be used as functions to return one or more
values based on input in a non-result set fashion.

In this appendix each scalar function will be described as follows

• Type: Lists above mentioned type (either dynamic or fixed).
• Input: Lists the different input values need for this function.
• Return: Lists the columns and data types in the result set.
• Usage: Example of syntax.
• Notes: Provides description of function and other need information.

Fixed procedures

QSR Procedures
• QSR_DISTANCE
o Type:
• Fixed Result Set
o Input:
• direction STRING
• min DOUBLE
• max DOUBLE
• interval DOUBLE
• units STRING
• threshold DOUBLE
• threshold_condition STRING
• statement STRING
o Return:
• range STRING
• cumulation DOUBLE
• cumulation_sampled DOUBLE
• density DOUBLE
• density_sampled DOUBLE
o Usage:
• CALL QSR_DISTANCE(“UP”, 0, 100, 1, “db”, “-2”, “<”, “SELECT value,
length FROM SomeTable”)
o Notes:
• Log

443
 • The basic function of this procedure is the figure weighted averages
based on two column input, firstly a value to be averaged and secondly a
weight that is defined as the distance (meters for example) that the value
was valid.
• Qsr distance takes several different inputs that define a set of rules to
figure a set of averages from based on the values returned from the last
input parameter (a SQL statement).
• The output consists of a result set that defines a range of
different averages based on the input limits. Each range is
derived as steps between the min and max inputs based on the
interval of each step.
• SR_SAMPLE
o Type:
• Fixed Result Set
o Input:
• direction STRING
• min DOUBLE
• max DOUBLE
• interval DOUBLE
• units STRING
• threshold DOUBLE
• threshold_condition STRING
• statement STRING
o Return:
• range STRING
• cumulation DOUBLE
• cumulation_sampled DOUBLE
• density DOUBLE
• density_sampled DOUBLE
o Usage:
• CALL QSR_SAMPLE(“UP”, 0, 100, 1, “db”, “-2”, “<”, “SELECT value,
length FROM SomeTable”)
o Notes:
• The basic function of this procedure is the figure simple averages based
on a single input.
• The SQL statement should contain on a single column that defines a
result set that is a list of values. These values are figured using simple
averaging math.
• The output consists of a result set that defines a range of different
averages based on the input limits. Each range is derived as steps
between the min and max inputs based on the interval of each step.

• QSR_TIME
o Type:
• Fixed Result Set
o Input:

444
 • direction STRING
• min DOUBLE
• max DOUBLE
• interval DOUBLE
• units STRING
• threshold DOUBLE
• threshold_condition STRING
• statement STRING
o Return:
• range STRING
• cumulation DOUBLE
• cumulation_sampled DOUBLE
• density DOUBLE
• density_sampled DOUBLE
o Usage:
• CALL QSR_TIME(“UP”, 0, 100, 1, “db”, “-2”, “<”, “SELECT value,
length FROM SomeTable”)
o Notes:
• The basic function of this procedure is the figure weighted averages
based on two column input, firstly a value to be averaged and secondly a
weight that is defined as the time (milliseconds for example) that the
value was valid.
• Qsr distance takes several different inputs that define a set of rules to
figure a set of averages from based on the values returned from the last
input parameter (a SQL statement).
• The output consists of a result set that defines a range of
different averages based on the input limits. Each range is
derived as steps between the min and max inputs based on the
interval of each step.

GPS procedures
• GPS_MEAS_DATA
o Type:
• Fixed Result Set
o Input:
• measurement STRING
o Return:
• distance INT
• height INT
• quality INT
• velocity INT
• number_of_satellites INT
• longitude DOUBLE
• latitude DOUBLE

445
 • time BINARY TIME
o Usage:
• CALL GPS_MEAS_DATA(“SomeMeasurementName”)
o Notes:
• This procedure takes as input a single measurement name; it
then returns a complete list of all GPS locations reported during
that measurement.
• The time is defined as the point of appearance for the location.
• Binary time also contains the interval of time at each location.

• GPS_MEAS_DATA_WITH_SQL_TIME
o Type:
• Fixed Result Set
o Input:
• measurement STRING
o Return:
• distance INT
• height INT
• quality INT
• velocity INT
• number_of_satellites INT
• longitude DOUBLE
• latitude DOUBLE
• time SQL TIMESTAMP
o Usage:
• CALL
GPS_MEAS_DATA_WITH_SQL_TIME(“SomeMeasurementName”)
o Notes:
• This procedure takes as input a single measurement name; it
then returns a complete list of all GPS locations reported during
that measurement.
• The time is defined as the point of appearance for the location.

446
 BTS Procedures
• BTS_QUEST
o Type:
• Fixed Result Set
o Input:
• measurement STRING (HINT SYNTAX FOR MEAS
HINT)
• bts_list STRING
o Return:
• time SQL TIMESTAMP
• sid INT (SITE ID VALUE)
• cid INT (CELL ID VALUE)
• type INT ( 1 for serving, 0 for neighbor)
o Usage:
• CALL BTS_QUEST(“SomeMeasurementName:dt|dt2”, “btsfile”)
o Notes:
• Procedure returns a result set using measurement and BTS
information to construct a list of when the measurement device
was locked to a given site and cell at a given time.

Decoder Procedures
Several of the decoders are basically just the same except that they decode different message types
based on their name. So they will be listed together.

• MSG_DECODER_LAYER3
• MSG_DECODER_LAYER2
• MSG_DECODER_LLC
• MSG_DECODER_MAC
• MSG_DECODER_RRC
• MSG_DECODER_RRLP
• MSG_DECODER_RTP
o Type:
• Fixed Result Set
o Input:
• system INT
• frequency INT (also known as band)
• protocol INT (revision number)
• direction INT (1 up, 2 down)
• sub_channel STRING
• msg_name STRING
• msg_data STRING
o Return:
• decoded_string STRING

447
 o Usage:
• CALL MSG_DECODER_LAYER3(‘1’, ‘1900’, ‘1’, ‘2’, ‘DCCH’,
‘ACTIVATE_PDP_CONTEXT_ACCEPT’, ‘8A 42 03’)
o Notes:
• Procedure returns a result set with a single column and row that
is the decoded string based on the input.

• MSG_DECODER
o Type:
• Fixed Result Set
o Input:
• type STRING
• system INT
• frequency INT (also known as band)
• protocol INT (revision number)
• direction INT (1 up, 2 down)
• sub_channel STRING
• msg_name STRING
• msg_data STRING
o Return:
• decoded_string STRING
o Usage:
• CALL MSG_DECODER(‘L3D’, ‘1’, ‘1900’, ‘1’, ‘2’, ‘DCCH’,
‘ACTIVATE_PDP_CONTEXT_ACCEPT’, ‘8A 42 03’)
o Notes:
• This procedure is basically just like the other decoder procedures
except that it takes 1 additionally input parameter which is a
string that defines what actual decoder to use, rather than have a
locked function for each different message type.
• Procedure returns a result set with a single column and row that
is the decoded string based on the input.

448
 Dynamic Procedures
Dynamic procedures are much like fixed procedures except that the actual result set is defined at
runtime rather than fixed before execution.

• Nth_BEST
o Type:
• Dynamic Result Set
o Input:
• nth INT
• include_group INT
• include_value INT
• reverse INT
• statement STRING
o Return:
• In dynamic result sets the output varies based on input in the case of this
procedure the out is basically a copy of the SQL statement columns after
filtering and additional processing is done.
• The two inputs include_group and include_value if set to 0 define
columns that will be removed from the final output.
o Usage:
• CALL Nth_BEST (‘3’, ‘1’, ‘1’, ‘0’, “SELECT group, value, time FROM
SomeTable”)
• Example:
o 5, 3
o 5, 2
o 5, 23
o 1, 2
o 1, 3,
o 9, 44
o 9, 44
o 9, 6
o 3, 1

If you assume reverse is not select and an nth of 2, then the

output would be.
o 5, 3
o 1, 3
o 9, 44

449
 o Notes:
• The purpose of the Nth_BEST procedure is to except a SQL
statement as input and return the nth best value based on the
group id.
• The first column in the SQL statement result set must be a group
id in the form of an integer.
• The second column is the value to be compared based on the
grouping of the first column.
• Setting reverse to 1 will return the nth based on ordinal from
lowest value rather than ordinal from high value.
•

• MATH_TWO_COLUMN
o Type:
• Dynamic Result Set
o Input:
• mfunction INT
• singleavg INT
• outputcolumn STRING
• statement STRING
o Return:
• In dynamic result sets the output varies based on input in the case of this
procedure the out is basically a copy of the SQL statement columns after
filtering and additional processing is done.
o Usage:
• CALL MATH_TWO_COLUMN (‘1’, ‘1’, “ADDITION”, “SELECT value1,
value2, time FROM SomeTable”)
o Notes:
• MATH_TWO_COLUMN takes the first two values from the SQL
input statement and performs various math functions on them
based on the selected mfunction variable. The resulting output
removes the two columns from the query and replaces them with
a single column named from the outputcolumn variable.
• The following functions apply.
1) Addition
2) Subtraction
3) Multiplication
4) Division
5) Modulus Division
6) Max
7) Min
8) Power (second column is applied as a power for the first column)

450
 This information is subject to change
without notice.
© Keysight Technologies, Inc. 2020
Published in USA, November 10, 2020
NTN00000A-90011

451